Home

CX-Supervisor User Manual

Contents

1. Cancel apt Help The Unit Number is the identifier for the network being configured The Destination Network Address and Destination Node Number identify the connection point to the network A PLC can be selected to act as a gateway to the PLC being edited this list is restricted to the PLCs contained in the current project Selecting the Driver tab results in the Driver Configuration view being displayed this part of the Network Settings dialog helps to ensure that data 1s transmitted correctly over the network Release 1 3 Page 79 CHAPTER 6 Projects Note If a timeout occurs the communication is not complete Offset value in milliseconds to ensure that the device does not cause a timeout Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default pushbutton Connection PortName JAANE Baud Aate 9600 Baud Rate uto etect Network Settings SY5 MAC WAT x Network Driver Modem Data Format Data Bits E T Parity Even nd Stop Bits E Make Default Cancel Arale Help Modifying a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog a PLC name may be modified by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog and clicking the Modify pushbutton This results in the Change PLC dialog being displayed Page 80 Change PLC Device Type cs16 Settings Network Type SYSMAC way Y Settings Com
2. and create a new file For example if a file Batch1 2000032922 dlv_ is detected as being invalid it will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 dlv A new Batch1 2000032922 dlv file will then be created to log the new data If the file Batch1 2000032922 d1v already exists then the current invalid file will be renamed Batch1 2000032922 1 dlv and so on This is most likely to occur during the development of an application when Data items are continually being amended and tested Invalid files are not part of the Data Set files and can not be purged or found by the File Management next or previous searches The data recorded in these files is not lost and can be viewed using the Data Log Viewer and exported from them using Export Log Invalid files can only be deleted using Windows explorer Data Set Period Examples The following examples show how the specified period Hour s Day s Month s is implemented while the System is running 1 Data Set period Hours If a Data Set named CV500 starts logging at 12 30 on the 7th March 1999 with a period of 6 hours the following files will be created CV500 1999030712 dlv If the s7stem is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files CV500 1999030712 dlv CV500 1999030718 dlv CV500 1999030800 dlv CV500 1999030806 dlv The first file will only contain 5 5 hours of Data because the minimum resolution is one hour and the file
3. Before After Rotate f The Rotate button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be rotated With an object selected clicking the button once opens the Rotate dialog box Set the desired angle and click the OK pushbutton to rotate the object Rotate E Cancel The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Rotate button and defining a 10 rotation with the object selected Page 6 Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Before Rotated 10 Horizontal Mirror tq The Mirror Horizontal button on the Control Bar allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the horizontal plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a horizontal mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Mirror Horizontal button with the object selected Before After Vertical Mirror 32 The Mirror Vertical button allows graphical and bitmap objects to be mirrored in the vertical plane With an object selected clicking the button once flips the object producing a vertical mirror image The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Mirror Vertical button with the object selected Before After Transparency On Off I The Transparency button changes an object from solid to outline and from outline to solid With an object selected click
4. Click the Print Recipe toolbar button to send a copy of the recipe to the printer See chapter 10 Printing Recipes for a typical example of the formatted output a A summary of recipe information is available by selecting the Recipe Information button from the toolbar The Recipe Information dialog is displayed see chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor for an example Downloading a Recipe There are two ways of downloading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is DownLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt m The other way to download a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the Download Recipe pushbutton The Download Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Page 168 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Download Coffee Irish Editable Quantity E xpression Ingredient Hame Cancel Modify Target The Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog shown above An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is of a temporary nature and is not permanently changed in the recipe definition Any number of ingr
5. CX Supervisor Preferences CX Supervisor allows a user to customise the working environment To set or amend the CX Supervisor setup select Preferences from the File menu followed by the preference to set up Page 20 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages The types of customisation are described in the following paragraphs Startup Preferences The Startup Preferences allows the project last accessed in the previous session of CX Supervisor to be automatically loaded in the next session It is accessible by selecting Startup from the Preferences menu Click in the Load last project on startup setting to switch this preference as desired Click the OK pushbutton to accept the change or Cancel to abort Startup Preferences Startup Preferences See beatles ea do Cancel Editing Preferences The Editing Preferences dialog provides a number of switches to enhance the use of the Graphics Editor and CX Supervisor animation It is accessed by selecting Editing from the Preferences menu The number of undo operations in the Graphics Editor can be set in the Number of Available Undo Operations field To make the Graphics Editor return to Select Mode after every drawing operation click in the Revert to Select Mode after Drawing Operations setting The use of double clicking on an object can be defined when a check mark is present in the Enter Edit Mode field a double click on an object of that type causes 1t to enter Edit Mo
6. Generally the procedures for creating objects are identical A pushbutton representing the desired object is clicked on the Graphic Object bar The mouse pointer is then either clicked on the page for a default sized object or clicked and dragged to the appropriate point on the page for a custom sized object Editing Objects Editing falls into three distinct categories Y Re sizing an object Re shaping an object Modifying an object using a Wizard Re sizing To re size an object click on it with the left mouse button This selects it and brings up green sizing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired size Re shaping Re shaping procedures are similar for all graphical objects which can be reshaped Not all can Control objects can only be reshaped using Wizards To change the shape of a graphical object choose Edit Object from the Edit menu to bring up the red editing grab handles Click and drag the handles until the object is of the desired shape The typeface of the editor can be amended by choosing Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing CX Supervisor preferences can be configured such that double clicking on a graphical object also brings up the red editing grab handles Setting this preference is achieved by selecting Preferences from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages for further details on preferences and CX Supervisor configuration R
7. There is no theoretical limit to the number of scripts associated with a page but performance of the application will be reduced the more scripts there are Q What is the maximum limit of number of recipes There is no theoretical limit to the number of recipes except limits imposed by the size of memory of the PC In practice no more than 10 000 should be created on a standard PC configuration Q What is the maximum limit of number of event error log entries The maximum number of entries in the event error log is 500 Release 1 3 Page 285 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q What is the maximum limit of number of Users For users or CX Supervisor versions 1 21 and later the maximum number of Users that can be configured is 500 For users or CX Supervisor versions 1 2 and earlier the maximum number of Users that can be configured is 100 Q Why do get the message Failed To Install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied error message During installation the following error can occur Failed to install MSVCRT DLL Access Denied This file 1s locked by the system so must be configured to install on the next reboot However the current user priviledges prevent access to the system registry to do this This problem has only been seen on Windows NT To correct this problem and allow full installation you must log on to your computer with administrator rights Either log onto your network as the network Administrator or
8. Although an impressivel5 runtime languages are supported you may require a language not listed A developer can easily add support for further languages 1 2 3 1 Copy the file English Ing in the installed application folder default is C Program Files Omron CX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American Ing 2 Translate the text between quotes Note that formatting characters like s or d indicate a position for inserted text or numbers so should be left in the relevant place Also the amp character used in menus signifies the keyboard shortcut for the item so select an appropriate character in the translated language 3 The Runtime will now automatically show any new files with LNG extension in the Language Settings dialog 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for the same file with the LND extension This provides the translations for the Data Log Viewer 5 Create a new language file for the user defined text as described in the section User Defined Text above To deploy this language to a new machine just install CX Supervisor as normal and then copy the LNG and LND file to the installed application folder These languages will then be available for all applications run on this machine When copying the application files also include the newly translated UDT files Page 222 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features Popup keyboard layout The layout of c
9. MsgBox in all conditional branches CX Supervisor Syntax errors These are seen during development when OK is pressed on the Script dialog when the script type is CX Supervisor script To troubleshoot further e Refer to the comprehensive CX Supervisor Script Reference manual or on line help for detailed information including examples on specific script instructions e Double check capitalisation and objects names e To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the syntax error is no longer reported e As atest try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction 1s causing the error e As atest simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error e As atest use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values Runtime errors If any script has correct syntax but generates an error at runtime e g trying to open a file that does not exist the error is recorded in the Error Log To troubleshoot further e To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the error is no longer reported e Display values using MsgBox Message command or using the LogEvent command Design errors The only remaining errors are when the script compiles and runs correctly but do not produce the expected results These are typica
10. page of records will be read into all the Field Associations connected to the Recordset In contrast to performing a read operation at the Field level which will override the page size and use the individual fields length Configuring Parameter Associations When a Recordset which is defined as a Server Query is opened the query is executed and the set of records produced The Server Query may be defined in the database as requiring parameters to be passed which allow criteria to be passed to the query Recordsets defined in CX Supervisor as Server Queries may have Parameter Associations added to the recordset Recordsets defined as a Table Name or SQL Text do not use parameters hence any Parameter Associations are ignored Parameter associations provide a means of supplying values to parameters whenever a Server Query is run Each required parameter defined within the query is associated with a point or constant value At the time the Query is run the current value of the point or the constant value is passed to the query Under the Development Environment the points default value is used Parameter Associations are added by right clicking the Recordset and selecting Add Parameter from the popup menu The following dialog is shown Release 1 3 Page 201 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Add Parameter Parameter Properties Mame tart Date Index li Data Type Date Time a Value 3 93 Braise Use point to hold pa
11. snaps an equal distance from the original position of the object against the grid Currently the object has been moved five grid steps down shown by the bracket Alignment Toolbox Objects on a page can be aligned in a variety of ways using the Alignment toolbar It is possible to Page 66 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects El E Click the Left Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their left edge Click the Right Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their right edge iji Click the Top Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their top edge f 4 al l El Click the Centre Horizontally on Page button from the toolbar to centre objects on a page horizontally Click the Centre Vertically on Page button from the toolbar to centre objects on a page vertically Click the Bottom Alignment button from the toolbar to align objects along their bottom edge Click the Centre Align Horizontal button from the toolbar to align objects on their horizontal centres Click the Centre Align Vertical button from the toolbar to align objects on their vertical centres Click the Make Same Width button from the toolbar to make objects the same width Click the Make Same Height button from the toolbar to make objects the same height Click the Make Same Height and Width button from the toolbar to make objects the same width and height Click the Align to Grid butto
12. Mame 5 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type AdobePS HF Lasentet 551 Where Ao hp laserjet beim Comment Faper Orientation Size Ad bl Portrait Source AutoSelect Tray C Landscape The current printer selection is defined in the Name control box To alter the settings proceed as follows y a an ee 1 To change the current printer selection click the Name field and select from the list presented 2 To change the page orientation from portrait to landscape click the Landscape setting or vice versa 3 To change the paper size click the Size field and select the desired paper size from the list presented 4 To change the paper source click the Source field and select the desired paper source from the list presented 5 Click the OK pushbutton to exit from the Print Setup dialog when the settings are correct Note The Properties pushbutton gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions refer to the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu This results in a screen display similar to the following Release 1 3 Page 17 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Balloon Page ES Al Do Bal lom Page K dl A l2 ess 1 To print the page click the Print pushbutton CX Supervisor d
13. fH Start i Position the cursor in column A and paste the CX Supervisor Points into Excel The worksheet should resemble the following of E X Microsoft Excel Booki 138 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help JOSH GRY SBBES O o SS SK 4a MOB 100 2 10 B Z UES BS x Bl o A Sliderln1 C D E F G H J K E On Interval PLC Input C200H DMs 1 Single wor Always Up Enabled 0 to 100 0 None None None Each row is a single point and each column is a setting of that point Note Some settings may be hidden on the right Use the scrollbar to view 5 Edit the point details as required Note To quickly create new points with the same settings select the whole row by clicking the row number on the left A range can now be drawn to be filled by dragging the black square box on the bottom left of the range selection Release 1 3 Page 35 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Arial lio y Excel will automatically increment any data ending in a number This can be very useful for Names and PLC Addresses columns A and F but take care with other columns If other columns are wrongly incremented like PLC Name Array size and Data Range columns E G and K these can quickly be copied by selecting the correct value e g G1 then using the square box to highlight the column of data to fill To see the fill options hold down the right mouse button bef
14. 2 times 55 to 164 99 milliseconds nearly 3 times 55 For this reason Sleep statements can act differently on different Operating Systems making the application OS dependant Note 3 Sleep should never be used as a delay for timing processes for the following reasons The actual time delay depends on the OS Release 1 3 Page 281 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON There is always an error of 0 to 1 granularity depending on when the action is started The frequency cannot be guaranteed as the OS may be busy or handling other processes Note 4 Because of Note 2 and Note 3 above Sleep should not be used for creating output or logic pulses e g setting a bit on sleeping then setting the bit off Instead just use the PC to set the bit and allow the PLC to clear the bit either after a duration timed by the PLC real time clock or when the triggered process is complete The requirement for Sleep is quite simple but the implementation is actually very complex In the example above the application must continue to run during the pause i e read PLC data log data check alarms animate graphics etc For this reason any script with a Sleep statement must be executed in parallel with the system This can result in unexpected results when a Sleep is added and previously functioning script commands are now running in parallel Redesign the script considering parallel processing This can also result in unexpected behaviour
15. Changing the Viewing Mode Point Editor 25 Closing a Page Saving a Page to a Project 20 Colour Palette Graphics Editor 2 COM 321 Communications Control Properties 232 245 Communications Drive 321 Compiling and Running a Project 97 Configured Users Runtime Security 93 Configuring a Client PC under Win 98 Me Running Windows 98 303 Configuring a client PC under Win NT 2000 Running Windows NT 2000 259 260 Configuring a PC for remote connection 259 Configuring a Server PC under Win 98 Me Running Windows 98 304 Configuring a Server PC under Win NT 2000 Running Windows NT 2000 260 261 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application 237 Control Bar Horizontal Mirror 7 Lower Down One 6 Object Identification 5 Raise Up One 5 Rotate 6 Transparency On Off 7 Vertical Mirror 7 Control Objects Alarm Objects 48 Bar Chart 50 Bitmap 52 Linear Gauge 53 Pushbutton 54 Rotary Gauge 55 Scatter Graph 56 Slider 58 Toggle Button 59 Release 1 3 OMRON Trend Graph 61 Control Tool Bar 4 Conversation Attributes Creating Points 32 Copy Manipulating Objects 64 Create Runtime Install Disc 98 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application 240 Creating a CX Supervisor Server application 239 Creating a Page 13 Creating a PLC Connection Device Configuration 77 Creating a Point 27 Advanced Point Setting 32 Conversion Attributes 32
16. CommitTrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the transaction begun before it Note Care should be taken to ensure that each BeginTrans is matched with a CommitTrans or RollbackTrans to ensure that your work is saved or discarded as required If there are any pending transactions when a connection is closed the user will be prompted to either commit or rollback these outstanding transactions A DBExecute command TransCount is available which returns the number of pending transactions Note Not all Providers support use of Transactions Release 1 3 Page 207 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Saving Recordsets as XML Using the DBExecute Save command any Recordset may be saved as an XML file to be imported in to another application XML resembles and complements HTML XML describes data such as city name temperature and barometric pressure and HTML defines tags that describe how the data should be displayed such as with a bulleted list or a table XML however allows developers to define an unlimited set of tags bringing great flexibility to authors who can decide which data to use and determine its appropriate standard or custom tags Example XML is used to describe an Employees phone list lt EmployeeList gt lt Entry gt lt Employee gt John Jones lt Employee gt lt Phone gt 555 1213 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Mobile lt Type gt lt Entry gt lt Entry gt lt Employee gt Sally Mae lt Employee gt lt Pho
17. Control Bar 7 VGA 327 Video Graphics Adapter 327 Viewing Points 24 Viewing Project Details Project Editor 103 Viewing the Contents of a Project Project Editor 102 Views Details view 25 103 113 125 158 Large icon view 25 103 113 125 158 List view 25 103 113 125 158 Small icon view 25 103 113 125 158 Visual Basic See VBScript Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual W What is a Point 23 What is OPC 225 Windows Desktop 327 Windows Scripting Host 327 Windows Taskbar 327 Wizard 327 Gauge Wizard 54 55 Pushbutton Wizard 54 Slider Wizard 58 Toggle Button Wizard 59 Trend Graph 61 Wizards Editing Objects 46 WSH See Windows Scripting Host Z Zoom Manipulating objects 67 Page 339
18. Justification 11 Library using the Graphics 108 Lower down one 6 Mirroring 7 Object identity 5 Object identity modify 5 Objects 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 Overview 1 Palette 1 Palettes extending choice from 3 Raise up one 6 Status Bar 11 Text 5 11 Text bold 11 Text italics 11 Text underline 11 Tool Box 1 4 Tools Palette 4 Transparency 8 Underline 11 Graphics Library See Library Activating the Library 105 Creating Library 105 Modify a Library 106 Opening a Library 106 Graphics Objects Tool Bar 4 Graphs See Trend Graph Grid Graphics Editor 11 Group Manipulating objects 65 Group Attributes 233 GUI 324 A Horizontal Mirror Control Bar 7 I I O Attributes Creating Points 30 VO Types Creating Points 29 Release 1 3 OMRON I O Update Rate Creating Points 30 Icon 324 Industrial Components Connecting 243 Internal Points Point Import 39 Item 324 Item Attributes 234 J Java Script See JScript JScript 324 JVM 324 K Keyboard only control 85 152 153 L Language Setting default 215 Language settings 91 Languages Adding runtime 222 Library About 105 Access 105 Adding a new object 107 Copying an object from a library 107 Creating a library 105 Creating a new library file 106 Default objects 109 Editing library attributes 106 Graphics Editor using the 108 Icon 10
19. System language and only ONE other User language at a time Although all User languages are supported to swap between them the Control Panel settings must be changed and the computer rebooted This prevents CX Supervisor providing dynamic switching between User languages It is still possible however to have multilingual applications For example on an English version of Windows NT it is possible to support dynamic switching between English French or other languages using purely Western character sets and Russian Alternatively on a German Windows to support German and Greek However it is not possible to switch from Russian to Greek unless one of these is the System language To achieve these multilingual settings follow these steps 1 Start Windows in the normal way 2 Open Control Panel and select Regional Settings 3 On the Regional Settings tab choose the required language 4 Select the Set as default system locale option 5 Add all the Input Locales required and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Release 1 3 Page 219 CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features OMRON Loading old projects Projects and pages created in CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Double Byte Character Sets known as DB
20. and writing data Chapter 13 Multilingual Features This chapter describes the Multilingual features including creation of dynamically switching applications Chapter 14 OPC Client This chapter introduces OPC Server to a new user and explains how to use CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Revision 1 3 Page v CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page vi Chapter 15 Connecting to a Remote CX Supervisor application This chapter explains how to create a distributed solution by connecting together CX Supervisor applications on networked PCs Chapter 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components This chapter details connecting CX Supervisor to Omron s Industrial Components Chapter 17 Best Practices This chapter details the best practices to get the most from CX Supervisor including how to plan and design your application Appendix A Configuring a PC for remote connection The appendix explains how to configure a PC for remote connection Appendix B Frequently asked questions The appendix list some FAQs and of course their answers Appendix C Troubleshooting The appendix is a guide to troubleshooting and resolving problems Appendix D CX Server error codes The appendix lists the error codes from the communication software CX Server and their meanings Appendix E Obsolete Features The appendix details obsolete features for backwards compatibility only A Glossary of Terms and Index are also
21. disable height width horizontal fill vertical f11l move rotate display and close These are both quicker and clearer e Keep scripts short Although the script editor can manage hundreds of lines this would suggest a serious design problem Consider 30 lines as a practical maximum Data Logging This section covers some data logging related good practices e Utilise Data Logging performance Always use the inbuilt Data Logging in preference to trend graphs or file I O functions as the performance is far superior e Always use On Change Always log data On Change There is no sampling error and CPU disk activity and storage required are almost certainly reduced Page 256 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Best Practices e Use deadband option Consider using the deadband option especially for noisy analogue signals to reduce the actual logging and storage requirements e Don t Keep all files The Dataset Keep all files checkbox defaults On for complete data retention but this should be cleared to stop the Hard Disk filling up Release 1 3 Page 257 OMRON APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection The OPC interface and CX Supervisor Communications Control use a Microsoft technology called DCOM This allows the Clients and Servers to be seamlessly Distributed over a PC network The Server should be running on the PC w
22. followed by Paste from the Edit menu Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt V Insert Tab Code A tab character can be inserted into the script code if required in a number of ways Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field followed by Tab from the Edit menu Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field and then pressing lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Page 134 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Finding and Replacing Text Text can be found and replaced within the current script as follows Select Find Replace from the Edit menu and type appropriate text in the Find what and Replace with fields Press the Find pushbutton to initiate the search and lt Return gt to execute text replacement Clear Script Code Field The script code field can be cleared if required Selecting Clear All from the Edit menu Script Completion Once script entry or script modification is complete click the OK pushbutton To abort the Script Editor prior to completing the task click the Cancel pushbutton If there is an error in the script the Compilation Error s dialog is displayed Compilation Errors x CH Supervisor Balloon Demonstration Fish jumping script ENDIF Syntax error 1 compilation error s In this example the error is caused by a spurious ENDIF This dialog inform
23. possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character sets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this follow these steps l Ze 3 6 Note Start Windows in the normal way Open Control Panel and select Regional and Language options The Regional Options tab settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required On the Languages tab click Details Add all the Input Locales required and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes it may be necessary to select the required language on the Advanced tab for Language for non Unicode programs Microsoft does not document the reason for this Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this Windows 2000 Windows 2000 language support is reasonable It is possible to install language support for multiple languages multiple character sets and fonts multiple keyboard layouts for input and to switch between them To achieve this f
24. set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Log settings as required When these options are set the Current Alarms dialog or Alarm History dialog respectively displays automatically in runtime when an alarm occurs Set the Maximum entries in Status and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialogs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON if required If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed the most recent messages are displayed in preference to older messages The Alarm Sound pushbutton allows the selection of an audible warning which are heard when an alarm is raised The Open Waveform File dialog is shown below Page 112 Open Waveform File x File Mame Directories O coh eceveU0betademos Cancel gt SCSW20Beta El ap EJ Bakery EJ Balloon El E Comms x E DDE List Files of Type Drives waveform file vav Sc Network Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Choosing a waveform file with this dialog does not in itself cause the warning sound to be heard when an alarm is raised To hear the audible warning for any alarm the Play Sound setting in the alarm definition must be ticked Also the PC on which CX Supervisor 1s running must be equipped with a suitable sound card and audio capability Viewing the Contents of the Alar
25. 100 then a PLC value of 500 would correspond to a point value of 50 The conversion would be performed just before the data is sent to the PLC or immediately upon receipt of it from the PLC On completion of the PLC configuration connection click the OK pushbutton to continue or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Click the Add PLC pushbutton to create a new PLC connection Information relating to the selection of this pushbutton is described in chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration Advanced Point Settings Advanced settings can be applied to a new point by clicking the Advanced pushbutton in the Add Point dialog This results in the Advanced Point Settings dialog being displayed Page 32 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Advanced Point Settings OLE Access Asher et cee Cancel DDE Access M Read Only D Resd iavrite F Non olatile Validate Point is Within Specified Range In order to access a CX Supervisor point value via OLE2 Automation or Dynamic Data Exchange it must be given OLE Read or OLE Write access The scope of the access can be defined by checking the appropriate setting in the OLE Access and DDE Access options The point value which is stored to disk may be Volatile or Non volatile by selecting or deselecting the Non Volatile check box A Non volatile point ensures the preservation of the point s value at regular intervals If power is lost or CX Supervisor is shut down for any reason then whe
26. 1000 is too many e When a group is selected the point list is refreshed and re sorted The sort algorithm takes longer if it has a large list to sort This is normally quick but if the list is large and the points are already in the correctly sorted order in the database then it can take a while because of the way the sorting algorithm works Q Why does setting slider value result in erratic movement of slider action The movement of the slider bar can appear to return to its previous setting once it has been re set After setting the slider to a value it will read the actual value from the PLC this value is then shown in the slider resulting in the slider moving from the re set value to the old value the slider then starts to move towards the re set value This actually better reflects the current value in the PLC but can be undesirable In this case de select the Immediate update on slide move option in the slider wizard to prevent it Q How do optimise my use of animations Animation actions from the Animation Editor can be applied directly to the objects being animated This means that you don t have to define lots of memory points to hold intermediate values Just link the appropriate action to the object using the Animation Editor and enter the required expression For example using expression TemperatureK 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point Boolean expressions can easily written to
27. 125 Q Why are ActiveX events shown differently in the Animation Editor and Property Browser New in CX Supervisor version 1 2 the ActiveX Property Browser has an Events Tab which allows the object s events to be linked to scripts These scripts are defined as VBScript subroutines defined in the Page Initialisation script It is more efficient to load these subroutines once during page initialisation than every time the event occurs as per previous versions using the Animation Editor However this method is still supported to allow editing of old projects This difference is by design and is correct Q Why does CX Supervisor show different ActiveX properties to Visual Basic or Excel Properties of ActiveX controls shown in the CX Supervisor ActiveX Property Browser may differ from those seen in the Visual Basic or Excel property browser This can be for one or more of the following reasons e Both Visual Basic and Excel show their own container properties in this window as well as the object properties CX Supervisor does not show its container properties Examples of VBA container properties are Causes Validation DataSource Draglcon DragMode Height HelpContextID Index Left TabIndex TabStop Tag ToolTipText Top Visible WhatsThisHelpID Width Release 1 3 Page 283 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON e CX Supervisor only shows properties with data types it can
28. 1t must be given either OLE Read or OLE Write access This can be achieved by checking the appropriate box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog when the point is created or modified Note All CX Supervisor System points are given OLE2 read access by default CX Supervisor exposes the following Runtime functions via OLE2 Automation SetValue stringPointName Value Enables any point with OLE Read Write access to be modified value may be Boolean integer long or string GetValue stringPointName amp Value Enables any point with OLE Read access to be monitored value may be Boolean integer long or string QueryCount Returns the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database Page 312 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features Queryld stringPointName Returns the WORD id of a given point name The id is an integer in the range between and the total number of points in the CX Supervisor database QueryOLE wordID Returns the Read Write access rights of a point as an integer O represents no access type 1 represents Read Only 2 represents Read Write 3 represents an invalid access type 4 QueryType wordID Returns the points data type as an integer from a given id 0 represents a void datatype 1 represents a digital datatype 2 represents an integer datatype 3 represents a real datatype 4 represents a text datatype 5 represents an invalid datatype QueryName wordID Returns the points nam
29. 6 ENDIF DDE Script Functions The existing DDE Script functions DDEPoke and DDERequest can be used with any array points as the following example CX Supervisor Scripts show 1 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDEPoke with arrays Page 309 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON chan DDEInitiate Excel Bookl Sheet2 IF chan gt O THEN Send element 1 of RealArray to Excel DDEPoke chan R16C1 RealArray 1 Send IntegerArray to Excel as a column note range and column must be specified DDEPoke chan R1C1 R3C1 column IntegerArray Send TextArray to Excel as a row default only range required DDEPoke chan R1C2 R1C4 TextArray ENDIF 2 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating DDERequest with arrays chan DDEInitiate Excel Book1 Sheet3 IF chan gt O THEN Request a row of cells from Excel and copy into Arrayl Arrayl DDERequest chan R1C1 R1C3 Request a column of cells from Excel and copy into Array2 using the return flag Array2 DDERequest chan R1C2 R3C2 bReturnFlag Request a cell value from Excel and copy into element 2 of Arrayl Array1 2 DDERequest chan R3C2 ENDIF Note All the above points must have DDE Read Write access set DDE Server Array Points The value of an array point named ddearray in a CX Supervisor project called ddetest srt can be read from a Micr
30. Angle i O FF Display Units on Outside e Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks rf 3 D Frame The Wizard allows entry in the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields Release 1 3 Page 55 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON To select a style click on an entry in the Gauge Style field To select an Expression Attribute click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog 1s displayed click the OK pushbutton to accept the point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries Enter display angles by typing over the existing field entries Check the boxes to choose the required style attributes The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via the Title Font pushbutton The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font pushbutton The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for th
31. Change Digital dialog is displayed Colour Change Digital Digital E pressior OK Colours State O Colour E Cancel dd Browse State 1 Colour a IY Apply changes to object frame test colour e Apple changes to object background fill colour To specify a change in an object s colour enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE The colours are specified in the Colour Attributes fields for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting Page 144 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Digital dialog the Colour Palette dialog is displayed The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette To abort the Colour Change Digital edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Enable Disable Objects can be enabled or disabled This is achieved using the Enable Disable dialog To access the
32. Computer and select Security Center 3 Select Windows Firewall 4 On the General tab choose option Off b Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below Page 260 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP l 2 ess l start 2 de 4 5 Start Component Services e g by running DCOMCNFG EXE by selecting RUN from the start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM Select Component Services followed by Computers Right click My Computer and select Properties View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default COM Security tab adding the user to the Access Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the My Computer item in Component Services select DCOM Config and configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnu
33. Creating Editing Graphic Objects 47 Polyline Creating Editing Graphic Objects 47 Print Access 18 Advanced options 17 19 Alarm Message settings 88 Alarms 122 Collate copies 19 Copies number of 19 Landscape orientation 17 Number of copies 19 Page preview 17 18 Page print 18 19 Paper size 17 Paper source 17 Portrait orientation 17 Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Range 19 Specific printer 17 Print Preview Printing a Page 17 Print Preview Printing Points 41 Print Preview Printing from Project Editor 104 Print Setup Printing a Page 16 Print Setup Printing Points 41 Print Setup Printing from Project Editor 104 Printing Printing a Page 18 Printing Printing Points 41 42 Printing Printing from Project Editor 104 Printing a Project 77 Printing from Project Editor Print Preview 104 Print Setup 104 Printing 104 Printing Points Print Preview 41 Print Setup 41 Printing 41 42 Project About 75 326 Adding pages to a project 103 Advanced settings 92 Alarm settings 87 Alarm Message printer settings 88 Alias definitions 132 Alias definitions 99 Amending a Project 76 Animations 125 Colour palette 83 Compiling a project 97 Create runtime installation 98 Creating a new project 75 Creating a project 75 Deleting pages from a project 103 Editor Project See Project Editor Event Error messages 89 Ex
34. Display Alarms From Selected Groups Acknowledge Un Click Group Filter san Groups all Users Cancel Display Alarms From Selected Friorities Ent From Pricrity Lowest To Highest Alarm Status Colours Alarm Window Colours Into Alarm E M Blink E Alarm Ackd E M Blink EP Alarm Cleared E M Blink a Style Attributes Background Colour Title Colour C C Frame Colour W Display Date W Display Time e Display Alarm Status e Display Columna Titles e 3 0 Frame e Highest Priority at Top W Display Group W Display Priority Width Date a Time a Group fio Priority fio Status 20 Date Time Message Group Priority Status Date Time Message Group Priority Cleared Date Time Message Group Priority Acknowledged Date Time Message Group Priority Alarm Alarms are defined using the Alarm Editor refer to chapter 8 Alarms for information on using the Alarm Editor The Alarm Wizard allows entry of the alarm group filter alarm status colour codes and various style attributes The Alarm Wizard presents a preview of the alarm object which immediately updates to show the user selections as they are made y Oe ae 1 Select the name of the alarm group by which alarm messages are to be filtered using the Group field to display the list of available groups The default selection is lt A Groups gt which displays all alarm messages To display more than one group use the wildcard
35. Highlight one or more points and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut or lt Ctrl gt C to copy use lt Ctrl gt V to paste Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard points may be pasted to another CX Supervisor application See also Chapter 3 Quick creation of many points Note If the I O type ends with and a number it is an array point with the shown number of elements Viewing Points in the Point Editor The Point Editor view of the points database can be tailored by filtering or sorting the available points Filtering the Points in the View by Group Points are separated into groups To select a group pick an entry from the Group field All points can be displayed by selecting lt A Groups gt from this list Filtering the Points in the View by Point Type oia fir A selection of points can be displayed based on the point type Selection of the All Points button from the toolbar displays points of all types The Boolean Points button only displays points of a Boolean type The Integer Points button the Real Points button and Text Points button once selected react in the same way Sorting the Points in the View by I O Type lalola le Points can also be filtered by I O type Respectively these toolbar buttons display All Points Memory Points Input Points Output Points or Input Output Points Sorting the Points in the View Individual listed points are sorted based on
36. Industrial Components OMRON Communications Control Attributes Communications Control Attributes Server OMRONCICCommunicationsContra a i Device Bons ron o El Delete Array Size li Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls Select a control OMRON Ex Communications Control OMRON Cs IC Communications Control OMRON Cs OPC Communications Control OMRON C Supervisor Communications Control Cancel Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog will open the Communications Control Properties dialog from where the details can be added or updated To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu CX IC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES Page 244 Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 CHAPTER 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components OMRON CX IC Communications Control Properties Project IC Communication Control Settings Mame OMRON Cel Communications Control Project File Cancel Apply Help Name This is the name of the selected communic
37. Internet just search for the exact text of the error How to create steps to reproduce The first step in troubleshooting is creating steps to reproduce the problem Not only does this help understand the problem but is a requirement so that your potential fixes can be tested with confidence Computers and software are guaranteed to perform the same way with the given data and so there are always steps to reproduce although sometimes these can be difficult to find It can be timing dependant you have to do this exactly 1 342 seconds later or just very difficult to see a pattern However in most cases problems are quite repeatable Page 296 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting Once a problem can be reproduced the next step is to refine the steps to determine the exact cause The process should be repeated attempting to leave out one step at a time to confirm if that step is required Where scripts are executed each line should be removed to determine just the required steps to reproduce the problem Information necessary to send to Support If all these diagnostic suggestions fail and it becomes necessary to contact support please have the following information Release 1 3 Your software licence key The software version and build number e g 1 2 12 Also state if the project was upgraded from a previous version The EXACT wording and spelling of any error message If an application is being sent it s
38. Interval Time 100 Milliseconds Aliases F Stretchable Script Code CB Script C Supervisor Script C Supervisor Balloon Demonstration Fish jumping script IF THEN ELSE ENDIF if FishJurmp then if Fish4ngle 0 0 then Aingl Size 1 Ringi visible TRUE endif Fish amp ngle Fish ngle 3 14 20 if Fish4ngle gt 3 14 then FishJump FALSE Fish visible FALSE Aing 51ze 1 Ring visible TRUE else Fish rotate FishAngle 360 6 28 Fish mowe nFish naole 1 57 8 c02 Fish ngle 1 57 28 endif When creating the script choosing an action function etc from the menu may require further information This subsequent information is provided using some common dialogs the Select Required Item dialog the Simple Expression Entry dialog and the Object Selection dialog Use the Select Required Item dialog to pick a point to associate with the current action It is accessed by clicking the Browse pushbutton from the current dialog This results in the Select Required Item dialog being displayed Page 130 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Select Required ltem Cancel Point Hames i Add Alias 4ctivedlarms 4 larmCount Add Point available emon 0 ayOfMonth l DavDfear teme Displayed Demokode Aliases Disk Space ae GD AResources Paints Highdlarms HighE rors M Boolean ee Integer Description H rea Text TT Exclude Syste
39. Note The actual schemas are defined by the OLE DB specification and Providers are not required to support all of the OLE DB standard schema queries Specifically only Schema Tables Schema Columns and Schema Provider Types are required by the OLE DB specification However the provider 1s not required to support the Criteria constraints listed above for those schema queries Using Transactions Modifications of data in the database i e adding modifying and deleting records can be grouped so that all modifications take place at the same time This group of modifications is called a Transaction A Transaction includes any modifications to data in a connection regardless of the Recordset A transaction is started by calling DBExecute with the BeginTrans command From that point any request to add modify or delete records are stored instead of being immediately processed The Transaction is completed either by calling DBExecute with the CommitTrans command which processes all the stored requests in one go or by calling DBExecute with the RollbackTrans command which discards all the stored requests leaving the database as 1t was when the Transaction started Nested Transactions Transactions may be nested that is a new transaction may be started before the preceding transaction has been completed In this case any CommitTrans or RollbackTrans commands relate to the most recently started transaction and any further
40. On Interval Subscription points The graphs show e Upgrading from a 450Mhz system to a 2 4Ghz can quadruple the maximum number of Subscriptions that can be processed See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates e Read Write times and performance under load improve with processor speed e CX Server DI 2 2 performs in very similar manner to previous versions and better on a mid spec machine Page 270 Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Performance difference between PC specifications 350 300 250 ll Read 1 7 200 ae Write 1 7 150 Subscription 1 7 Read 2 2 100 mm Write 2 2 eat Subscription 2 2 of 450Mhz performance Ql O O 450 Mhz 1 1 Ghz 2 4Ghz 100 90 80 70 60 90 40 30 20 10 ms Write time under increasing load 450Mhz 1 7 gt 450Mhz 2 2 44 1 Ghz 1 7 me me iN SN lt 1 1 Ghz 2 2 2 4Ghz 1 7 2 4Ghz 2 2 Page 271 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q How do I access CX Supervisor Local Points from Omron Graphical components Omron ActiveX Graphical components like the Thumbwheel shipped with CX Supervisor or those shipped with CX Server Lite and CX Server OPC 7 Segment Display Knob Toggle etc can be placed on CX Supervisor pages and linked
41. PLCFailures 41 ScreenSizeX 40 ScreenSizeY 40 Second 39 SecurityLevel 41 SecurityName 41 ShortMonthName 39 ShortWeekDayName 39 ShortYear 39 Time 39 UnacknowledgedAlarms 40 UserName 41 WeekDay 39 Page 338 OMRON WeekDayName 39 SWeekOfYear 39 Year 39 Description of 38 System Points 38 T Temperature Controllers See Industrial Components Text Creating Editing Graphic Objects 48 Text Editing text on a page 46 48 Text Bar 9 Font Name 9 11 Font Size 10 Text Bold On Off 11 Text Centered 11 Text Italic On Off 11 Text Justified 11 Text Underline On Off 11 Text Bold Text Bar 11 Text Centered Text Bar 11 Text Italics Text Bar 11 Text Left Aligned Text Bar 11 Text Right Aligned Text Bar 11 Text Underline Text Bar 11 Time Points Point Import 38 Toggle Button Wizard See Wizard Toggle Button Control Objects 59 Transparency Manipulating objects 65 Transparency On Off Control Bar 7 Trend Graph Inserting a trend graph 61 Wizard See Wizard Trend Graph Control Objects 61 Troubleshooting 291 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave 237 U Undo Manipulating objects 65 Unicode 213 220 327 Using CX Supervisor 213 225 Group Attributes 233 Release 1 3 OMRON Item Attributes 234 With Omrons OPC Server 230 243 V VBScript 327 Vertical Mirror
42. Page 127 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Naess e El eee x Pl ONE S ES pt tstst slo A group object possesses the animation functions common to all objects within the group The ticks denote whether the animation function is available for the object The blank cells denote the animation function is not available for the object The icons within the table header denote the object created by that icon Refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for further details In addition an object can be animated in the form of a script A script is made up of one or more statements An example of object script code is as follows REM SET UP THE COLOUR FLAGS Page 128 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Paintblue TRUE paintgreen FALSE paintred FALSE paintpurple FALSE paintyellow FALSE paintwhite FALSE REM SET UP THE VALVE POSITION Bluevalve TRUE greenvalve FALSE redvalve FALSE Changepaint TRUE Refer to the Script Language Manual for full details regarding the construction and syntax of script code The script is created by selecting the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the application of object animations Printing the Animation Editor Print Setup The Animation Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer s
43. Paste to Excel for bulk editing During development the point editor supports Copying and Pasting in textual format so Excel s powerful editing formulas can be used to create definitions for points This can allow thousands of consecutive points to be created in seconds e Use lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt to select multiple points for editing During development using lt Shift gt and lt Ctrl gt while selecting can be useful to apply the same changes to many points e Use Hungarian notation Improve readability and maintenance by defining and using a standard naming convention For example Hungarian notation where variable names are prefixed by a type character e g bMyBooleanPoint nMyIntegerNumber txtMyTextPoint or rMyReal e Use default optimisations Leave the default communications optimisations turned on In nearly all cases they really do provide the best solution Seek advice if you are considering turning them off e Delete unused points After a development phase and prior to deployment delete any unused points These are listed in the Point Editor under the group lt Unused Points gt Drawing This section covers some good practices when drawing the screens These can greatly speed up application development and help produce a professional looking system e Start new pages with Snap to Grid During the creative phase of any page this helps ensure objects are automatically aligned and sized saving
44. Point Value Analogue ds Edit Point Value Digital des Edit Point Value T ext 73 Enable Disable q Execute Script e Move Horizontal e Move Vertical Percentage Fill Horizontal res Percentage Fill Vertical 7 Resize Height 73 Resize Width 73 Visibility The Animation Editor dialog lists all possible animation actions in the Runtime Actions column Attributable objects for the Runtime Actions are listed in the Trigger Event Expression column Animations can be instigated on a Project Page or Object basis by selecting Object Actions Page Actions or Project Actions from the Actions field When opening the Animation Editor whilst an object within a page is selected the Actions field defaults to Object Actions and the selected object is shown in the Animation Editor When accessing the Animation Editor with a page selected this field defaults to Page Actions When opening the Animation Editor whilst no selection is made the Actions field defaults to Project Actions The actions that may be applied to an object are dependant on the type of object selected Only one type of action Execute Script can be applied to a Page or Project script The Users field allows selection of which users can use the selected page in the Runtime environment This is used in conjunction with allocating users and allowing them permission to perform tasks for further information on allocating users refer to chapter 6 Projects If Ob
45. Substitution Settings to display the Point Substitution Settings dialog Point Substitution Settings EJ Point Enclosing Characters Opening Characters ii hn Cancel Closing Characters Supply enclosing characters in the Opening Characters field and Closing Characters field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Advanced Settings To open the Advanced Settings dialog select Advanced Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog 1s displayed as follows Page 92 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Advanced Settings Internal Communication Optimisations Ok Cancel M Allow internal optimisations for Output points Defaults dd Communication Packet Optimisations f Use optimum Packet sizes Use specific Packet sizes No ot Aber al pone aoupea I a packet AL eal No oh Ae WA DOTA gqauped i a packet Communications Failure Display Options T Display bad quality values as H Click the settings to enable disable Internal Communication Optimisations and Communication Packet Optimisations Bad Quality values and results of calculations using bad quality values can be shown as characters This could indicate a communication failure or Bad Quality status in an OPC Server Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Runtime Security Configured U
46. The data cannot be converted to BCD as it contains Hexadecimal values between OxA and OxF Release 1 3 Page 301 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features APPENDIX E Obsolete Features This appendix provides a summary of features that are obsolete and have been removed from the standard documentation Details are included here to assist maintaining old projects still using these features These features should not be used in development of new solutions as it is likely support for the following features may and will be removed from the next or future releases Windows 98 Windows ME This product is no longer tested under Windows 98 or ME so Omron cannot guarantee correct operation It is recommended to upgrade to Windows NT or an NT successor like Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional Configuring a OPC DCOM Client PC running Windows 98 or Me pe ere l Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a service and click either File and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and print sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate Start 2 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 3 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked A CX Supervisor Client running on Windows 98 or ME also requires the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed wit
47. User Settings files used by script e g CSV or TXT files cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Project Information Information may be stored concerning a project by using the Project Information dialog This dialog may be accessed either when a project is first created from the New Project dialog or by selecting Information from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog Factory Cancel Description File C PROGRAM Enter a title and any relevant details concerning the project in the Title and Description fields and click the OK pushbutton Alias Definitions An alias definition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used throughout CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select Alias Definitions from the Project menu 31415927 The constant Pl Cancel System Aliases Browse Help Release 1 3 Page 99 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON The 3 columns are seperated by tabs and are the Alias text to be used the actual value to be used and an optional comment starting with character respectively Find The project can be searched to find occurrences of text or a point name It can also be used to search for text within script e g to find where a text message 1s generated from The areas w
48. a designated field type name type input output type or description By clicking on the Name button the points are L Type die sorted alphanumerically by name The Type button the I O Type button the Integer Address button and Description button once selected react in the same way In the Integer previous Point Editor example the list is sorted by Name The widths of the point fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries A double click on the text boundaries causes the column to autosize Page 24 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Changing the Viewing Mode Select the View Settings button to configure which columns of information are displayed in the Point Editor 2 Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons a Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including name type I O type address and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Summary of Point Information aj A summary of point information is available by selecting the Display Information on Points button from the toolbar The resultant Point Information dialog shows an overall summary a breakdown on the number of points per type and the input outp
49. a project is run open the Project Editor select the page by clicking on its description and click the Display Page Upon Run button on the toolbar To stop a page being displayed on run click the Don t Display Page Upon Run button on the Project Editor toolbar Changing the View Mode 2 Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons E Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e7 Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including page name page path project status runtime display and load status information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Viewing Project Details o To open the Project Details dialog and view the project name and description click on the Edit Details About Project button on the Project Editor toolbar Release 1 3 Page 103 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Multiple Selection Standard multiple selection facilities can be used within the Project Editor To select an additional line hold the control key down while clicking to select all lines between the anchor line the last line clicked on and another line hold the lt Shift gt key down while clicking The buttons can then be used to apply to all the selected lines at the same time Printing from the Project Editor Print Setup The Project Editor c
50. abort In the runtime environment the Event Error Log dialog can be displayed at any time Release 1 3 Page 89 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Event Error Log 2 ol xj Ej Y 8 zeje a 19 07 2002 10 54 19 SystemManager Event Ce Supervisor System Start 19 07 12002 10 54 20 fOManager Event Ce Server Project opened eal 19 07 2002 10 58 17 RecordManager Event Downloaded recipe 25 19 07 2002 10 58 55 SystemManager Event Operator logged in to Cx Superwisor 19 07 2002 10 59 32 SystemManager Event User Failed to log in to Cx Supervisor 19 07 2002 10 59 37 Svstemilanager Event User failed to log in to Cx Supervisor 19 07 2002 10 59 42 SystemManager Event Supervisor logged in to C Supervisor 19 07 2002 11 01 39 RecordManager High Unable to Find recipe bd H The events can be sorted based on a designated field type date time reported by priority or associated message By selecting the Date field the events are sorted alphanumerically by date The Time Reported by Pri Event and Message fields react in the same way The Event Error Log display shows the log listed in date order E The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse Ed to drag the column boundaries T ime 03 56 1 09 56 1 There are a number of toolbar buttons that aid the use of the Event Error Log The Disable Error Updates button once pressed stops further events occurring in the runtime envi
51. abort the Resize Width definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Resize Height Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding vertically This can be specified via the Resize Height dialog To access the Resize Height dialog to add an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Resize Height dialog to modify an action select Resize Height from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Height action the Resize Height dialog is displayed El Resize Height Ex pressiorr l Cancel Active Expression Range Required Height Browse Minimum Yale o Minimum Height jo Masimum Yalue 1100 Masimum Height E Justification i Bottom Centre f Top To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Height fields The Maximum He
52. achieved using the Blink dialog To access the Blink dialog to add an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access Blink dialog to modify an action select Blink from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Blink action the Blink dialog is displayed Blink Ed Digital E spression DE Cancel Colour Attributes Browse Blink Colour al Wie Page 142 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Arithmetic logical and relational expressions may also be entered as long as the result of the expression is zero or non zero 1 e the result equates to TRUE or FALSE When the result of the expression is TRUE the object s blinks To select a colour for the blink animation click in the Blink Colour field The Colour Palette dialog is displayed so that a colour can be supplied to the object The object blinks between its current colour and the chosen blink colour The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Blink operation click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Colour
53. any selected text objects to be set to bold when the Text Bold button is pushed in or normal when the Text Bold button is released Text Bold only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be emboldened Text Italic On Off 7 The Text Italic button allows any selected text object s to be set to italic when the Text Italic button is pushed in or normal when the Text Italic button is released Text Italic only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be italicised Text Underline On Off U The Text Underline button allows any selected text object s to be set to underline when the Text Underline button is pushed in or normal when the Text Underline button is released Text Underline only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be underlined Text Left Aligned The Text Left Aligned button aligns any selected text object s to the left edge of the bounding box Text Left Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be left justified Text Centred The Text Centred button aligns any selected text object s to the centre of the bounding box Text Centre Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be centre justified Text Right Aligned The Text Right Aligned button align
54. applications are created and tested using the development environment within CX Supervisor On completion the finished application can be delivered as a final customer application to be run by the run time environment Dynamic Link Library A program file that although cannot be run stand alone as an executable can be utilised by one or more applications or programs as a common service DLL files have a DLL extension DLL s comprise a number of stand alone functions In CX Supervisor a DLL containing icons can be accessed to represent the display part of an OLE object One such DLL MORICONS DLL is provided in the standard Microsoft Windows installation A recipe 1s downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value A file that contains programs or commands of an application that can be executed by a user or another application Executable files have a EXE file extension CX Supervisor provides two executable files one for the development environment CXSUPERVISORDEV EXE and one for the run time environment SCS EXE In the CX Supervisor script language expressions are a construct for computing a value from one or more operands For instance in the example lift height rate the expression is height rate where the result yielded from the ex
55. are held in these panels If an object is clicked on all four panels are used by CX Supervisor to display the co ordinates of that object as follows a a fig 133 fies 146 x y Width Height The first two panels contain the distance of the top left corner of the object from the top left of the page in pixels The second two panels show the extent of the object in pixels Text Bar An illustration of the CX Supervisor Text Bar is as follows Times New Roman ho aaa Sle Font Name The Font Name field contains a list of fonts which are available on the host version of Windows The list is presented in alphabetical order and only details typeface families This does not include bold or italic variants as this attribute is set by using the appropriate button The following illustration shows the control in de selected state Times New Roman JE The following illustration shows the control in selected state Times New Roman E Symbol Woodtype Urnaments 2 ZapiChance ry Symbol Times Times New Roman Tm Amn Willow Ww ingdings El apiDlingbats Revision 1 3 Page 9 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON The Font Name field displays the current font attribute for the selected object s To change the font for a block of text highlight it and click either the down arrow adjacent to the edit part of the control or into the edit part of the control itself for the Font Name field The control then di
56. button on the toolbar To access the User Input Text dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Text action dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Text Text Port OK are __ Runtime Display Attributes Cancel Browse did Caption Set Texto Echo Off T Display Keyboard F In Place Edit A text point must be entered This is typed into the Text Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Caption field Selecting the Echo Off setting ensures that text typed at runtime appears hidden as asterisks The Display Keyboard option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard 1 e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Keyboard dialog is displayed which allows editing by clicking on screen If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box Release 1 3 Page 153 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Enter Login Hame BoA JU JE FS JA PA eo A aaa aaa dada 50 A PA LA BE BS CHEE Pini Pe Ea Enter To abort the Edit Point Value Text edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse push
57. can be a complex graphic object consisting of a number of primitive graphic objects which provides user interaction An advanced communications management system for OMRON PLCs providing facilities for software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types CX Server supports CS Series PLCs A Database connection or Connection for short contains the details used to access a data source This can either be via Data Source Name DSN filename or directory A Database Connection Level is a string which determines what level in the database tree hierarchy is to be operated on Some examples are listed below Northwind Connectionlevel CSV Result Recordset level Northwind Order Details OrderID Field level Invoice Data Types Schema level A Database recordset or Recordset for short is a set of records This could either be an actual Table in the database or a table that has been generated as a consequence of running a Query A Database Schema or Schema for short obtains database schema information from a Provider A Database Server Query or Server Query for short is a query that is stored in the actual Database They are pre defined and added by the database designer which means they are fixed for the duration of a project Server Queries may have pre defined Parameters which allow criteria to be passed to the query at runtime e g values to filter al
58. change the name of a Library open the desired Library file and click on the Modify Library button on the toolbar The Modify Library dialog is displayed an example of which is illustrated as follows Modify Library Library Marne Pumps_1 A Cancel Type over the current field entry with a new name and click the OK pushbutton or cancel the operation by clicking the Cancel pushbutton Delete Library tis A Library may be deleted by selecting it from the drop down list to open it and clicking the Delete Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar CX Supervisor displays a message box to confirm the deletion of the Library Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the Library or the No pushbutton to cancel the operation and return to the Graphics Library After clicking the Yes pushbutton a second message box is displayed to confirm deletion of the library Click the OK pushbutton to delete the Library or the Cancel pushbutton to the leave the Library unchanged Page 106 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library Manipulating Objects Add Object Any object created on a CX Supervisor page can be added to the Library All attributes assigned to an object that is copied to the Library are stored for example animation information da To add an object select it from a page and click the Add Object to Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar The Add Object To Library dialog is displayed as 1ll
59. character e g Group will include all groups starting Group 2 From the Acknowledge On Click options select the level of security that is required for acknowledgement The default is 4 1 Users Release 1 3 Page 49 CHAPTER 4 Objects Bar Chart OMRON From the Display Alarms from Selected Priorities options select the range of alarms that are to be displayed The default selections are from the Lowest to the Highest Note that the range From must be the same or lower than the range To Use the check box Highest Priority at Top to reverse the alarm order In Alarm Status Colours the colour codes for each of the three alarm states and blinking colours may be specified by clicking the appropriate colour box and selecting a new colour from the resultant Colour dialog The Alarm Window Colours options allow you to select the colours for the Alarms Windows Background Title text and the Frame Select the font used by the alarm object using the Font pushbutton In Style Attributes set the following options as desired Display Date shows the date of the alarm Display Time shows the time of the alarm Display Alarm Status shows the status of the alarm Display Column Titles shows the column headings 3 D Frame displays object with 3 D border Highest Priority at Top shows highest priority at top Display Group shows the groups of the alarm Display Priority shows the priority of the alarm Date Widt
60. communicates with PLCs and other I O mechanisms An ingredient must specify a target value for its related point This is the value to which the point will be set in runtime when the recipe is downloaded An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started CX Supervisor is run from the Taskbar In CX Supervisor a text object is a string on a page Attributes such as typeface point size embolden italicise underline left justify flush right and centre can be applied to enhance its presentation A type of point that holds a string A Multi Byte Character Set which not only includes European Characters like DBCS but can also include global support including for Japanese Chinese and Cyrillic fonts However Unicode is not supported on all Windows platforms Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script language which is used to check point values before downloading a recipe A Visual Basic style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host A mode of video display that provides 640 x 480 pixel resolution with 16 colours and is supported on Video Graphics Adapter systems An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based applications to be started from icons and for all applications to be organised CX Supervisor can be run from Windows Desktop A scripting engine supplied by Microsoft to run VBScript or JScript See http msdn micro
61. configured Database connections Recordset Select the Recordset to create a link to from the list showing Recordsets configured in the selected Connection Sample Rate Select whether field links defined within this Database Link are logged when their expression changes or on a regular interval for example every 30 seconds Start Logging on Application Startup When unchecked logging must be started and stopped using script commands When checked the logging ofall associated fields starts automatically when the application is started Release 1 3 Page 185 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Add Field Link Dialog The Add Field Link dialog show below is show when the Add Field Link menu option is selected from the Data Log editor and the identical Modify Field Link dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Field Link Field Properties Mame Fett Cancel Field Link OrdeID A Browse Expressiory Sy Data Type Bool Integer Real Text Dead Band jo ze W Trigger on change of value Name For convenience a unique Field Link name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description if required Field Link Select the Field to link to from the list showing fields configured in the chosen Recordset Expression Enter the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection Data Type Set the type of the data to be stored
62. control from any manufacturer to work in any container Inserting a new object A new ActiveX control may be inserted on the page as follows y a 1 Click on the page in which the object is to be inserted o 2 Click the Insert ActiveX Object button The Insert Object dialog is Le displayed Insert Object A Object Type ar Create New aia a i aA cai AchonByr Class Cancel w Actiweb ar Class aa tt oi Active ap Control Actvelovielortrol Object Actorbyr Class adbanner Class Add Control Inserte a new Acrobat Control for Actives object Pa o Into pour document 3 Select the control you wish to insert from the list Create Control Result Release 1 3 Page 69 CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects OMRON Editing Properties at Design Time The properties of ActiveX objects can be edited during the design stage using the following procedure ly 2 desa La ES Page 70 Open the ActiveX Property Browser by clicking the ActiveX Property Browser button in the toolbar or by selecting the ActiveX Property Browser option from the Utilities menu With the ActiveX Property Browser displayed select the appropriate ActiveX control This will list the full range of property names available for that control in the browser and their values The Value of each Name can be changed as required by clicking in the value box and entering the new value Some options require you to enter specific information others
63. created prior to association with the expression Points are discussed in chapter 3 Points whilst expression syntax is discussed in the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Alarm Messages A message pertaining to a raised alarm is entered in the Raised field The content of the field should be descriptive to provide the user with a reasonable basis for an alarm solution The Alarm Editor provides a default raised message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text when the OK pushbutton is clicked The raised message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field A message associated with the alarm can also be entered in the Normal field in the same manner to that above this message is displayed once an alarm condition has been rectified and normal conditions have been resumed The Alarm Editor provides a default normal message The name of the alarm is substituted for the character in the message text when the OK pushbutton is clicked The normal message may be changed at any time simply by entering the desired message in the text field Release 1 3 Page 117 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Both alarm messages can include embedded point names via the Browse pushbutton which is replaced at runtime with the value of the point Example Boiler temp high BoilerTemp shows the point value in the alarm message Example Flow exceeded Pressure Pres
64. creation of the application in the CX Supervisor development environment Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition A Server is the central processing point of a Network that is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further associated options are available if the computer Network is connected An application that can be used to view or interact with whilst currently within CX Supervisor Within the CX Supervisor script language a statement is a command understood by the run time environment Statements are constructed of commands and arguments which when combined help to formulate a finished application to be used in the run time environment The contents of a Text type point that can only contain literal alphanumeric characters A string starts following an opening quotation mark and ends before a closing question mark in the example name spot the point name holds the string spot Release 1 3 OMRON SVGA mode CX Supervisor Target Value Taskbar Text Object Text Type Unicode Validation Code VBScript VGA mode Windows Desktop Windows Scripting Host Wizard Release 1 3 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual A mode of video display that provides 800 x 600 pixel resolution or higher with 16 or more colours and is supported on Super Video Graphics Adapter systems A SCADA software application which creates and maintains graphical user interfaces and
65. dialog changes to a format similar to that of the following Page 316 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features Insert Object Fa File Cancel fe Create from File C Program Filest0O0MRONAC S upervis Create New Create Control Browse F Link T Display As leon Inserts the contents of the file as an object into pour document s0 that you may activate it using the program which created it Type the full path of the file containing the object to be inserted ending with the full file name into the Create from File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse pushbutton to display the Browse dialog A Browse dialog similar to that used for changing an object s icon is displayed the difference being that the List Files of Type field has a single entry of All Files extension lj Dy Ses 1 Use the Look in field to navigate to the appropriate location 2 Select the file from the list offered and click the Open pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog 3 On return to the Insert Object dialog click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point To display the object as an icon follow the procedure detailed in the previous chapter and click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object in icon form into it at the current insertion point It is often
66. displayed PLC Attributes Boolean PLC Attributes PLC Name aera M Cancel PLC Type None gt Add PLO Data Location Amay Size i Data Type Modifier I Communications Enabled Data Transter Actions When Opening a PLE i Write Value To PLC C Read Value From PLC C No Data Transfer Conversion Attributes onli onyversion Factor Minimum ELE value o SER e 2999 The point type associated with the PLC Connection attributes is shown in the title bar The required PLC can be selected from the PLC field If no PLCs exist in the PLC field then one must be added This is achieved by clicking the Add PLC pushbutton and configuring one A point cannot be configured to have a PLC connection unless all the PLC connection attributes are correctly configured For more information on adding and configuring PLCs and devices see chapter 6 Projects Device Configuration PLC Attributes The Data Location field identifies the area of memory to which this address applies and is dependent upon the type and configuration of the PLC The Data Type field identifies the type of data held at this address The type determines how point values are converted from a computer format into a PLC format The field contains options applicable to the Data Location Release 1 3 Page 31 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON The Modifier field indicates the command to be performed on the data at this address An example of a modifier is for a b
67. edited or deleted but their attributes can be viewed All system points can be selected from the System Point dialog System points are listed in the points list and are denoted by a symbol preceding the point name To view system points only select System Points from the Group field Once listed the Boolean Points Integer Points Real Points Text Points and All Points pushbuttons on the toolbar are unavailable for selection To view other points select 411 Groups from the Group field Time Points The following table describes system points for use with time based operations Provisions are given to both 12 hour and 24 hour time formats 12Hour Hours in 12 hour format SAMPM Text AM PM indicator for 12 hour clock form Millisecond 0 999 Number of milliseconds Page 38 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Date Points The following table describes system points for use with date based operations Provisions are given for numerical and alphanumerical formats omo rompe Pontrenge Jem o AUD E ea wonnan Tex ETT ET Tox TT ssorwveabaynane roe reis woody rame eg wen srove mer oo TIT meos mer 06 pay ormeweorto sunezsa sweabayvare Tox wear rame tea Weores Internal Points The following table describes system points for use with interrogating current system settings such as memory and disk space restrictions and other system resources SAvailableMemory 0 2 147
68. entire system The requirement to use the original vendor is eliminated High priced proprietary solutions and their expensive after sale support contracts will yield to lower cost OPC enabled alternatives Time Reduction through Lower System Integration Costs OPC eliminates the need for costly custom software integration OPC provides plug and play software and hardware components from a variety of automation software device and system suppliers Process and manufacturing companies can easily integrate applications into corporate wide automation and business systems something that has been virtually unachievable in the past OPC compatible components greatly reduce system integration costs because all software and hardware components adhere to a single standard interface that s being adopted around the world Automation suppliers are providing hardware devices with integrated OPC servers that are replacing proprietary device driver software The driver connection between hardware and software from different vendors has historically been the number one headache in system integration OPC offers the opportunity to ease the pain and shorten the application development cycle This gets automation projects up faster which saves time for new projects and brings the benefit of automation to the process sooner Who should care about OPC You should care about OPC if your applications are largely run in personal computers and you are involved with
69. fields are cleared ready for a new user to be added 2 Type the full name of the new user in the Full Name field 3 Type a login name in the Login Name field 4 Type a user password in the Password field The password must be at least four characters in length 5 Select a level of privilege from the Security Level drop down list 6 Click the Store pushbutton to add the new user to the Configured Users list or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Page 94 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects To modify an existing user To De aes l Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Modify pushbutton The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled with the contents of all the fields filled with the attributes of the selected user 2 Amend the full name login name password and level of privilege in the same way as adding a new user 3 Click the Store pushbutton to update the user in the Configured Users list or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation To remove a user from the Configured Users list EP PO 1 Select a user from the Configured Users list and click the Delete pushbutton 2 A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the selected user or the No pushbutton to abort the operation When all user amendments are complete click the Close pushbutton In the runtime application to make use of the designated privilege the user must log
70. for any further DDE data transfers that are required DDE Server Points A DDE server point receives data from or receives a request for data from an external Client application This chapter explains how to create DDE Server Points these points are exposed to DDE Client applications either for Read Only or Read Write access In order for a point to take part in a conversation with a DDE Client it must be given DDE Access The following dialog demonstrates how to give a Real memory point DDE Read Write access A DDE Server point is created as follows ee ee l Za Je Release 1 3 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed Enter a meaningful name for the DDE Server point in the Point Name field Click on the Advanced pushbutton The Advanced Point Settings dialog is displayed Page 307 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON Advanced Point Settings OLE Access M Read Only Read Write Cancel DDE Access M Non Volatile Validate Pombre within spenitied Range 4 Ensure the DDE Access Read Write setting is set to ON 5 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings in both the Advanced Point Settings dialog and the Add Point dialog Note The DDE Access group s Read Write box in the Advanced Point Settings dialog is checked this is the only action required to expose DDESVR3 to a DDE Client application for read
71. hash without a meta character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed Text for Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are entered in the State 0 Text field and State 1 Text field To abort the Display Status Text edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Display Value Analogue The state of a Real or Integer point may be displayed using the Display Value Analogue dialog To access the Display Value Analogue dialog to add an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Analogue dialog to modify an action select Display Value from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value action the Display Value Analogue dialog is displayed Display Value Analogue E E pression OK Second Displayed Text Number of seconds H Format Standard C Scientific Hexadecimal Cancel ike Browse T Left Justified Leading Zeros An expression based on Real or Integer point must be entered This express
72. in Login can be accessed in a variety of ways and so is dependent on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may require login as soon as the application is run others may allow login from a context sensitive floating menu Refer chapter 9 Animation for further information The Login User dialog is as follows Mame Password Cancel keyboard To log in enter the login name not the full name in the Login Name field and the associated password in the Password field Any characters typed in the Password field are disguised by a symbol for each character typed Click the OK pushbutton to log in or the Cancel pushbutton to abort For users without a keyboard to enter login details select the Keyboard pushbutton The login name and password can be constructed from the subsequent dialog by clicking on each pushbutton in turn followed by the Enter pushbutton to complete Release 1 3 Page 95 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Menu Page 96 Enter Login Name Sk Ma fd cd cs ic 0 dO UC ES fice PE E JA BES Pa Ps J Ed JA EA pel BS BE BL PO E 1 E JE Pit Pica DE lcd cd Fd JEJE A OU kaea Ea Enter A user can detach from specialised user privileges by logging out Access is again dependant on the application There is no dialog associated with logout once logout is activated privileges are immediately discontinued Whilst one user is logged in it is possible for a different user to log in as prio
73. insert the gauge If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network pushbutton is added to the dialog For further information on the function of the Network dialog refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide Click the Linear Gauge button then To edit a Linear Gauge object double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Gauge Wizard E Gauge Style OF Rotational Release 1 3 Linear W Cancel l l Browse Configuration Attributes Scale Font Gauge Title Exs upervisor Gauge Expressions Title Font dE Style Attributes l Minimum Gauge Value JO Maximum Gauge Value 100 Minor Display Units 10 Major Display Unita Ol Bar lndicator Colour e Auto Size Fonts PF Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Style Specific Attributes F Display Horizontal W Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks W 3 D Frame Page 53 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON The Gauge Wizard dialog allows entry of the Gauge Style Configuration Attributes Style Attributes and Style Specific Attributes fields To select a style click on an option from the appropriate field To select an Expression Attribute click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog is displayed click the OK pushbutton to accept the point or click the Cancel pushbutto
74. is made the object retains the default style of thin solid To apply a line style to a previously created object select the object on the page and click on the appropriate line in the Line Style Palette Note Line styles may only be applied to some graphic objects They cannot be applied to text embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics Page 2 Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Fill Pattern Palette The Fill Pattern Palette is located at the bottom of the Palette To create an object with a particular fill pattern before selecting the object s tool from the Tool Palette first select the fill pattern by clicking in the appropriate square in the Fill Pattern Palette Note It is not strictly necessary to select a fill pattern for an object before creating it however if no fill pattern selection is made the object retains the default of no pattern To apply a fill pattern to a previously created object select the object on the page and click in the appropriate square in the Fill Pattern Palette With a fill pattern applied to an object clicking in the Colour Palette with the left mouse button allows the foreground colour of the chosen fill pattern to be changed Clicking in the Colour Palette with the right mouse button allows the background colour of the chosen fill pattern to be changed Note Fill patterns may only be applied to solid graphic objects They cannot be applied to unfilled graphic objects text o
75. is only available to Memory Resident points Release 1 3 Page 29 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Memory Attributes Array Size li I O Update Rate The I O Update Rate specifies how and when communication with the PLC takes place This option is not available to Memory Resident points LO Update Rate On Change On Request 50 Millizeconds The On Change option specifies that communication with the PLC occurs automatically as a result of a value change The On Request option specifies that data updates with the PLC will be manually requested using the scripting commands InputPoint and OutputPoint The point is updated internally but only communicates with the PLC when requested to by the script commands The On Interval option specifies the frequency that communications occur with the PLC When this option is selected an edit box appears allowing the frequency to be entered I O Attributes The I O Attributes option specifies the external source or destination for the point This option is not available to Memory Resident points LO Attributes f PLC C DDE OPC Other Setup Page 30 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points The external source is defined by selecting the appropriate I O Attributes setting Further configuration of the external source can be applied by clicking the Setup pushbutton On clicking the Setup pushbutton for a PLC external source the PLC Attributes dialog is
76. it has only one argument e g NOT The CX Supervisor script language uses operators for built in functions such as arithmetic and logic A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points OR returns TRUE if any of the supplied arguments are TRUE An example of OR is that if a is a statement and b is a statement OR will return TRUE if either a and b are TRUE If both statements return FALSE then OR will return FALSE The combination and manipulation of pages containing objects within projects forms the basis of CX Supervisor More than one page can exist for each project The pages in a project provide the visual aspect of CX Supervisor corresponding to a display with the objects contained in each page providing a graphical representation of the system being monitored A Parameter Association enables values either constant or stored in a point to be passed to a Server Query A single displayable point on the screen from which a displayed image is constructed The screen resolution of the computer s Visual Display Unit VDU is defined by the number of pixels across and the number of pixels down e g 1024 x 768 Page 325 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual PLC Point variable Point Project Real type Recipe Run Time Environment SCADA Server Server Application Statement String Page 326 OMRON See also SVGA mode and VGA mode Programmable Logic Con
77. log on to your local domain as Administrator or user with local administrator privileges See your Systems Administrator for further details Q Why do get the message ODBC DriverError The query is not updateable because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key When attempting to pass information to an Excel spreadsheet it the following ODBC Driver Error can occur The query is not updateable because it contains no searchable columns to use as a hopeful key The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret the data type of a column if the column in the spreadsheet contains both text and numbers If a spreadsheet has been set up with data directly inputted in Excel and an attempting to write new data to the spreadsheet from CX Supervisor this error will occur This is because the ODBC Driver sees different formats in a column To overcome this set up the spreadsheet the data area definition to contain only the column headings Insert Name Define Page 286 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Another problem in this area has been that the format of the data can change from Number to Text i e 333 formats in the cell of the spreadsheet The exact cause of this error is unknown but can be resolved by clearing the cell formats Edit Clear Formats of the spreadsheet that will be receiving the data Q How does the PLC affect performance for my network type T
78. move to top on obj1 first followed by obj2 and then by obj3 this gives the tab order obj1 obj2 obj3 Changing Between Pages The lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt key can be used to change between pages Page 85 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Simulating a Left Mouse Button Click Objects that have scripts attached such as a pushbutton or objects that perform a particular action when clicked such as toggle buttons can be executed by using the lt Enter gt key Slider Operation When a slider object is selected the plus and minus keys can be used to increment or decrement its value respectively This also applies to the sliders on trend graphs Obtaining the Runtime Floating Menu To display the Runtime Floating menu use either the lt Shift gt lt F10 gt key combination or use the Windows right mouse button key which is next to the lt Ctrl gt key on the right hand side of the keyboard Standard Windows Keys Some standard Windows key combinations are as follows lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen Used to access the child window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog lt Alt gt lt Spacebar gt Used to access the main window control box at the top left hand side of the dialog lt Alte lt F4 gt Used to close down the current application Using Runtime Alarm Error and Recipe Viewer These can be invoked from the Runtime Floating menu see above To access their functionality use the lt Tab gt k
79. number of buttons displayed depends on the available space at higher resolutions more buttons are displayed The Control Bar can be removed from the display at any time by selecting Control Bar from the View menu Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor A tick next to the name indicates that it is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run The specific operation of the controls on the Control Bar is described in the following paragraphs Object Identification When an object is created CX Supervisor gives it a unique identifier This identifier consists of the object type and a sequential number starting at 1 For example a text object could have an identifier of TEXT 1 a polygon object could have an identifier of POLYGON 3 etc The Object Identification field displays a list of all current objects on a page The identification of an object can be changed by clicking on the entry in the Object Identification control typing over the entry and pressing lt Return gt A confirmation box is provided to double check the operation click the OK pushbutton to proceed with the name change or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation It can at times be difficult to select a particular object if it is mostly obscured by other graphic objects The Object Identification control allows an object to be selected by simply selecting its name from the presented list Cli
80. object is selected certain actions can then be applied depending on the object s type The most common action is to simulate a left mouse button click The following list shows all the possible facilities with Keyboard Control enabled 4 Release 1 3 Moving Around Selectable Objects Using Cursor Keys The cursor keys can be used to move around the objects in the respective direction With an object selected if the right cursor key is pressed then the closest object is selected from within an area bounded by lines drawn diagonally upwards and diagonally downwards and to the right from the centre of the object If no object is found then the current object remains selected A similar rule also applies when using the left cursor key and the up and down cursor keys Note Selectable items must have a left mouse button event defined or have a default action Moving Around Selectable Objects Using lt Tab gt Key The lt Tab gt key can be used to move around all the objects in the order in which they are drawn this can be varied using the raise object and lower object editing facilities The lt Shift gt lt Tab gt key can be used to move around the objects in the reverse order To select items in a specific tab order use the lt Tab gt key to move around the page items in a specific order using the move to top feature Start at object number 1 and end with the last object 1 e 1 0b31 obj2 and obj3 then use
81. on an option in the Button Style field To enter button text type in the Button Text field the Style Attributes dialog is automatically updated The text font can be changed via the Font pushbutton Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new button attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the button unchanged Examples of the different styles of pushbutton are 1llustrated below Configuration Attributes Button Text Page 54 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Blank InfOut The colour of the coloured pushbutton is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette Rotary Gauge T A Gauge provides a means of displaying the value of an operation or the value of a point Click the Rotary Gauge button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a gauge To edit the Rotary Gauge double click on it The Gauge Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Gauge Wizard Bauge Style OK Linear Cancel Browse Configuration Attributes Scale Font Bauge Title xs upervizor Gauge E pression Title Font dE Style Attributes l Minimum Gauge Yalue f0 Masimum Gauge Value 100 Minor Display Units 10 Major Display Units 0 CSU etl ua Al E arlndicator Colour e Auta Size Fonts Display Minor Units W Display Major Units Style Specific Attibutes Minimum Display Angle E Dl Maximum Display
82. on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill Horizontal action the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog is displayed Percentage Fill Horizontal Expression _ Cancel Lancel Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Browse Minimum Value Filled o o asimum alte li 00 li 00 2 Filled Fill Direction i Left to Right Right to Lett To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries associated with the percentage fill are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as left to right or right to left by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting Release 1 3 Page 139 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON To abort the Horizontal Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Ve
83. operate on bits within a word e g nFlags amp 0x02 will be TRUE if bit 2 is set or FALSE if it not This eliminates the need for additional memory points and processing Q Can I use token disks in high capacity LS120 Disk Drives The token copy protection has proven to be incompatible with the high capacity LS120 Disk Drives At this present time there are two possible workarounds e Use the network to conduct the token transfer by sharing a floppy drive from another machine e Use the Dongle option Release 1 3 Page 279 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q Can I print accented characters on alarm printers There is a limitation with Windows such that it is not possible to print accented characters to a line printer a line at a time The only alternatives are e To print using English only characters e To set the printing to page mode which will print a page when a specified number of alarms have occurred This can be set up under Runtime settings Alarm Message printer settings Q Why do get Installation error 115 Error 115 during installation means the specified file could not be copied This is most often caused by the file already being in use or locked Reboot the machine and attempt installing before running any Omron software This error can also appear when attempting to install on a operating system that does not support extended European characters e g Japanese or Chinese Windows During instal
84. or re displayed at any time by selecting Palette from the View menu Extended Line Palette Line Palette A tick next to the name indicates the Palette is currently displayed CX Supervisor saves the settings when it is exited and restores them when it is next run Each of the palettes and controls is discussed in more detail in the following paragraphs Colour Palette To create an object in a particular colour before selecting the object s tool from the Graphic Object bar first select the colour by clicking in the appropriate square in the Colour Palette Note Itis not strictly necessary to select a colour for an object before creating it however if no colour selection is made the object retains the same colour as the last object To apply a colour to a previously created object select the object on the page and click with the left mouse button in the appropriate square in the Colour Palette Note Colour may only be applied to some graphic objects It cannot be applied to embedded objects or bitmap graphics Line Style Palette The Line Style Palette is located in the Palette just below the Colour Palette To create an object with a particular line style before selecting the object from the Tool Palette first select the line style by clicking on the appropriate line in the Line Style Palette Note It is not strictly necessary to select a line style for an object before creating it however if no line style selection
85. rectangle frame click the Round Rectangle Frame Alternatively select a filled round rectangle and click the Transparency button from the Control Bar Click on the page to draw a rounded square or click and drag to create a rounded rectangle of the required size To edit the rounded rectangle obtain the red grab handles The radius of curvature of the rounding can be adjusted by clicking on the single red grab handle and dragging it as illustrated below A A A Text A To insert text click the Text button Click on the page and type inside the red edit box The cursor is moved round the text using the arrow keys Standard text editing tools from the toolbar and the keyboard can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit text double click on it A box is displayed round the text Press lt Return gt to finish editing and create a new text object on the line below To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Creating and Editing Control Objects Alarm Object al Click the Alarm button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the alarm object The Alarm object displays alarm messages in runtime These messages may be optionally filtered by an alarm group and can be formatted to include the date time and status of the alarm To edit an Alarm object double click on 1t The Alarm Wizard dialog 1s displayed as follows Page 48 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Alarm Wizard
86. representation of an image stored in a computer s memory Each picture element pixel is represented by bits stored in the memory In CX Supervisor a bitmap image can be installed as a single object A type of point where the value of the point can be one of two states Essentially the two states are 0 and 1 but these states can be assigned a meaningful designation Examples are State Example Example Example Example 0 OFF FALSE OUT CLOSED l ON TRUE IN OPEN See also AND NOT and OR COM is a Microsoft technology that allows components used to interact The relevant communications management system for OMRON PLCs in conjunction with Microsoft Windows providing facilities for other SYSMAC software to maintain PLC device and address information and to communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types Page 321 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Constant Control Object CX Server Database connection Database Connection Level Database Recordset Database Schema Database Server Query Database SQL Query Page 322 Within CX Supervisor a constant is a point within the script language that takes only one specific value In CX Supervisor a control object is applied in the development environment and can be a pushbutton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge Essentially a control object
87. style attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave unchanged Slider umm Sliders allow values associated with them to increase or decrease between certain limits They can also ensure that values do not exceed previously set limits Click the Slider button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a slider To edit the Slider double click on it The Slider Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Slider Wizard Ed Slider Style Proportional Slider ok Windows 3 5 style slider Cancel Browse Style Attributes Configuration Attributes Integer Real Faint Minimum Slider Value o AA Maximum Slider Yalue 100 e Minimum alue at Left Bottom I Immediate update on slide move Display Vertical The Wizard allows entry of in the Slider Style Style Attributes and Configuration Attributes fields To select a style click on an option from the list box The Style Attributes can be either Display Vertical or Display Horizontal To select a Boolean point click on the Browse pushbutton and select a point from the displayed list Click the OK pushbutton to accept the point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing po
88. temperature controller select a temperature controller from the Device Type field e g ESAF AH See also Chapter 14 for details on other models Clicking the Setup pushbutton results in the Device Type Settings dialog being displayed allowing the device type of the PLC to be configured Device Type Settings CS1G ES General Program Memory 20KW RAM Read Only Expansion Memory None Read Grip File Memory None y Read Timer Clock MIhstalled Make Default Cancel Apply Help Page 78 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Note The possible settings for PLC configuration depend upon the type of PLC selected this applies also to the Read Only and Timer Clock fields On completion click the OK pushbutton to continue or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Values specified may be set as default by clicking the Make Default pushbutton A network may be specified for the selected PLC by selecting from the Network field The networks available are dependent on the device type selected Clicking the Setup pushbutton results in the Network Settings dialog being displayed Network Settings SYS MAC WAY 3 Network Driver Modem AS Source Address Hetman jo Hade fo Fat jo FINS Destination Address Network li Node jo ait fo Frame Length Response Timeout a 502 2 Host Link Unit Humber Wetton Operating ee fo i 0 CH
89. the Edit Point Value Analogue edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Analogue dialog being displayed based on the contents of the development version Enter a new value E3 Current Value Cancel Enter New Value 1 e 008 Maximum Value 1 6 008 New Value E Minimum ale Page 152 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation CX Supervisor provides an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field the minimum and maximum values allowed based on the User Input Limits fields and a New Value field in which the user types the desired Real or Integer value Click the OK pushbutton to accept the value or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An invalid entry in the New Value field is exposed as an error once the OK pushbutton has been clicked Edit Point Value Text A text point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Text dialog To access the User Input Text dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Text from the animation list and click the Add Action
90. to connect to A new DSN file will now exist which can be used by CX Supervisor to Create a Connection Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file Connections to Excel files may result in the error Operation must use an updateable query This is because the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 is read only by default hence Records can not be added or amended To override this function you must manually change the Read Only property in the Connection String On the Modify Connection dialog click Advanced and set the connection property as shown in the last line below Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls DBQ C WorkBook xls ReadOnly False Excel files can also be updated by accessing the file via the ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the following steps 4 Release 1 3 Create a File DSN for the required Excel file with the following options see Chapter 12 Creating a Data Source Name file Select the Microsoft Excel Driver xls If this option does not exist you will need to install the Microsoft ODBC driver for Excel from the Excel setup Ensure that the Read Only check box is clear Load the Excel spreadsheet and create a table to access the data by creating a Named Range as follows Highlight the row s and column s area where your data resides including the header row On the Insert menu point to Name click Define and enter a name for your ran
91. to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code 10 3 Runtime Actions describes the creation of script code using the Script Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Objects One object or a selection of objects defined as a group are animated in a number of ways refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor for applicable objects gt gt gt gt gt gt 18 1 8 o o o An object can be seen to be blinking An object can be removed from the page An object can change colour A value associated with the object can be displayed Text associated with the object can be displayed An object can appear enabled for selection or disabled for selection An object can move horizontally or vertically An object can be flood filled An object can change its size horizontally or vertically An object can rotate An object can have associated user interaction An object can be displayed on the page However it is not feasible for all the objects to be capable of all forms of animation For instance a toggle object can only be animated so that it is enabled or disabled visible or invisible whilst a text object can be resized moved change its colour blink rotate await user interaction be made visible or invisible or display an associated value A list of objects and their available animations is as follows Release 1 3
92. value reaches 20 at which point it changes to the second colour To apply the change to the frame of the object select the Apply colour changes to object frame setting To apply the change to the object background select the Apply colour changes to object background setting On selection of a colour in the Colour Change Analogue dialog the Colour Palette dialog is displayed The Colour Palette dialog is described in chapter 9 Common Colour Palette Click the Clear pushbutton to reset all colours and re start To abort the Colour Change Analogue edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message 1s displayed Colour Change Digital Objects can be animated so they change between two colours This is achieved using the Colour Change Digital dialog To access the Colour Change Digital dialog to add an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access Colour Change Digital dialog to modify an action select Colour Change Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action 1s applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Colour Change Digital action the Colour
93. 0 00 0 00 Win95 Win98 WinME WinNT Win00 WinXP Release 1 3 Page 267 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q How does upgrading CX Supervisor affect communications performance The graphs below show that this does not have an impact itself which is not surprising as a communications functions and therefore performance are governed by the communication middleware CX Server The graphs show e Upgrading CX Supervisor does not affect the total number of Subscription points that can be simultaneously read which has remained more than 1000 e Performance of instantaneous read and write is not significantly affected by the version of CX Supervisor e Updating CX Supervisor does not affect how performance degrades when the system gets busy Note CX Supervisor 1 2 and later do include automatic optimisations for writing array elements that can yield substantial results particularly with serial communications These performance improvements have been excluded from these results rather than distort the true figures 120 100 ee eee 80 e Read 60 s Write Subscription 40 of 1 0 Performance 20 CXS 1 0 CX S 1 1 CX S 1 2 12 CX S 1 22 7 Version Page 268 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Write time under increasing load i CX Supervisor 1 0 CX Supervisor 1 1 CX Su
94. 00 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Field Paging You can work with a single record at a time by associating points with the required fields and process the data one record at a time However if the point specified is an Array point the whole array will be processed i e multiple fields will be read written or added This concept is called Paging Paging is supported by the Database script functions enabling you to manipulate and navigate the database a page at a time CX Supervisor determines the page size by using the number of elements in the Array point used in Field Associations 1 e if an array point with 10 elements is used then a page size of 10 will be used In order for paging to work sensibly you should ensure that all array points used in multiple field associations for a particular Recordset are of the same size If arrays of differing length are used the smallest array size will be adopted as the page size Note Paging only operates on Field Associations that have the Property Type Value selected this enables you to have Field Associations with a Property Type of Name or Add associated with single points in the same Recordset without effecting the page size determined by the array points Note Paging is designed to operate at the Recordset level the concept of levels is explained in the chapter on DB Script functions If you perform a Read operation on a recordset that has paging in force then a
95. 2 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions The appendix list some FAQs and of course their answers Q What is the maximum limit of number of points It is possible to create an application with up to 8000 points In theory each of these could be an array of 1024 elements totalling over 8 million addresses In practice the communications medium number of active points and their frequency of updates determine the maximum limit See What is the maximum limit of communication updates Q What is the maximum limit of communication updates The charts below show the number of simultaneous reads per second depending on each PLC and Network used The maximum number of CX Supervisor points depends on the update rates and element sizes For example 1000 reads per second could be 1000 points of 1 element with a 1 second update rate or 200 array points with 5 elements with a 1 second update rate or 20 array points with 5 elements with a 100 millisecond update rate or any combination of variations The figures should be self explanatory but its worth noting that Toolbus is better than twice as good as SYSMAC WAY at the same baud rate and depending on the PLC supports higher baud rates This is a very cheap way to improve performance Note 1 These figures assume best case scenario where data is in contiguous addresses Lesser performance will be achieved as memory areas are fra
96. 3 D Frame option enables the graph to appear with a 3 D frame Either enter an arithmetic expression for the X and Y axis or select one through the Browse pushbutton An expression point can also be associated with the Scatter Graph Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Change the fonts used for the Scatter Graph via the Font pushbutton The font size used by the graph can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Font field Exit the Scatter Graph Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new scatter graph attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the scatter graph unchanged To configure the X axis click the X Axis pushbutton To configure the Y axis click the Y Axis pushbutton The Axis Scaling dialog is displayed Release 1 3 Asie Tick Colour Configuration Attributes Cancel Stile Attributes e Display Minor Ticks e Display Major Ticks FF Display Minor Units e Display Major Units TF Keep Ticks On Asis Keep Units On Asis Display Grid Minimum Scale Yale E Maxinum Scale Walue 1100 Minor Display Units 10 Major Display Units 2 Scale Units Li Scale Units Colour Page 57 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Configuration attributes can be altered by typing over the existing field entries The
97. 483 647 Amount of available memory in bytes DemoMode Boolean Indicates whether a valid token has been installed DiskSpace 0 2 147 483 647 Amount of free disk space available in bytes PCName Tet Computer name of PC as seen in Explorer Computer name Computer name of PC as seen in Explorer PC as seen in Explorer Ca Text Name of project file without SCS extension SProjectPath Text Path to project on disk without project Path to project on disk without project to project on disk without project Release 1 3 Page 39 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON name o _ ae 2 147 483 647 Number Moo alarm entries currently spooled awaiting printing to page printer Version Text Version number of CX Supervisor Runtime program Display Points The following table describes system points for use with the display mode ScreenSizeX 0 2 147 483 647 Screen width ScreenSizeY 0 2 147 483 647 Screen height Mouse Points The following table describes system points for use in mouse movement and operation They are updated on a left button click Alarm Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor alarms C siom pon Pomeupe roman roras MediumAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active medium priority alarms LowAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active low priority alarms SLowestAlarms 0 2 147 483 647 Number of active lowest priority al
98. 5 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code Editor The script is defined using the Execute Script entry in the Animation Editor list Page Chapter 10 Runtime Actions describes the creation of script code using the Script Page scripts are concerned with manipulating points and graphical objects that are used or included within that page Actions cannot refer to graphical objects that appear in other pages In other words page scripts are used to drive a number of actions on the occurrence of a particular event An example of page script code is as follows Page 126 REM move the car and transport IF start THEN Position position speed ENFIP REM if the car is at the start then reset the REM position and reset the car colour IF position lt OTHEN position 800 POLYGON 11 colour dark grey ENDIF REM setup the paint spray colour IF position lt 300 position gt 400 amp amp changepaint THEN IF paintblue THEN POLYGON 34 colour dark blue ENDIF IF paint green THEN POLYGON 34 colour Dark_green ENDIF IF paintred THEN POLYGON 34 colour red ENDIF IF paintpurple THEN POLYGON 34 colour purple ENDIF IF paintyellow THEN POLYGON 34 colour yellow ENDIF IF paintwhite THEN POLYGON 34 colour white ENDIF Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation ENDIF Refer
99. 5 Print Graphics Library See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Sharing 109 View 105 Line Creating Editing Graphic Objects 47 Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Line Style Palette Graphics Editor 2 Linear Gauge Control Objects 53 Linking Pages in a Project Project Editor 103 Lower Down One Control Bar 6 M Manipulating object Alignment 66 Alignment Toolbox 66 Applying Tooltips 68 Delete 64 Floating Menu 68 Group 65 Mirror Image 65 Orientation 65 Paste 64 Raise Lower 66 Transparency 65 Undo 65 Zoom 67 Manipulating objects 63 Manipulating Objects Copy 64 Cut 64 Move 64 Select 63 Memory Attributes Creating Points 29 Menu Option Access Levels Runtime Security 96 Microsoft Word for Windows 324 Mirror Image Manipulating objects 65 Modify Graphics Library Graphics Library 106 Modifying a PLC Connection Device Configuration 80 Mouse Points Point Import 40 Move Manipulating Objects 64 Multiple Selection Project Editor 104 N Navigating Projects with the Workspace 101 Page 333 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual O Object About 325 ActiveX Objects 69 Attributes 107 Control object 322 Control objects 1 48 63 Edit definition of an object 108 Embedded objects 1 Grab handles 45 48 Graphic objects 1 46 48 324 Man
100. CADA applications This manual contains the following Chapter I Graphics Editor This chapter describes the Graphics Editor and its various tools and controls Chapter 2 Pages This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation and amendment of pages Chapter 3 Points This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of points The use of PLCs with points is also described Chapter 4 Objects This chapter describes procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of objects Chapter 5 ActiveX Objects This chapter provides an overview of using ActiveX objects in CX Supervisor Chapter 6 Projects This chapter describes procedures involved in the creation amendment and removal of projects Chapter 7 Graphics Library This chapter describes the library of graphic objects and how to create and amend new libraries Chapter 8 Alarms This chapter describes the procedures involved in the creation and amendment of alarms Chapter 9 Animation This chapter describes the use of animations and how they can be applied to a CX Supervisor project Chapter 10 Recipes This chapter describes the creation of recipes and how they can be used Chapter 11 Data Logging This chapter describes the data logging facilities including setting up viewing and exporting Chapter 12 Databases This chapter describes the Database facilities including connections reading
101. CS or sometimes MBCS for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the same as Unicode However old projects and pages are automatically converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode This works without problem if the project is English or contains no extended characters However there can be problems converting old MBCS that use extended German Spanish Finnish and especially MBCS Russian characters Follow this section to load and convert these types of projects properly Note As always when updating the format of the project file to a new file version always keep a copy of the old project for backup purposes Note For the conversion process to work properly and all extended characters to be correctly converted it is vital that the conversion takes place while the computer is configured to correctly display these characters Failure to follow these steps will result in extended characters being substituted for the nearest suitable character which is likely to be incorrect and cause errors Once saved the conversion error cannot be undone so any occurrences will need to be edited manually This can be time consuming and should be avoided These settings are only required temporarily during the conversion process Once converted to Unicode the Operating System can be reconfigured and the Unicode characters will be displayed correctly Windows XP To configure Windows XP to c
102. CX Supervisor User Manual Software Release 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided in them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to the product DANGER Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury WARNING Indicates information that 1f not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalised in this manual The word Unit is also capitalised when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Logic Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Revision 1 3 Page CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page ii Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of part
103. Change Analogue Objects can be animated so they change between a variety of colours at a variety of intervals This is achieved using the Colour Change Analogue dialog To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog to add an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Colour Change Analogue dialog to modify an action select Colour Change Analogue from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Colour Change Analogue action the Colour Change Analogue dialog is displayed Colour Change Analogue Ea Analogue Expression ox l Cancel Colours Thresholds Browse Clear W Apply changes to object frame text colour M Apply changes to object background fill colour Enter an expression in the Analogue Expression field which results in a real or integer value Only when the result of the expression reaches a value identified as a threshold does the object change colour Release 1 3 Page 143 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON The object can have one of five colours depending on the value of the expression It changes between these colours at the thresholds For example choose the colour blue for the first colour and the value 20 for the first threshold The object then changes to blue until the
104. Data Transfer Actions Update 32 General Attributes 27 I O Attributes 30 I O Types 29 I O Update Rate 30 Memory Attributes 29 PLC Attributes 31 Point Types 27 Creating a project 75 Creating and Editing Graphic Objects 46 Creating Graphics Library Graphics Library 105 Creating Editing Control Objects 48 Creating Editing Graphic Objects Arc 46 Block 46 Ellipse 46 Line 47 Polygon 47 Polyline 47 Rectangle 47 Round Rectangles 47 Text 48 Customising 86 Customising CX Supervisor 2 5 Cut Manipulating Objects 64 CX Server 322 Error Codes 299 CX Supervisor customising 2 5 86 CX Supervisor Preferences 20 D Data Transfer Actions Creating Points 32 Date Points Point Import 39 DBCS 213 220 323 Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual DCOM Configuring 259 Definition 323 DDE 305 323 Server application 326 Default language 215 Defining Properties of a Page 14 Delete Manipulating objects 64 Deleting an Existing Point 34 Design application 249 Device Configuration 77 Display Points Point Import 40 Distributed Server 238 DLL 323 Double Byte Character Set See DBCS Drop and Drag of Points Point Editor 25 Dynamic Data Exchange See DDE Dynamic Link Library See DLL E Editing Objects 45 Re shaping 45 Re sizing 45 Wozards 46 Editing Preferences 21 Ellipse Creating Editing Graph
105. Delete ingredient 163 Delete recipe 164 Download recipes at runtime 168 Information 158 Ingredients 160 Modify a recipe 162 Modify ingredient 163 Print recipes See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Runtime 166 Security levels 164 Terminology 157 Validation 161 View 158 Recipes See also Recipe Editor About 326 Download recipe 323 327 Download recipes 168 Ingredients 160 324 Print recipes See also Page preview page Page print page Page setup page for printing Runtime 166 Security levels 164 Validation 161 Workspace 101 Rectangle Creating Editing Graphic Objects 47 Redundant Server 239 Remote connection Configuring 259 to a CX Supervisor application 237 Using OPC 225 Removing a PLC Connection Device Configuration 81 Removing Pages from a Project Project Editor 103 Re shaping Objects Editing Objects 45 Re sizing Objects Editing Objects 45 Rotary Gauge Control Objects 55 Rotate Control Bar 6 Round Rectangles Creating Editing Graphic Objects 47 Rubber Band 63 Runtime About 326 Access PLC connection 81 Release 1 3 OMRON Advanced settings 92 Alarm history 121 Alarm reporting 120 Alarm settings 87 Alarm acknowledge 120 Alarm Message printer settings 88 Alarms current 121 Alarms print 122 Animations and scripts 129 55 Create installation disc 98 Event Error me
106. Display Value Digital The state of a Boolean point may be displayed using the Display Value Digital dialog To access the Display Value Digital dialog to add an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Digital dialog to modify an action select Display Status Text from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Value Digital action the Display Value Digital dialog is displayed Digital E pression Ok motor Displayed Text motor iz set to H State O Text FALSE State 1 Text TRUE Cancel iit Browse An expression based on Boolean point must be entered This expression is typed into the Digital Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Boolean value can be entered in the Displayed Text field The position of the displayed value within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field Release 1 3 Page 147 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Note To include a character as part of the text insert 1t as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes to be displayed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters as the first
107. Dynamic Data Exchange which up until that point had been used extensively for data exchange within SCADA systems designed for Windows The new OLE technology was more flexible robust and efficient than DDE OLE provided an opportunity to create a standard interface between the SCADA core and the device drivers responsible for reading and writing data to various automation devices such as PLCs Such a standard interface would benefit both the SCADA vendors and equipment suppliers as the SCADA vendors would not need to invest costly effort in developing software drivers while the equipment manufacturers could provide just one driver that would work with all Windows software in the same way that printer manufacturers already could The first draft of the OPC OLE for Process Control specification v1 0 was released in December 1995 The following year the group of companies involved in the definition of the standard decided that an independent body must be set up to manage the OPC specification This decision resulted in the formation of the OPC Foundation that has continued to develop the philosophy of standardised interfaces for SCADA In 1998 the Data Access 2 0 specification for OPC was released This addressed several deficiencies and ambiguities in the original standard and included specifications for both the Automation interfaces typically used by VB programmers and Custom interfaces typically used by C programmers In 2000 using
108. Enable Disable dialog to add an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Enable Disable dialog to modify an action select Enable Disable from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Enable Disable action the Enable Disable dialog is displayed Enable Disable Digital Expressior Ok ptei Enable Disable State Enable while TRUE Disable while FALSE Disable while TRUE Enable while FALSE Cancel Browse ddi To specify a change in the enabled disabled state of an object enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is enabled or disabled when the expression is TRUE is chosen with the Enable Disable State settings Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Enable Disable operation click the Cancel pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Rotate An object can be rotated about its centre Specify this using the Rotate dialog To access the Rotate dialog to add an action sel
109. For a point this is automatically set to the same as the point type when selected using the Browse button However for an expression this must be specified for example an expression Second 3 will create a Real value but the required data may be just the integer part so the Data Type would be set to Integer Deadband This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values that are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies within the deadband the values are ignored When the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Page 186 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Entering a value of 0 1 e no dead band will cause every sample to be logged Trigger on change of value This option is only used when the Sample Rate is set to On Change When unchecked every time the expression changes a new record is written If a record consists of many fields that may be read or calculated at different times a new record is written every time any one field changes However the desired action may be to change several fields and then log the new values to a single record To achieve this action the Trigger on chan
110. For backwards compatibility if these files still exist they will be loaded as MBCS and converted to Unicode temporarily for the duration of the runtime For this conversion to succeed the operating system must be configured to support displaying and converting the original language To permanently convert a USL translation file to a Unicode format UDT file simply open the USL file in Notepad select Save As and choose Encoding Unicode and change the extension to UDT If both a UDT and old style USL file are present the Runtime will load and use translations from the newer UDT file To get the user defined text translated and incorporated follow these steps ILL Desc 1 Develop your application completely It is easier and more effective to Note Note Release 1 3 perform these steps just once However if further development is required repeat these steps and use a development tool like WinGrep Visual Sourcesafe or other version control software which should easily show the changes that have been made 2 Export the user defined text by selecting menu Project Create User Language File This will create a file in the project directory called default udt 3 Copy this file for as many translations as are required Name each copy lt language gt udt using exactly the same text particularly the accents as appears in the Language Settings dialog If the filename prefix is not exactly the same the file will not be loaded T
111. G No backups are taken when a file is purged If you wish to keep any data you must ensure that backups are taken before purging occurs If the Keep all files check box is checked no automatic purging will take place and the System will store all the Dead files created until the disk is full Dead files can be copied moved deleted etc as they will not be written to again by the System Live files may be copied 1 e backed up to another directory while the Log file is open but they cannot be moved or deleted as they are locked by the System In order to delete or move a live file it must first be closed See Opening and Closing Log Files Invalid Data Log Files Data log files generated during one project sessions will continue to be used in subsequent sessions if they are still live For example if a system runs during the day and is shut down at night then a Data Set with a duration of 7 days will use the same file for the whole 7 days Release 1 3 Page 177 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON If a session is halted and Data Set Items changed deleted or new ones added it is not valid to continue using the existing file When the session is restarted and Data Set file opened CX Supervisor checks to see 1f there are any differences between the current Data Set and the Data Set stored in the file If any differences are detected the System will mark the existing file as invalid by altering the Timestamp brackets from to
112. LE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Primary Keys Schema Procedure Columns Schema Procedure Parameters PK_TABLE_CATALOG PK TABLE SCHEMA PK_TABLE NAME PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME COLUMN_NAME PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA PROCEDURE_NAME PARAMTER_NAME Schema Procedures PROCEDURE_CATALOG PROCEDURE_SCHEMA Release 1 3 Page 205 CHAPTER 12 Databases PROCEDURE_NAME PROCEDURE_TYPE Schema Provider Types DATA_TYPE BEST_MATCH Page 206 Schema Referential Constraints Schema Schemata Schema SQL Languages Schema Table Constraints Schema Table Privileges Schema Tables OMRON CONSTRAINT_CATALOG CONSTRAINT_SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME CATALOG_NAME SCHEMA_NAME SCHEMA_OWNER CONSTRAINT_CATALOG CONSTRAINT_SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME CONSTRAINT_TYPE TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME TABLE_TYPE Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Translations Schema Usage Privileges Schema View Column Usage TRANSLATION_CATALOG TRANSLATION_SCHEMA TRANSLATION_NAME OBJECT_CATALOG OBJECT_SCHEMA OBJECT NAME OBJECT TYPE GRANTOR GRANTEE VIEW_CATALOG VIEW_SCHEMA VIEW_NAME Schema View Table Usage VIEW_CATALOG VIEW_SCHEMA Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Schema Views TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME
113. MRON Add DataSet Add Group and Add Item enables new Data Sets Groups and Items to be added to the selected entry Ga WorkSpace Miel a de Dataset 1 Miller 3 Group 1 Grain 2 Grain Weight e a Grain Size Edit ie eF lour Milled Cut Group 2 Delivery a E DataSet 2 Mixer E A aste E Group 1 Flour Group 2 Water Delete l e B Volume el Water On Add Data Set oJ Temperature Add Group A T Water Mix Add Item a r DataSet 3 Dump de y DataSet Moulder Vey Pages T5 Alanne es Recipez y Logging The functionality of the Items 1s determined by their expression If the expression is a single point name the item is shown as the same type as the point as configured in the point editor 1 e memory input output or input output If the expression contains calculations constants and or multiple point names the item is shown as a script calculation Adding Editing Data Set Properties The Add Modify Data Set properties dialog is displayed when either the Add Data Set or the Edit an existing Data Set option is selected from the menu Add Data Set Data Set Properties Data Set Name Dataset 1 Miller Period li Montre a ooh niles to keep 24 M Keep all files M Start Logging on Application Startup Cancel Page 172 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Data Set Properties The Data Set Name field enables the Data Set to be
114. Point Deleting an Existing Point To remove an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the Delete Point button from the toolbar This results in a confirmation dialog being displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the point from the points database or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note It is possible to delete more than one point by either selecting points within a range or by selecting individually several points To select a range click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt SHIFT gt key down to mark the end To individually select more than one point click whilst holding the lt CTRL gt key down Page 34 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Quick creation of many points CX Supervisor supports up to 8 000 points which could take much time to create Within the Point Editor you can use Copy Paste which helpfully increments the point name automatically BoilerTempl1 becomes BoilerTemp2 BoilerTemp3 etc but you still have to edit each point to configure the PLC address and possibly other information Using the Copy and Paste functions Point data can quickly be edited and created for example in grid form using Excel This can prove extremely quick when the design uses contiguous addresses 1 2 3 1 Open the Point Editor 2 Select the points to edit or a single point to act as a template and Copy to the Windows Clipboard Start Excel
115. Rate of Change Alarm Messages Browse Raised alarm Raised Normal alarm Cleared Page 114 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Once all the information has been provided for the new alarm selecting the OK pushbutton commits the new alarm to the alarms database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this add operation Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Alarm dialog Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text Insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application Alarm Header Information The name of the alarm is entered in the Name field The alarm name can be constructed of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Any other characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Alarm Name entered message This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog The group to which this alarm is added is selected from the Group field To create a new group name simply type the name of the new group in the Group field The use of alarm groups allows filtering of alarm messages by group name The priority assigned to the alarm is selected from the Priority field The Display Alarm Acknowledge Box setting determines whether th
116. Realpoint is 5467 76 The can be used in various fields for example e In Alarm Raised and Cleared Messages e g Alarm Raised Boiler Temperature too high Current value is 1d BoilerTemp e As captions for popup edit box animations This is useful as the captions are then dynamically translated e g Caption CaptionString e As parameter to MessageBox This is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g MessageBox Error ErrorNum occurred e As parameter to LogError or LogEvent This too is useful to help convert numbers to strings e g LogError Error ErrorNum occurred priority e Titles in Graphs and Charts useful for translations again e g Titles Ti tlestring e In Tooltips for dynamic information Tooltip text ToolTipString e In Report templates See Script Reference GenerateReport for more information See Chapter 6 Point Substitution Settings and FAQ Creating Reports and HTML Reports for related information Release 1 3 Page 43 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects CHAPTER 4 Objects This chapter describes the various objects available within CX Supervisor It also describes the processes for creating editing and manipulating objects Objects Pages created with CX Supervisor are constructed from objects that are inserted and linked together to form a coherent interface CX Supervisor objects are divided into three groups graphical control and embedded
117. Recipe There are two ways of uploading a recipe definition in runtime The first method is to use a CX Supervisor script function attached to a graphical object on a page such as a push button The function call is UpLoadRecipe lt NameOfRecipe gt Release 1 3 Page 169 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON m The other way to upload a recipe is to display the Recipe Viewer as described in the previous chapter Highlight the desired recipe from the recipe list and click the Upload Recipe pushbutton The Modify Save Upload Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Cancel Save Recipe As Configuration Attributes Recipe Mame Coffee Irish Description Makes smooth creamy Irish style coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Mame Editable Cream ml Whiskey ml Modify Target The Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value for an ingredient to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog An ingredient must already be selected from the list of ingredients for this recipe Any change to the target value is saved in the recipe definition Any number of ingredients may be modified in this way when the recipe is uploaded Selecting the OK pushbutton will upload the recipe If for some reason the recipe definition can t be found the following error message appears The recipe failed its validation checks Upload aborted Each recipe upload must be completed before anot
118. Release 1 3 Page 121 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON l Date and Time Message Priority Status 720698 09 05 26 Opened C5 SMACSCSY20Beta Demos 720698 09 07 44 Closed Alarm Log 20698 09 08 44 Opened CAS YSMACSCSY 0Beta Demos 720698 09 08 54 Closed Alarm Log 720698 09 09 06 Opened CAS SMACSCSY 20Beta Demos 0698 09 11 27 Closed Alarm Log 80598 10 11 18 Opened CAST5SMAriscsWe2DBeta Demos 90598 10 15 08 Closed Alarm Log SOUR AOO 10 10 92 Mnered CACYOMACLOCOVONE akat Carine This dialog always shows the log listed in date and time order Y al Time 09 56 1 03 56 11 The Print Contents of Alarm Log View toolbar button causes the messages in the Alarm History dialog to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly The alarm log itself is simply a text file projectname alg that may be examined or printed using any of the usual utilities available under Windows such as Microsoft Notepad The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Page 122 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation CHAPTER 9 Animation This chapter describes CX Supervisor animation and the procedures associated with the creation of a project animation page animation and object animation using the Animation Editing facility The active use of points and how points dictate animations 1s also described A
119. Row Arrayli r Valid ways to specify a row Array1l Column Arrayl col Array1 C Valid ways to specify a column Microsoft Excel is informed of the row col requirement by specifying a Range of cells in either row or column format Both the Microsoft Excel and CX Supervisor specifications must match in order for the call to be successful It 1s not necessary to specify rows or columns if a single element of an array 1s required Note DDE Requests are one shot request i e they are not part of a Hot link 1 Example requesting CX Supervisor array values from Microsoft Excel Sub RequestingArrayValues Dim chan As Integer chan DDEInitiate SCS Point If chan lt gt 0 Then Request Array1 from CX Supervisor and store in a row starting at RICI Range Cells 1 1 Cells 1 3 DDERequest chan Arrayl Request Array2 from CX Supervisor and store in a column starting at R2C1 Range Cells 2 1 Cells 4 1 DDERequest chan Array2 col Request elements 2 and 3 from Array2 and store in R3C1 R3 C2 The or format can be used to delimit the array index Cells 3 1 DDERequest chan Array2 2 Cells 3 2 DDERequest chan Array2 3 End If End Sub OLE Automation OLE Automation provides a mechanism whereby one application can control another In order to access a CX Supervisor points value via OLE Automation
120. Sal or 123 4 5 aec ala lala Mame Tywpe WO Type Address El 12Hour Integer System E t ctivedlarms Integer System El t amp larmCount Integer System El t4MPM Text System El f4vailableMemoarn Integer System Text System El 0 ayD month Integer System El 0 ayOhear Integer System 2 0 emol ode Boolean System El fDiskSpace Integer System S GO Resources Integer System 2 fHiogh larms Integer System A A Lt 4 Description Hours in 12 Hour format Number of active alarms Total number of alarms AM PM indicator for 12 Hour clock format Amount of available memory in bytes Date fe g 26 02 95 Day of the Month Day of the Year Indicates a valid token has not been installed and is therefore in demo mode Amount of free disk space in bytes Percentage of GDI resources free OBSOLETE IN W20 AND ABOVE Number of active high priority alarms APA A AAA PASO Fee The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing Note To select a range of points click on a point to mark the start of the range and click again with the lt Shift gt key down to mark the end Release 1 3 Page 23 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Note To individually select more than one point click whilst holding the lt Ctrl gt key down Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Point Editor
121. TER 17 Best Practices OMRON e Never use On Regular Interval scripts You should almost never need to use On Regular Interval scripts Always question e Ifitis used for logging use the logging facilities instead e Ifitis used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e When they start with or contain IF lt condition gt THEN you should probably be using an On Condition script using lt condition gt from the IF statement e When they perform calculations on PLC or memory points e g Z X Y use On Condition to recalculate when the source data changes e g with a condition X Y TRUE which forces execution even if value changes to value 0 This will guarantee the calculated is up to date with the latest source information plus stress the system much less while the value doesn t change e Never use Sleep command You should almost never need to use the Sleep command It can also create confusing applications as it can create re entrant scripts and asynchronous PLC communications Always question e Ifit is used for timing use PLC ladder instead as this is much more reliable e Consider if the code following the Sleep should in fact be executed on an event e g after completion flag returned from PLC instruction or new data value etc e Use Animations if possible Always choose direct object animations in preference to page object scripts blink colour
122. The information to be returned from the Provider is determined by specifying a Schema Type and a Criteria The Criteria argument is an array of values that can be used to limit the results of a schema query Each Schema type has a different set of Criteria that 1t supports A Schema is configured by selecting the desired Connection and choosing the right menu option Add Schema to invoke the following dialog Add Schema Association Ea Schema Association Properties Mame T ables Cancel Point tat able ames Browse Type IT ables Preview Criteria ras LE NAME Filter ras LE W Read on Connection Name A unique Schema name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required Point The name of an array point which will hold the results of the schema request The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Type The Type list will be populated with a selection of available Schema Types Criteria The Criteria list shows the available Criteria for the given Schema Type Release 1 3 Page 203 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Filter The Filter list is used with certain Schema types to reduce the information returned Read on Connection If checked the Schema results are automatically obtained when successful connection to the database is achieved Preview If the Connection is live then the Preview button will b
123. X Supervisor for retrieval can be amended from the Preferences option on the File menu This is especially useful when constructing complex pages Mirror Image bd There are various ways of mirroring objects e Via the Mirror Horizontal and Mirror Vertical buttons on the toolbar e By selecting Mirror from the Edit menu and clicking on either Horizontal or Vertical e By clicking on a grab handle and dragging it across the opposite side Some objects like Text and Control Objects cannot be mirrored For further details of mirroring objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Orientation i Lines Rectangles Polygons and Polylines can be rotated To rotate an object click the Rotate button on the toolbar The Rotate Object dialog is displayed Lancel Enter the angle of rotation in degrees in the value entry box and click the OK pushbutton Transparency I p Solid shapes polygons and text boxes can be filled with colours and patterns from the tools palette When they are created solid objects are filled with the colour already selected on the palette Further details on transparency are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor Group When there are a number of objects together they can be moved around in a group keeping their relative position To group a number of objects select them activate the Edit menu and click on Group Release 1 3 Page 65 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON The selection is now regarded
124. XOPCCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button You will only need 1 communications object per OPC server but note you can connect to more server at a time if desired using this setting This field is initially blank and an OPC control should be added Select the Add option which will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select the one to be added and click the OK button Communications Controls X Select a control OMRON Cs Communications Control OMRON C IC Communications Control Cancel OMRON Es OPE Communications Control OMRON Cx Supertzor Communications Control Note On adding the Communication Control Properties dialog 1s automatically shown as detailed below To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes Page 231 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON Page 232 window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the
125. abort the delete operation Printing Alarms Print Setup The Alarm Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Release 1 3 Page 119 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Printing E To print the contents of the Alarm Editor click the Print pushbutton Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Alarm Reporting In Runtime An alarm condition which occurs during runtime is brought to the attention of the operator There are a variety of options available in the way alarms are reported These options are configured in the development environment During runtime there are essentially four ways of examining alarm messages the Alarm Acknowledge dialog the Current Alarm dialog the Alarm History dialog and the Alarm Object The Alarm Object is a graphical object which displays alarm messages in a similar way to the alarm status viewer Refer to chapter 4 Objects for an explanation of how to configure an alarm object to filter alarm messages by group name Alarm Acknowledge Whenever an alarm is raised during a runtime application a confirmation dialog is optionally displayed requesting acknowledgement of the alarm The dialog sh
126. alls SUM ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal This example creates a Recordset of all the orders and their details and adds a field called ExtendedPrice to store the total order value for each record and sums all the ExtendedPrice values which is stored in Order Total Group Hierarchy example SHAPE select customers customerid AS cust id orders from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY cust_id Group Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE SHAPE select customers orders orderid orders orderdate from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid APPEND select od orderid od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details as od AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid Page 210 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases SUM rsDetails ExtendedPrice AS OrderTotal AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders SUM rsOrders OrderTotal AS CustTotal ANY rsOrders contactname AS Contact BY customerid Note The inner SHAPE clause in this example is identical to the statement used in the Hierarchy with Aggregate example Multiple Groupings example SHAPE SHAPE select customers od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Con
127. alue in the Copies field 3 If multiple copies are selected click the Collate setting to instruct the printer to collate the copies as they are printed 4 To print to file click the Print to file setting 5 Click the OK pushbutton to activate printing Whilst printing is in progress a dialog is displayed showing the status of the print job Clicking the Cancel pushbutton at this point aborts the printing Once printed the dialog disappears The final printed version should be similar to that shown in the Print Preview dialog with a header describing the project and a footer describing the page with a page number and date stamp Note The Properties pushbutton on the Print dialog gives access to advanced printer configuration functions for the selected printer For details of these functions please consult the Windows User Manual On line Help or the appropriate Manufacturer s handbook Release 1 3 Page 19 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Saving a Page to a Project Once a page has been created it is wise to save it into the project in which it is planned to reside It is good practice to ensure that pages are saved regularly for example to minimise the loss of work in the event of a power failure nj To save a page click the Save Page button from the toolbar If this is the first time the page has been saved the Save As dialog is displayed This is a standard Windows dialog and usage depends on your operating system Please consul
128. ame APPEND child command AS name RELATE parent field TO child field child2 command Note By default the child recordsets in the parent recordset will be called Chapter 1 Chapter 2 etc unless you use the optional AS name clause to name the child recordset Note You can nest the SHAPE command The parent command and or child command can contain another SHAPE statement Note The fparent command and child command do not have to be SQL SELECT statements They can use whatever syntax is supported by data provider Note A child recordset will be automatically opened closed whenever its Parent recordset is opened closed A child recordset is effectively a field of its parent recordset therefore whenever a new record is selected in the parent a new child recordset will be generated Creating a Datashape connection Create DSN file specifying the required database as the Data Source Configure a Connection to the DSN file In the connection string type Provider MSDataShape FILEDSN lt your file name gt dsn Configure a Recordset as SQL Text and enter the required shape command as the Source See Datashape Source examples After successfully adding a Datashape Recordset it is now possible to add a Child Recordset to the existing Recordset by selecting the right menu option Add Recordset which will now be enabled Ifthe Connection is Live a list of valid child recordset names will be e
129. an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Object for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Resize Width action the Resize Width dialog is displayed Resize width Expression l Cancel Active Expression Range Required Width Browse Minimum alue lo Minimum Width jo Maximum walue 1100 Maximum Width 1180 Justification te Left O Centre Right Release 1 3 Page 137 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Width fields The Maximum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Width specifies the required width in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate width between the minimum and maximum widths The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the left of the object right of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To
130. an be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing ensure that the Project Editor dialog is displayed and currently selected and then select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing To print the contents of the Project Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Page 104 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library This chapter describes the CX Supervisor Graphics Library The chapter includes details of how the Graphics Library may be used for storing frequently used objects for use with a number of applications Overview The Graphics Library is a repository for objects that are often used in CX Supervisor pages The Graphics Library Editor allows access to Libraries from a drop down list box Objects are stored in the Library and can be removed or copied allowing quick addition of frequently used objects to pages or which appear in a project a number of times Libraries are not project dependant so objects can be copied from one project to another Graphics Library Activating the Library To activate the Library click on the Graphics Library button on the toolbar If the Library is a
131. and when required A typical use for a recipe is to initialise some point data values prior to the commencement of a particular operation under the control of a CX Supervisor project A CX Supervisor recipe consists of one or more ingredients each of which relates to a point Each ingredient assigns a value to a point by means of a target value A suite of CX Supervisor recipes may be created for any project In runtime the recipes are a great time saver that eliminate mistakes that may otherwise be made were the repetitive tasks they perform left to human endeavour It is possible to achieve simple point initialisation using the CX Supervisor script language This approach works perfectly well for relatively straight forward applications However further functionality is provided using the recipe system such as the ability to modify a recipe while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime Recipe Components Before proceeding any further with the description of recipes some basic recipe terminology must be introduced Recipe A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain none or many Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in the runtime environment Ingredient Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point Target Value An ingredient must specify a targ
132. arms n 0 2 147 483 647 Number of alarms currently unacknowledged Alarms Error Logger Points The following table describes system points for use with CX Supervisor errors Page 40 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points HighErrors 0 2 147 483 647 Number of high priority errors logged 0 2 147 483 647 Number of low priority errors logged MediumErrors 0 2 147 483 647 Number of medium priority errors logged PLC Communications Points The following table describes system points for use in the communication between CX Supervisor and a PLC sytompoint gt Pontope Pomrmge Reman A read per second since application startup SPLCBusy Boolean indicates if PLC communications are busy Indicates if Indicates if PLC communications are busy communications are busy Security Points The following table describes system points for use with user login logout and user privileges in the runtime environment SecurityLevel Current user s security level SecurityName pet ff o Current user s security name Printing Points Print Setup The Point Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Prin
133. as Live and which file s to delete during purging and also for performing previous next file searches in the Data Log Viewer Note Additional files should never be copied into the Data Logging directory as the automatic purging mechanism may delete all the log files Number of files in a Data Set When a Data Set starts logging a file will be created to hold the logged items this file is known as a Live or Active log file There is only one Live file in a Data Set file set When the time period for a Data Set log file expires a new file is created with a more recent Timestamp this file then becomes the Live file and the previous file is now known as a Dead log file Over a period of time there can be many Dead files in a Data Set but only one live one Ifa limit has been set on the number of dead files to be kept when this number is reached the oldest file will be purged automatically as each new file is created The number of dead files to be kept for a particular Data Set is managed automatically by specifying the Number of Files to Keep from the Data Set Properties Parameters when a Data Set is created This field is only enabled when the Keep all files check box is unchecked Note There will always be one Live file for each Data Set For example if the number of files to keep is set to 24 then there the system will keep 24 Dead files and one Live file 1 e 25 files in total WARNIN
134. as one group with eight grab handles for the group rather than eight for each object the objects can now be moved together Once objects have been grouped they can be ungrouped by selecting the object activating the Edit menu and clicking on Ungroup Raise and Lower E Each new object inserted on a page is placed on top of the previous one Although they may appear to be on the same level objects can overlap so it may be necessary to raise an object so that it appears over the top of another object For further details on raising and lowering objects refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Alignment Objects inserted on a page can look messy unless they are aligned relative to each other CX Supervisor helps by allowing the contents of a page to align on a grid The grid can be turned on and off as required There are a number of different grid sizes available 4 8 16 32 and 64 pixels The Snap To Grid function snaps to the nearest grid To align page objects and view a grid select Grid from the View menu Select the required grid size or click on Snap to Grid to align the most recently entered objects on the chosen grid The grid can be turned off by selecting Off An example of the use of the grid is illustrated as follows In this example the selected polyline is in the process of being moved down The presence of the grid governs the movement of the object in all directions As the object is moved its position
135. ases or decreases at the speed based on the values of the ROC field the 7 Base field and the direction based on the Direction field The alarm is cleared when the rate of change is less than the critical rate For the above example an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature increases by 5 or more per minute and clears when the boiler s temperature increases by less than 5 per minute Page 116 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms A point may be inserted into any of the alarm types Expression field by either typing in the point name or by selecting the Browse pushbutton which results in the Select Required Item dialog being displayed at the position where a point should be inserted Select Required Item x OK Cancel Point Hames Add Alias 4ctivedlarmns tAlarnCourt 4dd Point 4yailableMernary D apO Month l fDavOfrear ltem Displayed O emoblode T Aliases DiskSpace GD Resources Points High larms tHighE rors 4 Boolean qe W Integer Description F Real Text Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point pushbutton or Add Alias pushbutton allows a new point or alias to be
136. aste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application Aliases An alias definition can be provided to replace strings in scripts and expressions used throughout CX Supervisor applications An associated string replaces the alias when used in a script or expression Select the Aliases pushbutton from the Script Editor dialog The Alias Definitions dialog is displayed Refer to chapter 6 Projects for more details on alias definitions Execution Attributes The animation reacts to an event A script can be associated with an event depending on whether it is a project script page script or object script For a project or page script the following events trigger the execution of the script Onacondition based on a regular expression Ata regular interval defined by an interval time At the initialisation of the page or project At the termination of the page or project For an object script the following events trigger the script Following the user clicking once on the left mouse button Onacondition based on a regular expression Page 132 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation To specify a trigger for the script select an option from the Trigger Event field Note If On condition is specified a valid relational expression is required in the Expression field The script is executed every time a variable includ
137. ation of the use of points with objects refer to chapter 4 Objects Page 26 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Creating a Point Ja To add a new point select the Add Point button from the toolbar This results in the Add Point dialog being displayed Add Point Or General Attributes Point Mame whitevalve Group lt Default gt Description Cancel Advanced Browse dida White valve position Po Point Attributes Default State Default Text f State 0 or State 1 On Memory Attributes Array Size i Point Type Boolean C Integer C Real Text lO Type f Memory C Input C Output C Input Output Once all the information has been provided for the new point clicking the OK pushbutton commits the new point to the points database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts the add operation General Attributes The name of the point is entered in the Point Name field The point name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters and must not begin with a digit or include mathematical operators such as or be identical to a script reserved word such as IF or cos Any invalid characters including spaces generate an audible error or an Invalid Point Name entered message when the OK pushbutton is clicked The group to which this point belongs is selected from the Group field A new group can be ent
138. ations control The default name for the first control is OMRONCXICCommunicationsControl For each additional control added the number increments by one Project File This is the name of the current Project file that stores the setup of the items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the Info button and select Create or Open as appropriate Clicking the Open button opens the Open Project dialog from where you can navigate to the project file you wish to open If you want to create a new file click the Create option to open the Create Project dialog In the Create Project dialog navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type 1 0 File Name msc and click the Save button Note that a Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard files names can only be entered by using the Create or Open options Device Select the Device containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Device click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Device are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item sh
139. bar to open the Add Point dialog 4 In the Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 In the I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog 6 In the Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Communications Contre Communications Control Attributes Server OMRON CXOPCCommunicationslontrol Group Groupi i ES ltem MySineave Delete Array Size fi Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server i e OMRONCXSupervisorCommunicationsControl If you wish to use a different object make your selection from the drop down list To Add Modify or Delete an object click the Info button Selecting the Add option will open the Communications Control dialog From the list of control objects select OMRON CX Supervisor Communications Page 240 Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 CHAPTER 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application Control and click the OK button Communications Controls x Select a control OK OMRON Cs Communications Control OMRON Ex IC Communications Control Cancel OMRON Cs OPC Communications Control OMRON Cx Supernvigor Communicat
140. bjects embedded objects controls or bitmap graphics Extended Colour Line Style and Fill Pattern Palette Each of the Colour Line Style and Fill Pattern Palettes may be extended to allow access to more choices Only one palette may be extended at any one time The Extended Selection tools are located at the top of the Palette and are illustrated as follows m m The left hand square controls the extension of the Colour Palette the line between the two squares controls the Line Style Palette extension and the right hand square control the Fill Pattern Palette extension An example of the Extended Colour Line Style and Fill Pattern Palettes is shown below The operation of each of the extended palettes is identical to that of the non extended palettes Revision 1 3 Page 3 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON Graphic Object bar The Graphic Object bar contains the tools to create the graphic objects which can be placed on pages within CX Supervisor ARAANM S S ROCCOKVO2 SOYRUMEK SA E Selection Graphics Objects In general terms the operation of the Graphic Object bar is simple With a page active the Graphic Object bar is active and operation involves merely clicking on the desired tool to select it and then clicking and dragging to the appropriate point in the page This is not the case with the text polygon or polyline tools however the operation of these tools is fully discussed in chapter 4 Objects Movin
141. ble by e Using arrays where possible especially for PLC points e If memory points are defined for scripting try to reuse general purpose points like nLoopCounter bReturnValue nTemp e Use expressions in animations instead of calculating new values e g using TemperatureK 273 rather than creating a new TemperatureCelsius memory point e For memory areas that are bit and word addressable access as words If you want the bits use expressions with amp and operators e g Display Digital animation expression MyW100 amp 0x80 and MyW100 amp 0x40 instead of MyW100bit8 etc e Reduce the number of active points Aim to reduce the number of active points that are currently communicating where possible e Automatically by setting Update when on Display option e Manually using script EnablePoint DisablePoint OpenPLC ClosePLC etc e Have a minimum of Input Output points Double check the use of all Input Output points Don t forget that Output points can actually have Data Transfer set to input the value only once on start up Release 1 3 Page 253 CHAPTER 17 Best Practices OMRON e Use sensible update rates Aim to keep update rates low 5 seconds or 1 second updates should suffice If faster than 1 second updates are needed always question why If fast update rate are required pay special attention to if they can be disabled when not required e Use Copy
142. button a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the in place edit box or runtime User Input Text dialog being displayed based on the contents of the development version Set Text to Current Text Cancel Enter Hew Test The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field and a field in which the user enters the desired text Click the OK pushbutton to accept the value or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An invalid entry typed in the editable field is exposed as an error once the OK pushbutton has been clicked Common Colour Palette If an object or action has a colour associated with it the colour can be changed by clicking on the sample of the colour in the dialog which describes the object or action The Colour Palette dialog is displayed so that a new colour can be specified Page 154 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Colour Palette selected Colour SS Colour Name 50 Cancel A colour can be selected by clicking on one of the palette colours This becomes the selected colour and is denoted as such in the Selected Colour field Alternatively a colour can be selected by specifying a colour name or
143. change This allows software and hardware from different vendors to be used together Based on Microsoft s OLE now ActiveX COM component object model and DCOM distributed component object model technologies OPC consists of a standard set of interfaces properties and methods for use in process control and manufacturing automation applications The ActiveX COM technologies define how individual software components can interact and share data Backed by Microsoft s NT technology OPC provides a common interface for communicating with diverse process control devices regardless of the controlling software or devices in the process The goal of the standard is Plug and Play a concept developed by Microsoft and a number of other companies a few years ago By using a standard way of configuring computer hardware and software interfaces automatically a device will easily connect to another and immediately work without the need for lengthy installation procedures or complex configuration Instead of having to learn how to use 100 or more custom toolkits users will only have to learn one set of tools because all OPC drivers will work the same way OPC s purpose 1s to compel the automation industry suppliers to push all device drivers toward a standard form Essentially OPC defines a common interface that permits interface development work to be performed once and then easily reused The OPC standard requires hardware suppliers to provide front l
144. characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel and select Regional Settings 2 On the Regional Settings tab select the original application 3 Select the Set as default system locale option 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Once configured follow these steps to convert the application l Release 1 3 It can be worth checking the language configuration by running the old application under the old CX Supervisor version and confirming all characters are correctly shown Install the new CX Supervisor version and load the old project Open each page and select File menu Save Page to force the pages to be written in the new Unicode format Select Project menu Save to force the project to be written in the new Unicode format and then run the project to recompile the application Test the application fully in all supported languages and by entering text from different Locales Page 221 CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features OMRON Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer is also supplied with translations for the 15 runtime languages If launched from the Runtime application it automatically starts in the same language as the runtime application If it is started from the Start button it always starts in English The language can be selected from the standard dialog from the menu Options Language Settings Adding unsupported runtime languages
145. ck on the arrow button to display the list and select the desired object On selection the object is highlighted The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in de selected state Polygon_1 The following illustration shows the Object Identification control in selected state Raise Up One The Raise Up One button allows an object which forms part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the top of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the pushbutton once moves the object up one layer This continues until the object is at the top Clicking the pushbutton with the object at the top of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Raise Up One button with the black round rectangle selected Revision 1 3 Page 5 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON Before After Lower Down One E The Lower Down One button allows an object which forms part of an overlapping group of objects to be moved nearer the bottom of the group one layer at a time With an object selected clicking the button once moves the object down one layer This continues until the object is at the bottom Clicking the button with the object at the bottom of a group has no effect The following example illustrates the state of a group of two objects before and after clicking the Lower Down One button with the grey polygon selected
146. cnnancnnnnonannnnannnnons 98 FLO MN MN a e RA 99 Alias DCTIMIMIONS AAA AP nde leceewaethd N aa teeetienach 99 o A E EEE E A antes 100 Navigating Projects with the WorkSpace ooocccocccocicocococonoconocononononncnnnnnnconons 101 PO O EONO aeaieie e a as dls cs 101 Printing trom the Project EQO ia a 104 Chapter 7 Graphics Library ssccsssssscccccssssssssssssccesees LOS Y a aaa a a aa a a a baat i 105 Gran Nies LID aI Yin a a a 105 Manipulating ODJOCUS iana iieii ia a ati 107 Printing the Graphics Library vsceiseescecesceosvessnncleeccuvenseuensedesseycddeneeseadbixensenceusserceeaee 109 Chapter 8 Alaris cessscsiscdecosessdectevaesacvsassdecessavdvaneectevaseasessseeasevve L A cy ee 111 Alarmo GUNO ti iia 111 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database c coocccoccccccnccccnconcncnannnnnnnnnonnnnnos 113 Creating a New Alarm oocooccccnccccccccconncconncnnnnonnnonnnnonannonnnnonnnnnnnnonannnnannonannnnaninos 114 UpdatINg an EMS dla Manila E 118 Copying an Existing Alarm Definition occccoccccccncconnconcnccnnnconnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnos 119 Deleting an EXIStng AMM id 119 rs o ere eestlrerne cer tae nre ere nate eee ere 119 Alarm FRE POMUNG N RUNUME racial tica 120 Revision 1 3 Page xi CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page xii Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Contents chapter 8 continued Page Chapter 9 A nim ation cian LO Associating Points with Action
147. cordsets that are set to auto open these will also be opened by the Connect option Ifall goes well and a valid connection is made the Database Connection Icon will be adorned with a lightning bolt If not then this is probably due to an error in the Connection String Database Errors A detailed description of what type of error occurred supplied by the underlying Data Provider can be viewed by clicking that the right menu option Show Last Error Whenever an error is generated by a Data Provider a description of the error and its source will be displayed in a Dialog The Show Last Error option is specific to each Connection Example The following error was generated by the Jet Database Engine due to a typo in the Database name Database Error E S Ounce ha Icrosoft JET Database Engine Description Could not find file C Program Files Omron 5Es Demos D ataba source M orthvairn mdb Database Connection String dialog Connection to a Database is performed by means of a Connection String Because different Data Providers require different information to connect you to a data store these strings can be quite complex and cumbersome For this reason CX Supervisor will automatically create a valid connection string for your selected data source if it s supported This string can be viewed and modified via the Connection String dialog shown below when Advanced is pressed o
148. cs window This will only normally be used under guidance of Technical Support to assist diagnosing specific communication issues To view the dialog a Log in as a user with Designer privileges b Open the Point Maintenance dialog and select the PLC point to diagnose c Press Diagnostics The following screen is shown Sliderln Point Diagnostics Information Cx Sercer Interface Information Total Active Points Average Active Pts Sec Calculated Peak Pts Sec Read Callbacks Reads Now Being Processed Callback Only On Change Allow Input Optimisations MSecs since last callback MSecs since first callback Minimum callback interval Masimum callback interval Average callback interval Masimum callback duration Average callback duration Data updates MSecs since last data update Data changes MSecs since last data change Comme Fail Status Lx Server Registration Type Lx Server Internal Kep Other Information DataType Group Recipe Pending Humber of Errors Last Error Release 1 3 0 0 ILODOF Integer Default D 0 Refresh Clear Clear All Total Active Point Elements Average Active Elements Sec Calculated Peak Elements Sec Write Callbacks O Writes Now Being Processed O Data Transfer Optimisation Always Update Allow Output Optimizations MSecs since last callback Auto Update MSecs since first callback Minimum callback interval Masimum callback i
149. cting Print from the right mouse context menu Navigating Projects with the Workspace JA The Workspace is activated by clicking the Workspace button on the toolbar The Workspace dialog is displayed a WorkSpace i Se Project Scripts Pages EY BAKERY PAG IntervalScriptt E Polpgor_68 e ME Miser C3 Polygon 165 S Polygor_166 A Polygon 167 EEE Group_22 i A Polpgon_67 ES Polygon_4 a flour Selecting the Pages Alarms or Recipes pushbutton displays a list of the associated components that form part of the project Project Editor UP The Project Editor is activated by clicking the Project Editor button on the toolbar When activated the Project Editor may be displayed minimised at the bottom of the main Release 1 3 Page 101 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON CX Supervisor wndow Double click to view the contents of the Project Editor About the Project Editor The Project Editor provides a window into the contents of a project It lists all the pages currently comprising a project and allows for pages to be moved into or out of projects An example of the Project Editor dialog is shown as follows Project Editor A an Relevant Pages fu allel O E E Carb C Program FilessSOMAONS In Project ENGINE C Program Piles OMRORNSA In Project HOARE C Program FilessSOMAON In Project HCOOL C Program FilessSOMAON In Project HIGNI C Program Filess OMAONS In Project HIMJECT C Pro
150. ction can be modified from the current actions by clicking the Modify Action button in the toolbar Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Animation Editor dialogs Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired dialog field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard it may be pasted to another dialog or application View Mode The list of runtime actions can be viewed in a number of ways providing simple or comprehensive details as follows 2 Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons ae Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including runtime actions trigger event expression and access The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Project Graphical objects have no relevance at Project level as they cannot be referenced Scripts can be applied to a project to manipulate points These scripts are associated with events that occur throughout the operating session A script is made up of one or more simple statements that together make script code Release 1 3 Page 12
151. d Action button on the toolbar To access the User Input Analogue dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Analogue from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Analogue action the dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Analogue Integer A eal Point OK User Input Limits Cancel Wd Browse Minimum alle o Maximum ale fi 00 Runtime Display Attributes Caption Enter a new value Display Numeric Keypad In Place Edit Release 1 3 Page 151 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON A Real or Integer point must be entered This is typed into the Integer Real Point field A text string for the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Runtime Display Attributes field The limits imposed on the user for the value of the input are specified in the User Input Limits fields The Display Numeric Keypad option is useful if the runtime system does not have a keyboard 1 e it is controlled by a touch screen or tracker ball When a value is edited a Numeric Keypad dialog is displayed which allows editing by clicking on screen lo 2 9 9 e dona GEEA ofeefee If the In Place Edit option is checked instead of the popup editing dialog the value can be edited on the page in a standard Windows edit box To abort
152. d Ea VOM iii 223 Chapter 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Server 225 AN OVCIVIEW or ORC 2 sii sities a oe a eta Grease a ea aa tates dele 225 Using CX Supervisor with OPC Servers cccoccccccccoccnconcncnncnconcncnnnncnnnnnnanonnnnnnnonos 230 Using with Omron s CX Server OPC ccoccccnccccncncnncnononncnnnnnonnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 235 Chapter 15 Connecting to Remote Applications 237 Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave cccccccssccceeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseneeseees 23 FOG Ot A A O tale 238 DJISTHOUNEGSCRVCR iarainn sake octsacteat te teni 238 Redundant SAVE cia lod 239 Creating a CX Supervisor Server Application coooccccocncoccncconncocnnoncncnanonnns 239 Creating a CX Supervisor Client application ooocccocnccocncocnnconnnonononnnncnnnnnnos 239 Chapter 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components 243 Adding a Point linked to a parameter oocoooccccccnccccncnnccncncnnncnnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnancnncnnnos 243 Chapter 17 Best Practices cccccccccssssssssccccccscccscsssccssscceoes DAD A nosh Wecemceh ten teuceraliaueahlnicensen a a 249 POMOMMAN CG isch 220 oe coer te sets o o EE aaete ana seaaaaeeteh cease 250 POMS ii id 203 DRAWING a a ia 204 a ea 205 DAE Walle A E Metre eer rm ep Ren A N 256 Revision 1 3 Page xvii CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page xviii Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Content
153. d according to any of the three column titles For example to see the recipes listed alphabetically by security access level simply click on the Access Level field AE The widths of the recipe fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries Hhacces Levi D Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons Select the Small Icons button to view details with normal icons e Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including recipe access level and validation script The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field A summary of recipe information is available by selecting the Recipe Information button from the toolbar The resultant dialog shows the overall number of recipes in the project To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Recipe Information dialog is shown as follows Page 158 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Recipe Information Recipe Summary Total Number of Recipes 4 Creating a New Recipe lla Open the Recipe Editor as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To add a new recipe select the Add Recipe button from the toolbar This results in the Add Recipe dialog being displayed Add Recipe x Cancel Configuration Attributes Recipe Name Coffee Br
154. d as the Default startup language during development in the above case Espa ol Spanish In addition the developer may call the SetLanguage script function see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for details for example behind a button to allow the user to automatically switch languages User Defined text While the Runtime system 1s shipped with full translations for all system text any user defined text added by the developer must be translated and these translations incorporated into the application Examples of user defined text are e Button captions like Open Page e Text in Text objects like Value e Default values of Text Points e Chart and Graph titles The system always loads user defined text from files with the file name exactly the same as the language selection and extension UDT The file names for installed languages are English Czech Danish Deutsch Espa ol Finnish French Italiano Nederlands Belgi Norwegian Polish Portugu s Russian Slovenija and Swedish Note User defined text is specific to each application and therefore is located in the application project directory 1 e in the same folder as the lt project gt SCS file Page 216 Release 1 3 OMRON Note Note CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features In CX Supervisor version 1 25 and earlier the user defined text was stored in files with a USL extension These files are in MBCS format
155. d server check the information is correct and click the OK button Note If the server is not shown in the drop down list the server may not Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 b CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client be fully OPC version 2 compliant Check the server documentation Project File This is the name of the current Project file which stores the setup of the OPC items If no name is shown or it is incorrect click the New or Open button as appropriate Clicking the Open button opens the Open Project dialog from where you can navigate to the project file you wish to open If you want to create a new file click the New button to open the Create Project dialog In the Create Project dialog navigate to the directory in which you want to create your new file and enter your File Name Select the appropriate file type Save as type 1 e File Name opc and click the Save button Note A Project File name can not be entered from the keyboard File names can only be entered by using the New or Open buttons Groups Tab The groups within the selected project file are listed A Group 1s made up of one or more items data points that share a common update rate enabling them to be controlled as a single entity For example you could create any number of groups each containing Items that have the same update rate There is no limit to the number of groups you can have in a Project File and each group can co
156. d to distribute the runtime project These files can be on a removable Memory Stick or later burnt to a distribution CD or even to floppy disk if the project is small enough Click on Create Runtime Install Disc from the Project menu The Save Runtime As dialog is displayed ready to create an installation to the desired folder Refer to chapter 6 Save Runtime As for further information regarding the Save Runtime As dialog Note The files are not compressed This feature does not support large projects that need to span multiple disks Note The Runtime environment itself is not copied and must still be installed from a legitimate source Note Any ActiveX components used are not copied and should be installed on the target machine using the supplier s instructions Note Support files used by any ActiveX control cannot be detected and are not copied These will need to be added manually This includes e Omron OPC Client settings stored in OPC file e Omron Industrial Component communication settings stored in MSC file e Any bitmaps when using Microsoft Image control e Any file linked to by an OLE object objects with embedded files should be OK Note Existing databases or those specified by dynamic connections cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Note Report Templates used by script cannot be detected and are therefore not copied These will need to be added manually Note Any
157. de When a check mark is present in a Display Animation Editor field a double click on an object of that type activates the Animation Editor Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Release 1 3 Page 21 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Editing Preferences General Preferences General Preferences allow the default script language to be chosen When new scripts are added CX Supervisor will default to saving scripts in the select language General Preferences sonal Page 22 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points CHAPTER 3 Points This chapter describes CX Supervisor points and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of points using the Points Editing facility The application of external sources to points 1s also described What is a Point A point is a variable used internally by CX Supervisor All points within CX Supervisor have a name group and type associated with them CX Supervisor provides a set of pre defined System Points which are detailed in chapter 3 Points About the Point Editor The Point Editor allows the viewing creating modifying and removing of points from the points database Note System Points cannot be modified g To open the Point Editor dialog select the Point Editor button from the toolbar An example of the Point Editor dialog is as follows Point Editor lt All Groups gt T
158. dialog Under Windows 2000 and Windows XP the Insert Object dialog is not able to see all the controls installed on the PC These include the MS Forms 2 0 controls that are installed as part of MS Office This is by Microsoft s design for these operating systems however 1t is possible to force the old operation depending on which controls you need to expose for use in CX Supervisor Contact your supplier to receive details of the required Registry changes Q How does Sleep work The CX Supervisor Sleep function is designed to create a short pause in script execution The parameter specifies the duration of the pause in milliseconds For example lt statements A gt lt statements B gt Sleep 100 lt statements C gt In this example statements B will begin executing immediately when statements A complete though statements C will not begin execution until 100ms after statements B have completed Note 1 In a well designed truly event driven system use of the Sleep statement should never be required Always consider if the statements after the Sleep should be in their own script executed when a Condition occurs Note 2 The Granularity or intervals differs between Operating Systems In Windows NT and 2000 expiration is checked every 10ms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 100 to 109 99 milliseconds depending on when it was started For Windows 98 and ME the granularity is 5Sms so Sleep 100 actually pauses for 110
159. directly to CX Supervisor points by selecting a data source of CX Supervisor Local Points However note that the default setting for points is to allow reading but to protect against writing from external sources like these controls If this is attempted you will get the following error message OLE Point lt pointname gt has no write access Note however that as a low priority message the default project configuration will not cause the error log to automatically open and you will have to manually view the error log viewer To prevent this error and to allow write access change the OLE Access to Read Write on the Advanced Point Settings dialog Note Copy Protection Dongle or Token must be installed for this function Q Which OPC Servers have been tested with CX Supervisor The following third party OPC Server products have been tested with CX Supervisor Page 272 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions 4CE Industry OPCSysDiag 1 0 Pass O 4CE Industry Modbus Server 2 0 4 Alstom FBSOPC 1 30a Pass Technology although noted not OPC compliant A oom A build 313 Applicom haan IO 21 Dale as 2 1 1000 International AXEDA Systems OPC DA Server la 1 002 0 2 Pass CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 reported as 2 25 1 Pass Allen Bradley CimQuest OPC Server for 2 25 00 01 Pass Omron Cyberlogic MBX OPC Server 5 00 02 Pass Technologies Inc although not
160. e Factory OF Project Path Cancel c program les orar mai Project Info Folder Ea OMRON Ey Ex Prograrmmer Ey Ex Protocal E 4 Medina New Project Folder factor Drives c Network Release 1 3 Page 75 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Ta 1 Locate the parent directory in which the project directory is to reside using the Folder and Drives fields 2 Enter a name for the project directory in the New Project Folder field Ifa name is entered the folder is created and used otherwise the selected folder is used The directory name must be no more than 8 characters and may only contain characters valid for use in MS DOS file names 3 Enter a name for the project in the Project Name field The project name must be no more than 8 characters and may only contain characters valid for use in DOS file names 4 Click the OK pushbutton on the New Project dialog to create the project Alternatively click the Project Info pushbutton to open the Project Information dialog and enter a title and some descriptive text for the new project For details of using the Project Information dialog refer to chapter 6 Project Information Click the OK pushbutton on the New Project dialog to create the project Note If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network pushbutton is added to the dialog For further information on the function of the Network dia
161. e can make applications very easy to navigate even if they have many pages e Create a Main overview navigation page This can include basic information like company logo and date time If the application will be using security levels provide buttons to login e Add links from the main page to detailed system areas with either buttons or schematic diagram e g Process 1 Process 2 e Add links from the main page if required to pages dedicated to Alarms Diagnostics Reports Data Logging Statistics etc e Ifthe system has repeated functions e g 5 similar machines instead of creating 5 pages think about creating 1 page that can show data for any machine This can be achieved using indirection and or keeping data in arrays and just setting the index to display the machine you require Minor differences e g a button for Process 1 only can be shown or hidden depending on the index This will speed up development and also help when the application is maintained Organise the pages sensibly on screen Make sure that only the pages that are necessary are open When a page is no longer needed close it CX Supervisor will update all pages that are open therefore if lots of pages are open then 1t may be doing a lot of unnecessary work that will slow down the application For pages that are displayed in the same place set the Display Mode property to Replace This allows pages to automatically be closed when a new page is loaded e Use Log
162. e Acknowledge Alarm dialog is displayed in runtime when the alarm occurs The dialog notifies the operator of the alarm condition and allows the operator to acknowledge the alarm The default value is True Activating the Auto Acknowledge Alarm setting causes these messages to be acknowledged without any operator action Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Acknowledge The Play Sound setting determines whether an audible warning is sounded when the alarm occurs The default value is False Note that a waveform file must also have been selected for the warning sound to be heard The waveform is selected by using the Alarm Sound pushbutton on the Alarm Settings dialog An alarm description detailing the possibilities of how the current alarm would be raised is inserted in the Description field To move to a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog Activating the Print Alarm Messages setting causes alarms of this type to be printed automatically when they occur Alarm Type The alarm type can be Simple Deadband or Rate of Change Select the desired type by clicking on the Simple Deadband or Rate of Change settings This field is visible from the Alarm Editor dialog Release 1 3 Page 115 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON Alarm Attributes The attributes for an alarm are defined according to its type as this define
163. e Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Edit Point Value Digital The value of a Boolean point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Digital dialog To access the User Input Digital dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the User Input Digital dialog to modify an action select Edit Point Value Digital from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action 1s applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Edit Point Value Digital action the dialog is displayed Edit Point Yalue Digital Boolean Point OK Runtime Display Attributes Cancel dili Browse Caption Select ON or OFF State O Text OFF State 1 Tert or TF In Place Edit A Boolean point must be entered This is typed into the Boolean Point field A text string to use as the caption of a user dialog can be entered in the Caption field The range of input for the value and the representations of Boolean State 0 and Boolean State 1 are specified in the State 0 Text field and S
164. e Expression Range Required Positiors Browse Mininourn alte fo Minimum Offset 1 100 Masimum Value 1100 Maximum Offzet la To define the animation an expression based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies the number of pixels upwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels downwards from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the top and bottom positions To abort the Vertical Move definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Resize Width Objects can be animated by shrinking or expanding horizontally This can be specified via the Resize Width dialog To access the Resize Width dialog to add an action select Resize Width from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Resize Width dialog to modify
165. e Small Icons button to view details with normal icons Select the List button to view details as a list Select the Details button to view details as a list including name type expression priority and description information The details can be sorted in ascending order by clicking once or in descending order by clicking twice in the appropriate field Release 1 3 Page 113 CHAPTER 8 Alarms OMRON e A summary of alarm information is available by selecting the Display Information on Alarms button from the toolbar The resultant dialog shows an overall summary and a breakdown on the number of alarms per type To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Alarm Information dialog is shown as follows Alarm Information Ed Alarm Summary Total Number of Alarms Number of Simple Alarms Number of Deadband Alarms O M MM E Number of Rate ot Change Alarms Creating a New Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To add a new alarm select the Add Alarm button from the toolbar This results in the Add Alarm dialog being displayed Cancel Browse General Attributes Alarm Marne Group lt Defaul gt Priority Medium zZ W Acknowledge Box F Play Sound FP Auto Acknowledge FP Print Messages Description Alarm Type Alarm Attributes Expressions f Simple C Deadband C
166. e Word DOC can be problematic although RTF can usually be used in these cases These generated files may then be viewed or distributed using a file server or web server Note that although information may be textual or graphical in nature these reports are intended for non real time output of data only and not for monitoring or control See documentation for GenerateReport script function for more information and the Coffee Tutorial Step 12 in the CX Supervisor Getting Started Manual See gt How do I make an HTML report update and refresh automatically Q How do make an HTML report update and refresh automatically CX Supervisor supports the generation of dynamic text and HTML reports from a static template see GenerateReport script function for details However Web Browsers views all pages as static pages There is a very simple HTML trick that will force the browser to reload or Refresh the HTML report that would then show any updates assuming GenerateR eport had been called again e g On Condition when the data changes To an existing HTML page add the following line This must be inserted between the lt head gt and lt head gt markers lt meta http equiv refresh content 5 url Report htm gt Page 276 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions This will force the page to be reloaded every 5 seconds The value after the content e g 5 is the refresh rate in seconds Be aware tha
167. e added and then selecting the Add Group option from the popup menu The new Group is automatically placed in the correct position in the Data Set and given a default group number New or existing Groups can be renamed by first high lighting the current group name and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the edit box is displayed the name can then be edited in the normal way A maximum of 26 characters is allowed Unwanted groups can only be Deleted they can not be cut and pasted Release 1 3 Page 175 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Data Logging at Runtime Overview All data logging is performed on Items which are stored in a Data Set The System can contain many Data Sets and each Data Set can contain many Items Each Data Set will have 1ts own set of files when the System is run see the chapter 11 File Management The amount of data that is stored in a single Data Set file 1s determined by the specified period when the Data Set is created File Management Data Logging Directory All data log files are stored in the directory Data Logging separate from the CX Supervisor files This directory is created automatically when the project runs for the first time A sub directory is used as a safeguard against the accidental deletion of important files by the automatic purge mechanism and to prevent the project directory from becoming cluttered with data files For example if the CX Supervisor project is in a dir
168. e enabled on the dialog which allows you to view the results of the configured Schema The Schema Type Criteria and Filter values can be modified at Runtime via the DBSchema function Database Schema Types The Database Schema types supported in ADO are Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Asserts CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT NAME Schema Catalogs CATALOG NAME Schema Character Sets CHARACTER_SET CATALOG CHARACTER_SET SCHEMA CHARACTER_SET NAME Schema Type values Criteria Values Schema Check Constraints CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT_NAME Schema Collations COLLATION CATALOG COLLATION SCHEMA COLLATION NAME Schema Column Domain Usage DOMAIN CATALOG DOMAIN SCHEMA DOMAIN NAME COLUMN_NAME Schema Column Privileges TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME GRANTOR Page 204 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Schema Columns Schema Constraint Column Usage Schema Constraint Table Usage Schema Foreign Keys Schema Indexes Schema Key Column Usage TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA TABLE_NAME PK_ TABLE CATALOG PK_TABLE_SCHEMA PK TABLE NAMEFK TABLE CATALOG FK_TABLE_SCHEMA FK_TABLE_NAME TABLE_CATALOG TABLE_SCHEMA INDEX_NAME TYPE TABLE_NAME CONSTRAINT CATALOG CONSTRAINT SCHEMA CONSTRAINT _NAME TABLE_CATALOG TAB
169. e is 1 the colour is white The same result can be achieved using the basic programming language script This time a single command can change the colour from black to white Finally either instance can be initiated by the user in the runtime environment e g the user presses a pushbutton to change the object s colour This is a simple example but underlines how quickly and smoothly a runtime application can be built This chapter elaborates on all forms of actions and animations that can be applied to CX Supervisor in the development environment Also refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further syntax details for the application of actions and animations Animation Editor Actions and animations are created on a project page or object basis using the Animation Editor To use the Animation Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project Release 1 3 Page 123 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON H To access the Animation Editor select the Animation Editor pushbutton from the toolbar The Animation Editor dialog is displayed Objects Actions Users Animation Editor Ellipse_2 Fjujel Fa eee All Users HIH O K g T 5 un Blink de Close Page e Colour Change Analogue de Display Page qe Edit
170. e of value Scripting errors The scripting engines are very complex which provides many opportunities for errors This can be categorised as follows VBScript Syntax errors These are seen during runtime as errors in the Error Log often giving the line and character of the error Referring back to the original script should easily display the problem Note that if the VB lt Script syntax is used within CX Supervisor script the line number reported refers just to the lines of VBScript with the VBScript being line 1 To troubleshoot further Page 294 For specific help on VBScript language syntax see Microsoft s web site at http msdn microsoft com scripting Double check capitalisation and objects names See Appendix B FAQ What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script To confirm the line causing the problem temporarily comment it out and see if the syntax error is no longer reported As a test try to simplify complex script lines into 1 or more lines with single instruction to identify which instruction 1s causing the error Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting e As atest simplify complex math formulae into several lines with single operation to identify which operation is causing the error e As atest use hardcoded values for parameters using known valid values e Display values using MsgBox command or using the LogEvent command e Confirm path of execution using
171. e string from a given identity CX Supervisor provides OLE Automation helper routines and code examples in the OLE2AUTO subdirectory Refer to the file OLE2AUTO WRI in that subdirectory for more information OLE Overview The Microsoft Windows operating environment allows the transfer and sharing of information between applications by using a technique known as Object Linking amp Embedding or OLE pronounced ol Embedding allows drawings sounds or almost any objects to be created within an application and then inserted embedded or linked within another file or document The embedded object can then be edited or activated by merely double clicking on it Linking allows an object to be shared by several documents by forging links between the destination documents and the source object e g a company logo may appear in several word processor documents by linking to a graphics object rather than embedding Embedding and Linking Objects within the CX Supervisor application can either be achieved by using the Object Packager or by embedding or linking objects directly within a page Note Packages may only be embedded or linked into CX Supervisor pages if they are created using OLE compliant applications This applies to objects either directly linked or embedded within CX Supervisor and those inserted using the Object Packager Object Packager The Object Packager is a Windows application which enables objects to be wrapped for i
172. e user by selecting the Auto Font Size option Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the gauge unchanged Scatter Graph Page 56 ea Click the Scatter Graph button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a graph To edit the graph double click on it The Scatter Graph Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Scatter Graph Wizard K Configuration Attributes Title Title Sample Rate poo Seconds l Max Samples ho Scatter Symbol Type x Cross y Scatter Symbol Colour C Scatter Background Colour oo e Project Colours e 3 0 Frame e Auto Size Font Cancel PEAS PANS Font dd Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects The Wizard allows entry in the Configuration Attributes and Expressions fields 1 25 Dees l a OO A A Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example the sample rate is every thirty seconds Enter the maximum number of samples to be displayed on the scatter graph in the Max Samples field Select the type of symbol to represent the data Select the colour of the symbol representing the data Select the colour of the scatter graph background Toggle the Project Colours and 3 D Frame settings as desired If set the Project Colours field allows the colour of the axis to be changed using the Palette The
173. ean ee Integer Description H rea Text TT Exclude System Points The Editable Value at Runtime setting determines whether the target expression may be changed at runtime when the recipe is downloaded Only expressions featuring a fixed value may be edited in this way expressions featuring point names may not be edited at runtime Select the OK pushbutton to add the ingredient to the recipe or the Cancel pushbutton to abort this part of the operation Recipe Validation Recipe validation is an optional safety check which may be made in runtime as the recipe is about to be downloaded If the validation fails the recipe is not downloaded If no validation is required make sure the Validate Recipe Before Download setting is set to OFF If validation is required check this box and then click the Validation Code pushbutton to display the Script Editor dialog Release 1 3 Page 161 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Script Editor lol xl Edit Operators Control Actions Functions Special Execution Attributes Script Mame Cancel Trigger Event On Request Browse Aliases Script Code E WB Script f Cx Supervisor Script IF water temp gt 98 OR water_temp lt 95 THEN RETURN Water ls Invalid temperature ie UREN ENDIF ELSE ENDIF Enter the recipe validation code using any standard CX Supervisor script language constructs The validation code should check any possible invalid point value o
174. eated using the specific software for your choice of data source e g MS Access To configure CX Supervisor to log to a database Create an unpopulated data source or template for use in Database logging Create a Database connection in the Workspace Database editor to the database created above Add a recordset with a read write lock and fields with Field Property configured as Add so records can be added Create a Database Link in the Workspace Logging editor by selecting Add Db Link from the popup menu to show the Add Database Link dialog Create Field Links for each field to log by selecting Add Db Field from the popup menu to show the Add Field Link dialog Page 184 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Add Database Link Dialog The Add Database Link dialog show below is show when the Add Db Link menu option is selected from the Data Log editor and the identical Modify Database Link dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Database Link Database Link Link Marne DBLink2 Cancel Connection CoV Recordset Dataset Sample Rate Change f Interval 0 Seconds M Start Logging on Application Startup Link Name For convenience a unique Database Link name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description if required Connection Select the Database Connection to link to from the list showing
175. ect Rotate from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Rotate dialog to modify an action select Rotate from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects Release 1 3 Page 145 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON On selection of the Rotate action the Rotate dialog is displayed Expression OK qn Q A gt Active Expression Range Required Rotation Minimum ale fo Minimum Angle o Maximum Value 1100 Maximum Angle 360 Cancel di Browse Rotation Point f Top Lett Top Centre Co Top Aight Centre Left Centre C Centre Right i Bottom Left i Bottom Centre C Bottom Right Specified Co rde amp 25 w 473 5 Fix point on screen Enter an arithmetic expression in the Expression field The constraints of the rotation animation are specified in the Active Expression Range Required Rotation fields Rotation is clockwise and the angle is specified in degrees Enabling the Fix point on screen option ensures that the rotation point remains at the same location even if the object moves To abort the Rotate edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive er
176. ect dialog being displayed The Point Import tool can be used to import point information into the CX Supervisor project that has already been configured The symbol name symbol type and PLC address is imported from the CDM file generated by other applications The CDM file can be generated from CX Programmer by linking the project to the CDM file The CDM file can also be generated by exporting from a SYSWIN project to a CDM file Refer to the documentation supplied with the package for information on how to export or link the data to the CDM file Release 1 3 Page 37 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON It is possible to import points from the CDM file of another CX Supervisor project but this is not recommended as only the name type and address are imported A better method is to copy the points from one application to the clipboard and paste them in the required application This way all point information is copied Steps to import from another CDM file 1 Open the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Project dialogue 2 Press Open Project and find the project to import from 3 Select the tab depending upon the I O type required 4 Click the Add button and select the symbols required 5 Add these to the CX Supervisor project by clicking the Add button 6 Press OK to return 7 Repeat for other I O types 8 Press OK to finish System Points System Points are those points that are pre defined within CX Supervisor They cannot be
177. ect the Browse pushbutton to apply the value of a point 4 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation An example of a tooltip in the runtime environment is as follows Select the Burner pushbutton to go Using the Floating Menu Clicking the right mouse button within CX Supervisor brings up a context sensitive menu known as the Floating menu There are two such menus one in the development environment and one in the runtime environment The development environment Floating menu contains short cuts for many operations discussed in this chapter Page 68 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects This chapter describes the process of using ActiveX objects within CX Supervisor applications Overview The Microsoft Windows ActiveX technology allows objects called components to be developed and are used by inserting them into an ActiveX container like CX Supervisor ActiveX components may perform many different functions which can be graphical or non graphical but they follow standard rules for defining their Properties Methods and Events Properties are like settings for example a control s colour would be a property Methods are like functions or actions that can be called for example a control might support a Redraw method Events are actions the control may create like OnLeftClick Following these standard rules allows any ActiveX
178. ectory called CACX Supervisor Project then when the project runs for the first time a new directory called C CX Supervisor Project Data Logging will be created to hold the data log files Data Logging Files Each Data Set has 1ts own set of files The following conventions have been adopted in order to identify the various files and add time and date information Data Log files are assigned the file extension dlv Data Log Values and the format of the filename is lt Data Set Name gt lt Time Stamp gt dlv The Time Stamp is in the format YY YY MM DD HHJ where YYYY Year in the form 1999 MM Month in the form 01 January DD Day of the month in the form 01 31 HH Hours in the form 00 23 Daylight time saving is automatic For example Data Set 1 Miller 1999012015 dlv A new log file will be created automatically whenever the preceding file has expired the timestamp The timestamp is also used to distinguish between files in the same Data Set The time period for each file is determined by the options selected when the Data Set was created The minimum time period for a Data Set file is one hour commencing on the hour Page 176 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Note Do not rename any log files while they are in the Data Logging directory or the File Management System will not work correctly The File Management System relies on the strict format of the Data Log files to determine which file to open
179. ed in the expression changes value and the result of the expression is TRUE For example the expression Second executes every second except when Second is zero whereas Second gt 0 executes every second If an invalid expression is entered an error message is displayed when the OK pushbutton is clicked Execution Attributes Script Hame Script Trigger Event On Condition Expression pee o ooo Note If On Regular Interval is specified a valid interval is required in the nterval Time field in units of milliseconds The script is started at the interval specified by this period If an invalid time is entered an error message is displayed when the OK pushbutton is clicked Execution Attributes Script Name Script Trigger Event Interval Time li O00 Millizeconds Script Code Script code is entered in the script code text field To start a new line press lt Return gt Refer to the Script Language Manual for explicit details regarding the construction and syntax of script code Expressions consist of operators and operands Operators are relational arithmetic logical and include many functions Operands are constants or point variables The script language can also contain Java and Visual Basic script Refer to the Script Language Manual for details Scripts can be generated either by typing directly into the script code text field or by using the pull down men
180. ed not OPC compliant KW Software KW Software 2 0 Pass GmbH ProConOS OPC Server Server iced ll Server 3 10 INAT GmbH INAT OPC Server 2 05 37 Pass TCPIPH1 S5 and S7 MPI PPI gew p E Wonderware Matrikon OPC Server for 1 1 3 230 Pass Release 1 3 Page 273 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON National 4 5 3 beta Pass Instruments OSI Software Inc OPC Data Access 1 0 0 14 Pass amp Historical Data although Access Server for noted not the PI System OPC compliant Phoenix Contact Interbus OPC 2 12 Pass GmbH amp Co KG Server Rockwell Software 2 30 00 beta SMAR OPC Conf 3 3 0 0 Pass Server for DFI302 SST DH OPC Server 1 6 16 SST ControlNet OPC 1 3 0 Pass Server Siemens AG Simatic WinCC V6 0 SP2 Beta Pass although noted not OPC compliant Siemens AG Simatic Net OPC 6 1 Pass Servers IndustrialDataBrid 6 0 3007 ge Siemens Moore APACS OPC 1 00 K beta Pass Device Server Page 274 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions The following products have not passed Klinkmann Omron driver Ignores Read from Device option Seen to lose device values potential OPC Labs Time Monitor Fail Group inactive item active still results in a callback gt Software V1 0a Server only not supported lemma AG ee V1 0a Server only not supported Contact Siemens to Siemens Building MK8000 MP1 30 MP1 30 Could not get the Technologies Inc simpl
181. edients are added using the Add Ingredient pushbutton in the Add Recipe dialog to display the Add Ingredient dialog as follows Cancel Browse Ingredient Attributes Ingredient Mame rill ra Link to Point milk Duantity Exprezssion Ab e Editable Value at Runtime Enter a suitable ingredient name in the Ingredient Name field This name should be unique and meaningful and identify the particular ingredient being added to the recipe Enter the name of a point which is initialised by this ingredient in the Link to Point field The adjacent Browse pushbutton may be used to display the Select Required Item dialog which provides a list of points from which the selection may be made The Select Required Item dialog also provides an Add Point pushbutton which allows a new point to be added See also chapter 3 Points The Quantity Expression field is used to define the value which is assigned to the point by this ingredient This may be a fixed value such as 50 as in the above expression or it may be any valid CX Supervisor script language expression featuring one or more point names Page 160 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Select Required ltem Cancel Point Hames i Add Alias 4ctivedlarms 4 larmCount Add Point available emon 0 ayOfMonth l DavDfear teme Displayed Demokode Aliases Disk Space ae GD AResources Paints Highdlarms HighE rors M Bool
182. edients may be modified in this way before the recipe is downloaded Selecting the OK pushbutton attempts to download the recipe If for some reason the recipe definition can t be found the following error message appears Unable to find recipe One recipe download must be completed before another recipe download is started If a recipe download is already in progress when another is started the following error message appears A recipe download is currently in progress If any validation code has been entered for this recipe the validation is conducted first If the validation is successful the recipe is downloaded If the validation fails the recipe is not downloaded and the following error message appears Unable to download selected recipe If there is no validation code to execute the recipe is downloaded anyway The download process consists of setting each ingredient to its specified target value The download may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Downloading recipe failed A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out When the recipe download is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully downloaded Uploading a
183. edit for example Boolean Integer Real String UserDefined and Colours Other data types 1 e Font type cannot be edited so are not displayed Also properties with multiple parameters are not listed in CX Supervisor as they cannot be edited e CX Supervisor will show additional private object properties which Visual Basic and Excel choose not to display Q Is it possible to connect an external PLC to CX Supervisor via a modem Yes you can connect from CX Supervisor via CX Server to a PLC via a modem In the PLC configuration Network Settings dialog select the Modem tab CX Server uses standard TAPI build into the OS The modem must be installed properly to be shown in the Modem list Q What is the CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Tokens 8 Dongles compatibility Different versions of SYSMAC SCS and CX Supervisor have used different versions of the copy protection software SCS V1 0 8 SCS V2 0 CX CX CX V1 1 V2 2 Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor V1 0 V1 1 V1 2 CC V1 67 CC V1 72 Token Token CC V1 72 CC V1 72 CC V1 72 Token Token Token SYSMAC SCS 1 0 SYSMAC SCS 1 1 ETS i IES IES IS EE am TT w NT Estacio e O IO CX Supervisor V1 0 CX Supervisor V1 1 CX Supervisor V1 2 The Product versions listed above vertically will work with the token versions listed horizontally which have a Yes If using CCMOVE the token disk and the token being moved must all be the same version Doing it from a nat
184. eir new location Cut Where objects are to be moved between pages it is often useful to cut them without having to insert a new object CX Supervisor has the ability to cut and paste objects Objects which are cut and pasted retain the properties assigned to them for example animation or alarms de To cut an object from the current page select 1t and click the Cut button on the toolbar The object is removed from the page and is held on the clipboard until a new object is cut or copied Copy Es An object which is to appear on a number of pages can be copied from an original To copy an object select 1t then click the Copy button on the toolbar A copy of the object is held on the clipboard overwriting the previously copied or cut object Paste To paste an object which has been cut or copied to the clipboard click the Paste button on the toolbar The object currently on the clipboard is pasted either over the original if the object is to remain on the same page or positioned in a new page Objects can then be re positioned by selecting and dragging using the mouse Delete To delete an object or objects select them and press the lt Delete gt key on the keyboard Page 64 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Undo The Undo button on the toolbar allows the most recent action or actions to be undone To undo the action click the Undo button on the toolbar The number of undo operations stored by C
185. el All other properties of the pasted recipe remain the same as the original recipe definition It is possible to copy many recipes at once by highlighting all the desired recipes in the recipe list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select recipe definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of recipe definitions Once the desired recipes have been highlighted the recipe definitions may be copied and pasted in the usual way Recipe Editor All Users a A ES Access Level ms Coffee American Coffee British Coffee European 5 Cottee Insh Deleting an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Delete Recipe button from the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the definition or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Recipe Security Levels A recipe may be assigned a security level governing which level of users are allowed to download the recipe in runtime The available security levels are shown below in descending order Designer Manager Supervisor Operator Page 164 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes All Users To assign a security level to a recipe display the Recipe Edit
186. elease 1 3 Page 45 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Wizards Control objects cannot be re shaped in the same way as a graphical object but are edited using Wizards Wizards customise control objects to display information in an easy to understand manner To edit a control object and activate a Wizard double click on the object Note The shortcut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within Wizards Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text move the cursor to the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another Wizard dialog or application Creating and Editing Graphic Objects For details on re sizing the graphic objects described in the following paragraphs refer to chapter 3 Editing Objects Arc Arcs may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To insert an Arc select the Arc button from the Graphic Object bar Click or click and drag on the page To edit the arc obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the angle subtended by the arc To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Block Text To insert block text click the Block Text button and then click on the page Stretch the text object to resize it Standard text tools from the toolbar and the keyboard e g b
187. eloper and any number of Data Sets may be used to record specific areas or types of events either automatically at runtime or as specified by the developer As an aid to viewing a number of particular events in isolation Data Sets can be subdivided into data Groups Specific areas of related data can then be stored in these groups which can then be viewed either singly or with other groups within a Data Set The main elements of the CX Supervisor Data Logger are Data Logger Editor used to configure items to be logged Data Logging at Runtime the actual logging of the data Data Log Viewer used to view the logged data Remote Data Viewer enables viewing separately from the runtime system Data Log Export facility enables export to other programs e g MS Excel gt gt OH OH gt Script Functions gives full control over the logging process Data Log Editor Configuring Data Sets and Logging Settings The Data Sets data Groups and Items to log are configured from the Logging Tab on the Ah bottom of the Development Workspace editor Items are edited using a right mouse button context sensitive menu The option available from the menu are Edit enable the parameters of the selected Data Set Group or Item to be edited Cut Copy and Paste enables the selected Item to be cut or copied and then pasted into a Data Set or Group Delete will delete the selected entry Release 1 3 Page 171 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging O
188. enables the chart to appear with a 3 D frame The Auto Fit Bars option forces the configured bars to resize themselves to occupy all of the available chart area Change the fonts used for the chart via the Font pushbutton The font size used for the chart can be automatically calculated by selecting the Auto Size Font option Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select one by clicking on a Browse pushbutton An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new chart attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the chart unchanged To select the chart scaling click the Scaling pushbutton the Axis Scaling dialog is displayed as follows Release 1 3 Page 51 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Lancel Style Attributes I Display Minor Ticks W Display Major Ticks Display Minor Units Display Major Units Scale Units Units y simi Keep Ticks On Axis Asie Tick Colour Keep Units On Axis Scale Units Colour Display Grid Configuration Attributes Minimum Scale Value E blasimum Scale Walue i O0 Minor Display Units 10 Major Display Units ll The Configuration Attributes fields can be altered by typing over the existing entries The Style Attributes fie
189. equired SQL Text is built In the above example the file Tables txt was chosen but this will be written as Tables txt in the SQL Text as most Providers will not accept the character because it is used as a delimiter Source The source field shows the Table name Server Query or SQL text as selected above which the Recordset is linked to Automatically open on connection If this checkbox is ticked the Recordset will be automatically opened when the Connection is opened If this is unchecked the Recordset must be open with a script command Lock The lock option enables the Recordset to be opened in either read only or read write modes there are two type of read write locks as defined below Read Only The default lock is read only i e data cannot be changed Page 198 Release 1 3 OMRON Pessimistic Optimistic Note CHAPTER 12 Databases Locks records when you start editing and releases the lock when Update or Cancel is called no need to worry about a conflict with other users but can cause records to be locked for long periods of time preventing other users from accessing the same records Locked only when the Update method is called therefore changes can be made to records without creating a lock conflicts have to be catered for because someone else might have changed the record between the time you started editing and the time you called Update If the Connection is open when a Record
190. erated MyData Set1999011214Item3 csv Multiple Selections On Interval Items If a multiple selection of on interval items with the same interval is made then the name of the parent directory will be used e g if the items live in Group1 the following file will be generated MyData Set1999011214Groupl csv The file will contain a column for each item selected and they will share the Date and Time fields Note The milliseconds field will only be valid for one of the Items and should therefore be filtered out for this type of grouping If a multiple selection of on interval items with different intervals is made then any items with the same interval will be grouped together in the same file The same convention will be used as above except using the duplicate filenames rules described above If an item does not share any interval with any other Item then its name will be used in the filename For example If Items 11 12 IB I4 IS 16 are selected from Group of Data Set MyData Set and Items 11 I3 amp 16 share intervals and I2 and I5 share a different interval then the following files will be generated MyData Set1999011210Groupl csv contains 11 13 amp 16 MyData Set1999011210Group1 1 csv contains 12 amp 15 Release 1 3 Page 183 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON MyData Set199901121014 csv contains 14 O
191. ered by typing in the Group field A points description detailing the use of the current point may be inserted in the Description field Point Type The point type can be Boolean Integer Real or Text The default type is Boolean Release 1 3 Page 27 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Point Attributes The attributes for a point vary according to the point type For a Boolean point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Default State Default Text i State 0 or C Integer C Real Text State 1 On The default state of the point is defined by selecting either the State 0 or State 1 setting Associative text such as OFF or FALSE for state 0 can be applied in the related Default Text fields The default text is associated with Toggle buttons and object animations such as Display Value and Edit Point Value when they are configured to use the point For an Integer point the following attributes are displayed Point Attributes Mininurn alue 39599999 Masimum alue sasasass Default Value o The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field Point Type C Boolean The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field The default value 1s inserted in the Default Value field Note Integer points are limited to 2 147 483 648 to 2147483647 For a Real point the following attributes are displayed Point A
192. ess The data sources which can be accessed depends on the Data Providers installed but may include MS Access MS Excel Visual FoxPro dBase ODBC for Oracle Paradox SQL Server Text files in TXT and CSV format gt A gt 2 2 Database Connection Editor The Database connection editor in the Development Workspace enables users to create Connections Recordsets Field association Parameter association and Schema objects in a familiar Tree View hierarchical format using the popup menu Release 1 3 Page 189 CHAPTER 12 Databases Gai WorkSpace EAE Results H H E Customers H E Employee Sales E Order Details Order Subtotals Ep Shippers 6 2 SOL OMRON Connect Shove Emors Cut Copy Paste Delete Add Connection DSN Ada Recordset A Text Add schema Becordz Add Field Add Parameter This editor is unique in CX Supervisor in that actual database connections can be tested online in the Development Environment The ability to connect online also has the added benefit of providing assistance in creating objects lower down in the hierarchy This editor has been designed to enable a large proportion of the database functionality to be performed automatically i e without the need for Script functions although a comprehensive set of Database Script functions are available Configuring a Connection Connections to existing databases are added to the Workspace b
193. est of operations to succeed Softing OPC oe a support issues reported USDATA Corp hill 7 0 1 MIN Single test failed to connect Q What is the maximum limit of commands in a script There is no set limit and some applications have had many hundreds of lines However it is not practical to have too many lines and a limit of 30 lines should be considered not as a system limit but as a warning that the application 1s not correct Q What is the maximum limit of ingredients in a recipe There 1s no limit other than the PC memory Release 1 3 Page 275 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q What is the maximum limit of number of entries in the Alarm Log The number of lines in the alarm log and the error log 1s set in the Project Runtime Settings Alarm and Event settings dialogs The maximum limit is currently 2000 Q What is the maximum limit of number of Alarms Theoretically the maximum number of alarm types that can be defined is 10 000 Q What is the maximum limit of number of serial ports supported It is the maximum that the Windows OS supports and are correctly installed on the PC We have successfully tested eight Q How do create Reports and HTML reports CX Supervisor provides a simple yet powerful report generation facility Using the same Points Substitution format a text based template file may be used to generate a report Good formats are TXT RTF and HTML Binary formats lik
194. et value for its related point This is the value to which the point is set in runtime when the recipe is downloaded Validation Code Recipe validation code is CX Supervisor script code which is used to check point values before downloading a recipe Download A recipe is downloaded during runtime This process involves identifying the appropriate recipe and executing the validation code if any exists The download is complete when each ingredient has set its point to the target value Release 1 3 Page 157 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor The Recipe Editor allows the creation editing copying and deletion of recipe definitions To use the Recipe Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open select Open from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project To open the Recipe Editor dialog click the Recipe Editor button on the toolbar Display the Recipe Editor as described in the previous chapter An example of the Recipe Editor dialog is shown below Access Level Validation Script c5 Cottee American Coffee British 5 Coffee European m4 Coffee Irish Recipes are displayed in three columns Recipe Access Level and Validation Script Recipes are usually listed in alphabetical order by recipe name although the ordering can be changed so that the entries are liste
195. ettings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview display Printing g To print the contents of the Animation Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Runtime Actions Script A script controlling the actions of an object page or project can be created and updated using the Script Editor dialog Release 1 3 Page 129 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON The Script Editor allows script code to be created or amended which carries out the mechanics of the animation operation To access the Script Editor dialog to add an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click on the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Script Editor to modify an action select Execute Script from the animation list and click on the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which an Execute Script action is applicable Page Animations and Project Animations may have an Execute Script action On selection of the Execute Script action the Script Editor dialog is displayed Script Editor Al ES Edit Operators Control Actions Functions Special Execution Attributes Script Name Intervals enpt2 Cancel Trigger Event on Regular Interval Browse
196. ext The current screen can be printed or print previewed in colour The traces shown using trace selection dialog as shown initially can be changed using the Select item facility Remote Data Log Viewer Data log files are not restricted to a machine that has CX Supervisor installed on it CX Supervisor is supplied with a Data Log Viewer application that enables all the View and Export facilities with the exception of Live updates to be carried out on dlv files that have been transferred to a stand alone machine Release 1 3 Page 181 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Data Log Export Facilities Exporting Data via the Export Dialog All the export facilities described in the ExportLog function can be carried out from the Export dialog which can be invoked from the CX Supervisor right menu script or the Data Log Viewer Options include the following USE GENERATED FILES If this option is checked then filenames will be automatically created otherwise a Save File As dialog will be displayed EXPORT TYPE Controls whether export should be as comma separated values files or as text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TO EXPORT Controls whether breaks date time and milliseconds are exported Data Log Export El Show Al Theme in Dataset ae 3 Balloon 1999020314 Expression Open Dataset Fuel 2 Lit Real Lift ene ti Burning Boolean burner O Export Data amp view Al Altitude Real Altitude Y U
197. ey to move from toolbar button to toolbar button and lt Enter gt to press a button The up and down cursor keys can be used to scroll the displayed list To close them or to move or resize them use the standard lt Alt gt lt gt hyphen key combination to access their menus Other Notes In Project level scripts it is possible to define OnKeyPress scripts which are attached to the cursor keys If Keyboard Only operation 1s set then it is not possible to execute a script attached to one of the cursor keys since they are being used for navigating around the selectable objects on the page Alternative additional keys have been added to compensate for this They are the number pad cursor keys 1 e 2 4 6 and 8 However these can only be used when the lt Num Lock gt key is on Non Volatile Rate The Non Volatile rate specifies how often the value of points flagged as non volatile are saved to disk in seconds The latest disk values are used to re initialise the point values when CX Supervisor is restarted To adjust this value select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu and select Non Volatile Rate from the sub menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog Non WVolatile Rate Save to Disk Every Ex Seconds Cancel Enter a new value for the Non Volatile Rate in the Seconds field and click the OK pushbutton Page 86 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Screen Size To open the Screen Size dia
198. files Make sure that all the cells in a column are of the same data type The Excel ODBC driver cannot correctly interpret which data type the column should be if a column is not of the same type or you have types mixed between text and general This type of querying and updating information in an Excel Spreadsheet does not support multi user concurrent access Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 like Excel files are also read only hence Records can not be added or amended However CSV and Text files can be updated by converting the data into an Excel spreadsheet and accessing the file via the ODBC DSN driver This is achieved by carrying out the steps as above using the CSV Text file instead Note the Excel provider is still used and a named range in Excel must still be created Configuring Recordsets The Recordset is the heart of the Database facility it contains all of the columns and rows returned from a specific action The Recordset is used to navigate a collection of records and update add delete or modify records Once a Connection has been added to the Workspace the right menu option Add Recordset will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog Add Recordset Recordset Properties Recordset TableName ServerQuey C SQL Text S
199. g the graphics editor Any button can also have its font changed from the default using the relevant Wizard in the graphics editor See chapter 4 Objects Runtime Settings The Runtime Settings option is selected from the Project menu The settings discussed in the following paragraphs help to configure runtime environment applications and have no effect in the development environment Settings that affect the development environment are discussed in chapter 2 Pages Startup Conditions To open the Startup Conditions dialog select Startup Conditions from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Page 84 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects I Evie vent Logging Enabled Sa I Display Main Window Maximized I Display Main Window Title Bar M Load All Pages into Memory FT Dinamic Hand Cursor Enabled M Keyboard Control Enabled T Use Flat Toolbars F Use Large Touch Dialogs General Startup Conditions Communication Startup Conditions TF PLE Links Enabled F DDE Links Enabled F OLE Links Enabled Click the settings to enable disable General Startup Conditions and Communication Startup Conditions Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort When Keyboard Control is enabled a focus rectangle becomes visible around the currently selected object The cursor keys and lt Tab gt key can then be used to navigate around the selectable objects on a page Once an
200. g the mouse pointer over any of the tools causes CX Supervisor to display a tooltip to describe the tool By default the cursor returns to Selection mode an arrow after drawing an object If you would prefer it to remain in its current state clear the Return to select mode checkbox in the Editing Preferences dialog which is found on the CX Supervisor file menu For further details concerning the tools contained within the Graphic Object bar refer to chapter 4 Objects Control Bar Page 4 CX Supervisor provides a Control Bar containing formatting and object manipulation tools The Control Bar can be activated or de activated from the View menu To activate the Control Bar select Control Bar from the View menu CX Supervisor places a check mark next to 1t signifying its active status To de activate it repeat the procedure the check mark is removed and the Control Bar is no longer displayed The various tools on the control bar allow the properties of objects to be modified A control may be activated with more than one object selected to change a particular attribute of all of the selected objects e g when all graphical objects on a page are selected and the Rotate button 1s pushed in and the desired angle specified all selected objects are rotated An illustration of the Control Bar is as follows Gauge gt nes cll The Control Bar may vary slightly from this according to the display resolution currently in use the
201. ge Create a connection in the CX Supervisor Workspace specifying the File DSN as its source Page 195 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Add a Recordset to the connection and select the Named Range which will appear in the list of available tables if the connection is live as the Table name Records in this table can now be added or modified as with any other database table Note If records are added to this type of table the Named Range will increase in size accordingly automatically The example below demonstrates a valid range selection named CustomerInvoice note the name displayed just above column A Page 196 Note Note Note Note gt Microsoft Excel Invdb_xls 557 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 8 xj SH GRAY SEBS o o ae a i _CustomerInvoics M Invoice_Number i Invoice Number A E Invoice Total 105 Alex Homer 22 99 106 David Sussme 37 95 of Edward Julius 14 99 30 John Daintith 0 99 456 Roger Hatton 243 ra en EN 5 6 E gt Ready Sum 1169 91 e E Z a El t a Mm jun The first row of the range 1s assumed to contain the Column Headings When updating files the column headings cannot contain numbers or spaces for example Columnl1 or Invoice Total is invalid Also some words are reserved and can not be used for example a column heading of Number will cause an error These restrictions do not apply when only reading these
202. ge of value should be checked for all fields within a record that may be read or calculated at different times Only when all checked fields have been changed 1s the record logged If however while waiting for remaining fields to change before writing a field 1s changed for a second time the record is written with all current field values including unchanged fields before the field value is changed for a second time Note There is a risk when using fields with Trigger on change of value checked that the new value of a field may not actually change its value 1 e the new value happens to be the same as the old value Because the field has not changed the record is not written until the value is changed again This can produce unexpected results as fields with Trigger on change of value unchecked are written with their current values at the time of writing not the value at the time of initial change This may also occur when a Deadband is used Release 1 3 Page 187 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases CHAPTER 12 Databases Overview CX Supervisor Database facilities provide fast transparent access to many different data sources via a database technology called ADO Database design is not covered here as it is a large subject explained fully in any of the many books available It is assumed that developers using these database facilities have a working knowledge of databases Comprehensive Database Script Functions allow complete database acc
203. gmented Note 2 These tests stopped at 1000 updates so actual limits are beyond this figure except for CS1H Ethernet and Controller Link Networks which has been tested for 10 000 updates per second Release 1 3 Page 263 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Max Num of Reads per Second CS1H N N o ES gt Ay NO e 1200 1000 800 600 400 Max Num of Reads per Second 200 CVM 1 V2 CPU21 CV500 V1 CPU21 Page 264 OMRON Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions 1200 1000 800 600 400 Max Num of Reads per Second 200 C200HX CPU64 Max Num of Reads per Second 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 SYSMAC WAY 9600 CQM1H CPU51 Toolbus 9600 CLK Page 265 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON CQM1 CPU42 Max Num of Reads per Second SYSMAC WAY 9600 Toolbus 9600 See gt How does the Operating System affect performance See gt What is the maximum limit of number of points See also Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points Q How can I see if the communication network is overloaded Use Network Performance Monitor Tool to see if the network is overloaded This tool is available in the CX Supervisor run time by right clicking and selecting Communication Utilities or can be launched fr
204. gout 96 Manager user privilege 93 Menu option access levels 97 Modify an existing user 95 Operator user privilege 93 Recipe levels 164 Remove an existing user 95 Required privilege for exit 97 Runtime 93 Runtime environment user configuration 96 Supervisor user privilege 93 User configuration development environment 94 User configuration runtime environment 96 Security Points Point Import 41 Select Manipulating Objects 63 Selecting Pages for Display on Run Project Editor 103 Setting Default language 215 Settings 83 Saving a Project 83 Settings general and runtime See Customising CX Supervisor Page 337 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Slider Control Objects 58 Sorting Points in the View Point Editor 24 Sorting Points in the View by I O Type Point Editor 24 Startup Preferences 21 Status Bar 8 Summary of Point Information Point Editor 25 Super Video Graphics Adapter See SVGA SVGA 327 System points 134 12Hour 38 ActiveAlarms 40 AlarmCount 40 SAMPM 38 AvailableMemory 39 Date 39 DayOfMonth 39 DayOfYear 39 DemoMode 39 DiskSpace 39 40 HighAlarms 40 HighErrors 41 HighestAlarms 40 Hour 38 LowAlarms 40 SLowErrors 41 LowestAlarms 40 MediumAlarms 40 MediumErrors 41 Millisecond 38 Minute 38 Month 39 MonthName 39 MouseX 40 MouseY 40 PLCBusy 41
205. gram FilessSOMAON In Project HSTAOKE C Program Piles OMRONA In Project IGNITION C Program FilessSOMAON In Project Index C Program Piles OMRONA In Project Displayed Loaded INFO C Program Filest0OMRONS In Project INJECT C Program Piles OMRONS In Project _ STROKE4 C Program FilessSOMAON In Project TITLE C Program Files OMRONS In Project Displayed Loaded The Project Editor consists of a control bar and a display area The control bar includes controls to filter the pages to be displayed add and remove pages from a project and open pages Viewing the Contents of a Project The Project Editor is used to view the pages within a project Individual listed pages are sorted based on the designated page name page path project status runtime display or load status By selecting the Page Name field the pages are sorted alphanumerically by name The Page Type Project Status Runtime Display and Load Status fields once selected react in the same way The Project Editor display shows the projects listed in page name order es The widths of the editor fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries The typeface of the editor can be amended from the Preferences option in the File 09 563 Menu This is especially useful when printing Opening a Page via the Project Editor To open pages via the Project Editor click the Open Page button on the toolba
206. gt C This creates a copy of the alarm definition on the Windows clipboard To paste the alarm definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The Alarm Editor ensures the name of the alarm is unique by appending a number to the name For example if the original alarm name was Alarm the name of the pasted alarm is Alarml All other properties of the pasted alarm remain the same as the original alarm definition It is possible to copy many alarms at once by highlighting all the desired alarms in the alarm list Press and hold the lt Ctrl gt key and use the mouse to select alarm definitions one by one or press and hold the lt Shift gt key and use the mouse to select blocks of alarm definitions Once the desired alarms have been highlighted the alarm definitions may be copied and pasted in the usual way Alarm definitions may be pasted into a project other than the original Care should be exercised when attempting this procedure as the alarm expression may contain references to point names which may have different meaning in the new project Deleting an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To remove an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and select the Delete Alarm button from the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the alarm from the alarms database or No pushbutton to
207. h number of characters in date field Time Width number of characters in time field Group Width number of characters in priority field Status number of characters in status field Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new alarm object attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the alarm object unchanged di Click the Chart button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the Chart To edit a Bar Chart double click on it The Chart Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Page 50 Release 1 3 OMRON Chart Wizard CHAPTER 4 Objects Configuration Attributes OF Chart Title Chart Style E Bar Mertical Chart Background Colour a I Project Colours e 3D Frame e Auto Size Font TF Auto Fit Bars Cancel Scaling Wd Font Bar Colours Labels and Expressions A E Browse E lz eet Browse C iz A Browse Sa e Browse E lz AA Browse a lp Browse The Chart Wizard allows entry of configuration attributes and assignment of expressions Ll l 2 3 4 Enter a title for the chart in the Chart Title field Select the chart style from the Chart Style field Select the colour of the chart background Toggle the Project Colours 3 D Frame and Auto Fit Bars fields as desired The Project Colours option allows the user to change the colour of the axis using the toolbox The 3 D Frame option
208. h the operating system and correctly configured on both the server and client machine To check start the Control Panel and view the Network settings In the list of network components look for Microsoft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it Pe 00 1 In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab 2 From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add 3 Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools ResKit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf 4 Follow the screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary Release 1 3 Page 303 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON 5 6 ya On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Note Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps Configuring a DCOM OPC Server PC running Windows 98 or Me TZ DS PO Start l Ensure File and Printer sharing is enabled by selecting Network from the Control Panel Add a service and click either Fi
209. haracters shown on the Alphanumeric popup keyboard can be set for existing or new languages The layout is updated when a new language is selected All keyboard layouts are saved in files with KBD extension and have the same name as the selected language Note If there is no valid keyboard layout for the selected language then the default layout in SCSDEFS KBD is used This already caters for all the western languages supported To create a new keyboard layout E Lies l Copy the file scsdefs kbd in the installed application folder default is C Program FilesOmronCX Supervisor and rename the copy with the language name e g American kbd 2 Follow the instructions at the top of the file to add each character for each key 3 Save the new keyboard layout 4 The Runtime will now automatically update the layout when the new language is selected Release 1 3 Page 223 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Chapter 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client This chapter introduces OPC Server to a new user and explains how to use CX Supervisor as an OPC Client An Overview of OPC What is OPC OPC stands for OLE for Process Control and is a standard published by the OPC Foundation The basic aim of the OPC standard is to allow hardware vendors to produce software drivers called OPC Servers and for software vendors to produce applications called OPC Clients which use a standard method for data inter
210. he charts below show how the network type affect the performance depending on the PLC used Ethernet 350 00 300 00 250 00 200 00 150 00 100 00 50 00 of CV500 Performance 0 00 CV500 CS1H Release 1 3 Page 287 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Controller Link 250 00 200 00 150 00 100 00 50 00 of CVM1 Performance 0 00 CVM1 CS1H CQM1H C200HX Sysmac Way 9600 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 of CVM1 Performance 20 00 0 00 CVM1 CS1H CQM1H CQM1 C200HX Page 288 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Toolbus 9600 200 00 180 00 160 00 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 of CVM1 Performance CVM1 CS1H CQM1H CQM1 C200HX Sysmac Net 2 160 00 140 00 120 00 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 of CVM1 Performa CVM1 C200HX Release 1 3 Page 289 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Sysmac Link 600 00 900 00 400 00 300 00 200 00 100 00 0 00 CVM1 CS1H C200HX Page 290 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX C Troubleshooting APPENDIX C Troubleshooting The appendix 1s a guide to troubleshooting and resolving problems Several tools and techniques are discussed to assist troubleshooting and in the case of no success the information required to request support How to diagnose
211. he format of these files is 99 99 development text translated text optional object ID The object ID e g Text_ 1 is optional but can be supplied if specific text requires different translations for different objects For example Run in English could be used as a verb on a button and as static text for a run number In this case different translations can be supplied depending on the object 4 Get these files translated An editor like Notepad can be used to enter the translated text in the second column i e in between the quotes after the first comma 5 Copy the translated files back to the application directory The runtime should now automatically use these files Titles of pages cannot be translated If necessary the page title can be hidden in the Page Properties dialog and custom title using a static text object added which does support automatic translation User Aliases and System Aliases are exported for translation automatically however the following System Aliases do not normally require any translation and can be left blank e ExecuteJScript Page 217 CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features OMRON e Execute VBScript T Configuring Windows for language support Windows XP Being the most modern operating system language support provided by Windows XP is the best If you are considering a Multilingual application this operating system offers the best solution It is
212. he number of pixels to the right from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Offset specifies the number of pixels to the left from its initial position that the object moves when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate movement between the left and right positions To abort the Horizontal Move definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message 1s displayed Vertical Move Objects can be animated by moving either up or down This can be specified via the Move Vertical dialog To access the Move Vertical dialog to add an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Move Vertical dialog to modify an action select Move Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Vertical action the Move Vertical dialog is displayed Page 136 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Move Vertical Expressions oK Cancel Actw
213. he required files should be supplied as a Data Source if a file is selected the connection will fail The actual file to be used is specified later when configuring the Recordset For example if a collection of text or csv files are contained in the directory C Text then a valid connection Data Source is C Text Connections to CSV or Text files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to a CSV or Text file see chapter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to CSV Text file Connections to Excel files using the Provider installed with ADO version 2 0 are read only Records can not be added or amended To create a read write connection to an Excel file see chapter 12 Creating a Read Write connection to an Excel file Connect on Application Start up The checkbox Connect on Application Start up provides the option of automatically connecting to the Database when the Runtime application is started Advanced Shows the Connection String dialog allowing the automatically generated connection string to be manually edited Release 1 3 Page 191 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Testing Connections in the Development Environment A connection to a Database can be made in the Development Environment by selecting the required Connection in the Tree View and then selecting the right menu option Connect If a Connection contains Re
214. hen selected all the Items in the Data Set start logging when the system is started and stop logging when the system is stopped If this option is not selected then logging must be controlled by the Start Stop logging script functions as required by the developer Editing Item Properties The Add Modify Item properties dialog is shown when adding a new Item or editing an existing one Release 1 3 Page 173 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging OMRON Modify Item Cancel Browse ltem Properties ltem Marne Volume Expression Water Data Type C Boolean C Integer Peal Deadbarid z Sample Hate C On Change E On Interval 5 S econdls Scale Minin yale 50 blasimum Y alte 60 Scale Label Litres Item Properties These options enable an items name and associated expression to be entered Its data type can be selected and if required a deadband value can be applied to the measured value The tem Name field allows the Item to be given a meaningful name The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification A maximum of 26 characters is allowed The Expression field defines the point name or expression that will be logged The Browse button allows easy point selection For details on how expressions or points are formulated Refer to chapter 3 Points The Data Type field determines the type of data to be logged Select either Boolean Integer or Real For points this is auto
215. her can be started If a recipe upload is already in progress when another is started the following error message appears A recipe Upload or Download is currently in progress The upload may fail at this stage if there are problems communicating with a PLC A communications failure results in the error message Uploading recipe failed A delay in response from the PLC of more than one minute results in the error message Recipe transfer timed out When the recipe upload is complete all the ingredients are saved and the CX Supervisor runtime environment continues to run in the normal manner An event is logged stating that the recipe was successfully uploaded Page 170 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging CHAPTER 11 Data Logging This chapter describes the CX Supervisor data logging facilities including how to configure items to be logged the logging of data and the viewing and exporting of recorded data What is Data Logging The concept of the Data Logger is the ability to define a number of points and expressions during development which may be recorded while the CX Supervisor project is being executed in runtime These events may be viewed at runtime and recorded for future evaluation They may also be exported to other programs such as Microsoft Excel The recorded events are stored in one or more Data Sets which can then be viewed using the Data Log Viewer The events to be recorded are defined by the dev
216. here a plant has a specific mix of personnel This can also prove valuable for international installations when the developers and on site maintenance engineers native language is different to the end customers The system can be switched to a comfortable language during work and easily switched back to the customer s requirement prior to hand over All translations for all system text like dialogs menus and errors etc are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time like button captions static text like Value graph titles etc can be exported to a text file for easy translation into as many additional languages as required At runtime the user can then change languages dynamically i e without having to exit and restart the application The translated system text and user defined text is automatically loaded and displayed Release 1 3 Page 215 CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features OMRON Changing language at Runtime The user 1f permitted by security settings may change the language at runtime The user may right click the application and select the Language Settings option see Chapter 6 Projects Menu Option Access Levels for details of the right click menu and setting access permissions Language Settings Language for User Defined Test Default Default Cancel Nederlands Belgie Norwegian Note In this context lt Default gt means the language selecte
217. hich can be searched are The current page All pages Project scripts Alarms Y Recipes 4 The project which includes Project scripts Alarms and Recipes By default all areas are searched 1 e Project and Pages To perform a Find operation 123s 1 Select the Find button on the toolbar or Find from the Edit menu Lal 2 Type the text to find in the Find What field or select a previous entry from the drop down list The Browse pushbutton can be used to select an item 3 Select the area to search Project amp Pages searches all areas 4 Choose the required options Output to pane 2 results in pane 1 to be saved for future use 5 Press the Find pushbutton to start the search or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Find Find what miser ha Search Project amp Pages Cancel T Match whole word only Browse Match case T Output to pane 2 Page 100 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects The output dialog shows all occurrences of the text in the selected areas It illustrates the location including page name alarm name recipe script name object line number and animation as relevant followed by the occurrence itself Double clicking on any line opens the appropriate editor Searching For miner Bakery Intervalscripil 78 Mixer rotate angle Baker Intervalscripil 93 Miner rotate angle Find in Files 2 The output can be printed by sele
218. hould be possible to remove unnecessary pages objects scripts points alarms recipes datalogging and database connections Clear description of the function that the Manual says the software should provide Clear precise repeatable steps to recreate the issue on a new application Page 297 OMRON APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes When errors occur in the communication package CX Server an error code may be displayed in the CX Supervisor Error Log To explain the cause of this error In the CX Supervisor Error log press the Display Code Converter toolbar button to launch the Error converter and show further details See Chapter 6 Projects Events Error messages for more details 8 Start Or launch the Error Code converter from the Start menu under the CX Supervisor menu and type in the code displayed Alternatively the full list of causes is below Note that the cause is only the last 2 digits of the error code for example if the error shown is Ox8alb then ignore the Sa and just look up Oxnn1b Cause Normal Operation Cancel Button was pressed Normal Operation The executing function was stopped in the applications callback handler The return specified buffer is not large enough to hold all the data requested The specified name is not unique within the open project file An unspecified error occurred in CX Server that is not handled by any other error c
219. ic Objects 46 Error Codes CX Server 299 Error Logging Points Point Import 40 Event Error messages 88 91 Column sorting 90 Disable updates 90 Display 89 Enable updates 90 Events 90 91 High priority errors 90 Information 91 Low priority errors 90 Medium priority errors 90 Show all events and errors 90 Exit Level 97 Extended Style Palettes Graphics Editor 3 Page 331 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual F FAQs 263 Fill Pattern Palette Graphics Editor 3 Filtering Points in the View via Group Point Editor 24 Filtering Points in the View via Point Type Point Editor 24 Find Points 100 Floating menu Runtime environment 86 Floating Menu Manipulating objects 68 Font Alarms 50 Charts 51 Default button 84 Gauges 54 56 Name 10 Pushbutton 54 Scatter graph 57 Size 10 Toggle button 59 Trend graph 62 Font Name Text Bar 9 Font Size Text Bar 10 Frequently Asked Questions 263 G Gauge Wizard See Wizard General Attributes Creating Points 27 General Preferences 22 General settings See Customising CX Supervisor General Settings Runtime Settings 84 Settings 83 General Settings Settings 83 Graphical User Interface See GUI Graphics Editor 1 11 About 1 Access 1 Bold 11 Colour Palette 2 Control Bar 4 11 Page 332 OMRON Extended Selection 3 Fonts 5 10 10 Grid 11 Italics 11
220. ical Point names instead of physical addresses Logical point names like Boiler 3 Pressure provide more flexibility than physical addresses like D8319 allowing the PLC program and addresses to be changed without impacting the SCADA They also make it much easier read during development and more importantly during maintenance Release 1 3 Page 249 CHAPTER 17 Best Practices OMRON Tip If the Logical symbols are created in CX Programmer it can link them to a CX Server file which CX Supervisor can then Import into the Points Editor This is a very quick method of creating all the required points e Perform all data conversion in PLC ladder Although today s PCs have excellent maths performance consider the format of the PLC data and how it will be used It can be temping to scale a point value when read e g to change the units of measurement or always perform a calculation e g calculate a running average or to format it e g make 1700 become 17 00 Instead consider writing this conversion as ladder in the PLC hardware rather than in CX Supervisor software This is particularly true if this conversion has to occur on several pages where the value is used or before data logging This ensures the converted value is always available and results in a simplified solution e Perform all timing functions and pulse generation from PLC ladder The PLC hardware has far superior timing and accuracy than Windows ca
221. ication using the following rules 1 Group together points that will be configured as Always Update in contiguous PLC memory addresses 2 Group together points that will be configured as Update when On Display grouping for each page 3 Within groups from steps 1 amp 2 create sub groups for each required update rate 4 Within update rate sub groups sort and group data by data format BCD Float etc These points can be defined as 1 or more arrays Page 252 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Best Practices e Use Fins event memory If your communications is using a Fins driver e g Controller Link it is possible to create a responsive application giving the impression of high performance by linking the SCADA to the event memory which the network updates automatically Of course reads and writes actually access the local cache very quickly although this will lag behind actual device values e Control communications Use the On Request update type to give you complete control over when the value of a point is read from the PLC or written to the PLC The InputPoint script function is used to input the value of a specified point and the OutputPoint script function is used to output the value of a specified point Points This section covers some good practices with the Points for quicker development and smoother running e Define as few points as possible Keep the Points database as slim and manageable as possi
222. icular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product EA Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc lt Represents a shortcut on the Toolbar to one of the options available on the I menu of the same window H Start Indicates a program must be started usually by clicking the appropriate option under the standard Windows Start button OMRON 2005 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON All copyright and trademarks acknowledged No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Revision 1 3 Page iii CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page iv Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual About this Manual This manual describes the CX Supervisor application and its ability to create modify and run S
223. idation Lode Configuration Attributes Recipe Name Coftee lrish Description Yalidation Makes smooth creamy Insh style coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Name Editable coffee sugar aber cream whiskey 100 Add Ingredient Modify Ingredient Delete Ingredient The selected recipe can be redefined as described in chapter 10 Creating a New Recipe The Modify Ingredient and Delete Ingredient pushbuttons on this dialog respectively allow the highlighted ingredient to be modified or deleted following confirmation Once all the information has been provided for the updated recipe clicking the OK pushbutton saves the recipe details whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this modify operation Release 1 3 Page 163 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Copying an Existing Recipe Definition Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor To copy an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and then type lt Ctrl gt C This creates a copy of the recipe definition on the clipboard To paste the recipe definition back in to the current project type lt Ctrl gt V The cut copy and paste operations in the Edit menu may also be used The Recipe Editor ensures the name of the recipe is unique by appending a number to the name For example if the original recipe name was Recipe the name of the pasted recipe is Recip
224. ight specifies the required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Maximum Value The Minimum Height specifies the required height in pixels of the object when the result of the expression reaches the Minimum Value A value Page 138 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation within the maximum and minimum values results in a proportionate height between the minimum and maximum heights The resizing also requires an anchor and direction in which to stretch or shrink This can be specified as the top of the object bottom of the object or centrally to the object by selecting the appropriate Justification setting To abort the Resize Height definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Horizontal Percentage Fill Closed objects can be flood filled along a horizontal axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog to add an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Percentage Fill Horizontal dialog to modify an action select Percentage Fill Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button
225. ine data collection and distribution They are the most familiar with how to access the device s internal data efficiently These devices then become OPC servers providing data to OPC client applications consistently Application developers can then write code in any language deemed appropriate The latest version of the OPC standard is version 2 This replaces the earlier version 1 standard CX Supervisor uses an OPC version 2 interface to connect to an OPC Server which is version 2 compliant Note that the OPC version 1 interface has been superseded and is not supported Users of CX Supervisor may need some basic understanding of OPC For more information on OPC see the OPC Foundation web site at For instructions on configuring your DCOM settings for connection to remote PCs see Appendix A Release 1 3 Page 225 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON A Brief History of OPC Data Access In the early 1990s a group of people from several important companies involved in the creation of SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition systems began meeting at Microsoft s headquarters in Redmond Their interests focused on the use of the Windows operating system within the factory automation environment in particular for the acquisition of real time data Microsoft at the time were working on the development of OLE 2 0 Object Linking and Embedding and 1t was apparent that this new technology would replace that of DDE
226. int can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Enter the maximum and minimum slider values and check the box to display the minimum value at the left or bottom of the page Exit the Wizard by clicking on the OK pushbutton to accept the new slider attributes or click on the Cancel pushbutton to leave the slider unchanged Page 58 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Toggle Button Toggle buttons are used to control and display the current value of a digital point Click the Toggle Button button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a button To edit the Toggle Button double click on it The Toggle Button Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Toggle Button Wizard Button Style DK Blank Button E Toggle Switch Cancel Colour Button In Out Button Rotary Switch On Off Switch Font Configuration Attributes Boolean Point State State 0 Attributes Text Or Style Attributes ff Ur Toggle While Pressed Button eal our State 1 Attributes Tert is J Button The Toggle Button Wizard allows a Toggle Button to be assigned a style State O text and State 1 text to signify its purpose It also allows selection of a Boolean point To select a style click on an option from the list box To enter button text type in the Te
227. int page Page Setup page for printing Rate of change 116 Simple 116 Workspace 101 Alias Definitions 99 Alignment Manipulating objects 66 Alignment Toolbox Manipulating objects 66 Amending a Page 14 Amending a Project 76 Amending an Existing Point 33 Animation Editor About 123 Access 124 Alias definitions 99 132 Analogue Colour Change 128 143 44 Analogue Display Value 128 148 49 Analogue Edit Point Value 128 151 53 Analogue User Input 128 151 53 Blink 128 142 43 Browse 129 54 Close Page 128 20 Colour Change Analogue 128 143 44 Colour Change Digital 128 144 45 Colour palette 155 Create animation 129 55 Delete animation 125 Digital Colour Change 128 Digital Colour Change 144 45 Digital Display Value 128 147 48 Digital Edit Point Value 128 150 51 Digital User Input 128 150 51 Disable 128 145 Display Page 128 141 Display Status Text 128 147 48 Display Text Point 128 149 50 Display Value 128 Display Value Analogue 128 148 49 Display Value Digital 128 147 48 Display Value Text 128 149 50 Edit Point Value Analogue 128 151 53 Edit Point Value Digital 128 150 51 Edit Point Value Text 128 153 54 Enable 128 145 Execute Script 128 See also Script Editor Expression dialog 131 Expressions 323 Page 329 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Height Resize 128 138 39 Horizontal Move 128 135 Horizo
228. intenance and upgrading can be achieved by removing and replacing individual components in a system without any work needed to wire up the new pieces To illustrate the savings imagine the increase in cost if every household appliance had its own type of wall plug Eliminating customisation drastically reduces the cost of an automation system by saving money during acquisition installation and maintenance Page 228 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Freedom of choice With the introduction of OPC compliant manufacturing automation products users are provided their due right to select and implement systems comprised of best in class components without the pain of custom interfaces This user benefit 1s sometimes referred to as freedom of choice For example both Netscape and Internet Explorer can browse the web equally well but people use the browser they like best As a result of this freedom of choice vendors will need to become more competitive and offer superior products and solutions to maintain their customers Besides freedom of choice the user also has vendor independence or freedom from a proprietary lock If the implemented control system is comprised of modules with proprietary interfaces any customer who desires to upgrade any component function of the integrated whole is entirely dependent on the vendor With OPC components only the module of interest must be upgraded and not the
229. ion is typed into the Expression field A text string to coincide with the display of a Real or Integer value can be entered in the Displayed Text field this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed value within the text field 1s specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field The value can be displayed in its decimal form in scientific notation or in hexadecimal by selecting a Format settings Page 148 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation The number of decimal places displayed can be specified by adding a character for each required place after a decimal point e g indicates 2 decimal places The text can also be left justified by setting the Left Justified setting Note To include a character as part of the text insert 1t as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed To abort the Display Value edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Display Value Text Text may be disp
230. ion stored in the OPC Server The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items Note This dialog cannot be opened until at least one group is added i ITEM ATTRIBUTES The Item Attributes dialog enables you to define the attributes of each Item data point in the selected group ltem Attributes Hame ooo Browse ltem ID CA Access Path ee DataT ype Long H Array i Active On Startup Cancel Name This is the client name for an Item i e a point of data Item ID This is the OPC Server s name for the data If the server supports OPC item browsing facilities click Browse to browse the OPC Server to list the namespace groups and items to create the OPC Item ID Otherwise type the OPC Item ID in the format specified in the server documentation Access Path This is the full path name for the data point Consult the documentation for the server to determine the correct format Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Data Type From the drop down menu select the format used to record the data point information Active On Startup Checking this option will ensure the Item is active when the OPC server is started The default is checked 8 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring control back to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open iy 9 The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Pr
231. ions Control Clicking the OK button in the Communications Controls dialog will open the Communications Control Properties dialog from where the server details can be added or updated Click Show All and select the computer name of the server machine from the list To edit these properties later select Modify from the Info menu Group Select the Group containing the required item from the dropdown list To Add Modify or Delete a Group click the Info button Items The Items within the selected Group are listed The Item Attributes dialog can be used to add or edit the items To Add Modify or Delete an Item click the Info button Selecting the Add or Modify option will open the Items Attributes window from where the item details can be added or updated Array Size Enter the number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 Having checked that all the parameters are correct return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Remote CX Supervisor application and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points 1 e to drive animations in alarm expressed in recipes for data logging etc Page 241 OMRON CHAPTER 16 CHAPTER 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components Connecting to Omron Industria
232. iption SC KeuDown ReyLode Shift KeyPress KepAsc KeyUp Keylode Shift ie ss Note In previous versions Event scripts could be added from the Animation Editor but the method above provides more efficiency as all event scripts are loaded just once on page initialisation Release 1 3 Page 73 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects CHAPTER 6 Projects This chapter describes the concept of projects It details procedures for creating and amending projects and the process of associating users with projects It also deals with the process of compiling a project Overview A CX Supervisor application consists of a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment An attempt to open a second project forces CX Supervisor to close the current project prompting to save changes where there is unsaved information and open the second project Creating a Project To create a new project within CX Supervisor select New from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog New Project Project Nam
233. ipulating an object 63 Re shaping an object 45 Re sizing an object 45 Snapping objects to grid 66 Text 327 Text object 1 Wizards See Wizard Object Identification Control Bar 5 Objects 45 Obsolete Features 303 OLE Automation 312 OPC Client 225 Foundation web site 225 What is it 225 Opening a Page via the Project Editor Project Editor 102 Opening Graphics Library Graphics Library 106 Optimisation of PLC Communications Device Configuration 37 Orientation Manipulating objects 65 Output workspace 101 P Page About 325 Access 13 Attributes 14 16 14 16 Modify page 13 14 Preview page 17 18 Print page 18 19 See also Page Preview page Page Setup page for printing Print Page 334 OMRON Properties 14 16 14 16 Save page 20 76 Save page as a different identity 20 Palette Extended Palettes 3 Fill Pattern Palette 3 Line Style Palette 2 Palette Colour Palette 2 Palette Graphics Editor 1 Paste Manipulating objects 64 Peer to Peer 237 238 PLC 31 32 77 80 81 326 Accessing connection in runtime 81 Attributes 31 Configuration 77 Creating a connection 77 Deleting a connection 81 Device type 79 Modifying a connection 80 Network 79 324 Optimising connections 37 PLC Attributes Creating Points 31 PLC Communication Points Point Import 41 Point Import 37 Alarm Points 40 Date Points 39 Dis
234. ironment using the Alarm Settings dialog The Alarm Object refer to chapter 4 Objects is a graphical object which can be configured to display alarm messages for certain groups of alarms and thus provides a convenient way of filtering alarm messages Alarm definitions are made and modified using the Alarm Editor To use the Alarm Editor CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project is currently open either select Open Project from the Project menu to open a previously saved project or select New Project from the Project menu to create a new project Facilities exist to add an alarm modify an existing alarm copy an alarm remove an existing alarm following confirmation and display the alarm list in name type or description order Alarm Settings C To open the Alarm Settings dialog select the Change General Alarm Settings button from the Alarm Editor toolbar The dialog is displayed as follows Release 1 3 Page 111 CHAPTER 8 Alarms Cancel Alarm Sound On Alarm Automatically Display TF Alarm Status Viewer Alarm History Log Maximum entres in Status Viewer 20 Maxinium entres in History Log 200 Log system start stop messages Alarm Status Messages C Use Language File Text Raised Text la Cleared Text Oleared is Acknowledged Text Jacknowledged Auto Acknowledged Text Automatically Acknowledged OMRON In the On Alarm Automatically Display area
235. isplays the Print dialog 2 To display the next page click the Next Page pushbutton 3 To display the previous page click the Prev Page pushbutton 4 To display the current page side by side with the next page click the Two Page pushbutton To return to a single page view click the same button again which now carries the legend One Page 5 Click the Zoom In pushbutton Click it a second time to zoom in to the second level This does not zoom into a specific area of the page 6 To zoom out from a zoomed in view click the Zoom Out pushbutton Click a second time to zoom right out 7 To close the preview screen click the Close pushbutton Printing To print a page click the Print Page button from the toolbar The Print dialog is displayed Page 18 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages Print Ej Printer Hame son Stylus Pro ss Properties S hats Default printer Ready Type Epson Stylus Pro L Wher 4 Holly rernote_printer 1 Comment Print to file Print range Copies fe All Humber of copies li so fi from to EE Ellas Selection ds 2y Sate 1 Set the print range by clicking one of the settings in the Print range settings The Selection setting is only enabled when an item or items are selected on the page prior to starting the print process Click the Pages setting and enter a range of pages in the from and to fields 2 To change the number of copies to be printed enter a new v
236. ist of the following fields Type Date Time Milliseconds Data Type Normal Error Data Boolean Integer Real Release 1 3 Page 179 CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Data Log Viewer Component Invoking the Data Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer can be invoked by Selecting Data Log Viewer from the popup menu if privileged in the runtime OMRON From script function OpenLogView with the Data Set and Traces to show as arguments and also closed by CloseLogView script function From an external program Viewing Logged Files The Data Log Viewer looks like this The window shows a graphical representation of the recorded data Data Log Viewer Balloon 1999020314 dlv File View Options Windows Help S ely ole S121 Q lla El sll w Elf Hl v 3 18 x 350 00 gt Altitude 300 00 7100 00 Fuel 250 00 E 0 00 200 00 t 150 00 e 100 00 m 50 00 0 00 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 14 05 44 14 05 54 14 06 04 14 06 14 14 06 24 TRUE Burning 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 03 02 99 14 05 44 14 05 54 14 06 04 14 06 14 14 06 24 Y NAAA For Help press F1 03 08 00 14 06 32 000 NUM hi Page 180 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Features 4 gt gt gt gt 2 The Data Set viewed is the name passed as an argument with the script function or a user selected Data Set On start up a dialog allowing selection of
237. it a modifier might declare that a bit is to be forced set and not to be written normally The field contains options applicable to the Data Location The Array Size field specifies the number of data values associated with the point A value greater than 1 allows the point to be treated as an array For more detail on array points and their uses see Optimisation of PLC Communications The PLC Attributes dialog takes on a slightly different appearance if the point type is text showing the number of characters which start at the specified data location Data Locator Characters fi Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLC The type of data transfer action for the selected PLC can be specified by selection of the appropriate setting Options for Input and Input Output points are Always Update Point Value and Only Update Point Value When On Display Options for an Output point are Write Value Read Value and No Data Transfer Data Transfer Actions When Opening a PLE E Write Value To PLC C Read Value From PLC C No Data Transfer Conversion Attributes The minimum and maximum PLC value and the application of a conversion factor is specified in the Conversion Attributes fields these fields are not applicable for Boolean and text points Conversion Attributes can be used to convert in a linear fashion between a value in a PLC and the point range For example if the possible range in the PLC is 0 to 1000 and the point range is 0 to
238. it is possible to develop an application in any language but this does not affect which language the user must use at runtime in any way Note Note Note Release 1 3 The distinction between the development program and runtime program and their respective target users is very important to understand and will help you understand the following sections CX Supervisor is designed and tested for use with European versions of Microsoft Windows Every language permutation is not tested and no testing is performed on other versions like Russian Japanese or Chinese etc as this is simply standard Microsoft functionality However you should ensure your translated application can be correctly deployed before starting full development for example by creating a small test application The formatting of character tables used by CX Supervisor 1 3 and later for multilingual features is the worldwide standard Unicode format This product therefore only runs on Unicode compliant Operating Systems 1 e Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and later products Page 213 CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features OMRON Development Features For the benefit of the application developer the CX Supervisor Development application may be run in any major European language 1 e English Spanish Italian German and French This means all menus dialogs and error messages displayed by the Development program are shown in this language which provides a more c
239. it privilege 97 Find points 100 Font default button 84 Information 76 99 103 Language settings 91 Linking pages in a project 103 Menu option access levels 97 Modify a project 76 Page 335 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Non volatile point rate settings 86 Non volatile rate 86 Opening a project 76 Point substitution settings 92 Printing 77 Project Editor See Project Editor Running a project 97 Saving a project 76 Saving a Project 76 Saving a runtime project 98 Screen size 87 Search for points 100 Security 93 Startup conditions 84 Workspace 101 Project Editor 101 About 102 Access 101 Adding Pages 103 Changing View Mode 103 Linking Pages 103 Multiple Selection 104 Opening a Page 102 Printing from See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Removing Pages 103 Selecting Pages for Display 103 View 102 Viewing Project Details 103 Viewing the Contents 102 Project Information 99 Project Workspace Access 101 Alarms view 101 Project view 101 Recipe view 101 Pushbutton Inserting a pushbutton 54 Wizard See Wizard Pushbutton Control Objects 54 R Raise Up One Control Bar 5 Raise Lower Manipulating objects 66 Recipe Editor About 157 Page 336 OMRON Access 101 158 Configuration attributes 160 Copying recipe definition 164 Create a recipe 159 Create ingredient 160
240. ith direct connection to the Device or Device network However the Client or indeed multiple Clients can be run on different networked PCs and will automatically read and write data over the PC network To do this the PC running the Server must be correctly configured If necessary refer to your OPC server documentation For full details of DCOM configuration and security issues see your Microsoft documentation The following is a quick guide Note Although DCOM connections can be achieved using Windows 98 and ME they are more difficult to configure and offer less functionality For best results always use Windows NT or Windows 2000 Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications y E A To allow OPC or DCOM communications through the firewall either a Completely disable the firewall as follows Note can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure Start 1 Open Control Panel followed by Computers 2 Right click My Computer and select Security Center 3 Select Windows Firewall Ge 4 On the General tab choose option Off b Alternatively on the Exceptions tab you can configure specific programs to permit communications All other
241. ither as a row or column the default is as a row which can be omitted The following are valid array item names R1C1 R3CI1 col first last c RSC2 R5C5 r1c1 r3c1 column 7 Enter the number of elements in the array in the Array Size field This must match with the specified range in the Item Name field In the CX Supervisor Runtime environment the above DDE Client array transactions are initiated by means of script in the same way as single DDE Client points The CX Supervisor script below gives examples of the facilities available with DDE Client array points 1 Example CX Supervisor Script demonstrating client array points Release 1 3 chan DDEInitiate Excel Bookl xls IF chan gt O THEN Establish data transfers between point DDEArray and Excel the initial values of DDEArray is sent to Excel DDEOpenLinks chan The array is initialised with the value 5 and sent to Excel in one operation InitArray DDEArray 5 The contents of MemoryArray are copied into DDEArray and the array are sent to Excel in one operation MemoryArray 0 100 MemoryArray 1 34 MemoryArray 2 89 6 CopyArray MemoryArray DDEArray Sets element 2 of the array to 6 and sends the whole array to Excel Note Use On Reguest option and OutputPoint to send the array after setting several elements of a large array DDEArray 2
242. itish Desorption Makes weak wash British style coffee El Pea lize egy Lode Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Hame Linked to Point Quantity E pression Editable Add Ingredient Miggitin gredient Melee lnarediento Once all the information has been provided for the new recipe selecting the OK pushbutton adds the new recipe definition to the project whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this add operation Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Add Recipe dialog Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctri gt V to paste the text Since the cut and copy operations store the information in the Windows Clipboard they may be pasted to another dialog or application Release 1 3 Page 159 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Recipe Configuration Attributes The name of the recipe is entered in the Recipe Name field The recipe name can be constructed using any alphanumeric characters This field 1s visible from the Recipe Editor dialog A recipe description may be inserted in the Description field To start a new line press lt Ctrl gt lt Return gt Any characters are valid and up to 255 characters may be entered in the text field This field is also visible from the Recipe Editor dialog Recipe Ingredients The recipe ingr
243. ity of On Condition scripts ON CONDITION scripts will be executed whenever any of the points mentioned in the expression change value or are re evaluated as a result of being input AND the result of the expression is TRUE For example if the expression was Second then the script would be executed 59 times a minute The expression would be evaluated every second when the value changes but when Second was 0 the result of the expression would be FALSE Release 1 3 Page 277 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q What is the scan time of On Condition scripts There is no scan rate directly associated with the script processing itself In fact the execution is instant as soon as the value has changed The script expression will be checked whenever any of the points are updated a value is input or the value is changed in some way CX Supervisor is an event driven object oriented system meaning is that it is actually the points changing that force the script code to re evaluate the expression They do this whenever a point changes value or 1s re evaluated e g a value is received from the PLC at the point s usual scan rate This removes any sampling error associated with polling and also makes CX Supervisor very efficient Q How do display Real Numbers and Decimal Places In graphics editor select text tool from palette and type text e g Temperature 44 AHH C The after the decimal point indicate the
244. ive DOS prompt is recommended Dongles Page 284 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions All CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS Dongles are compatible with all CX Supervisor and SYSMAC SCS versions Q What is the maximum limit of number of PLCs or Devices There is no theoretical limit to the number of devices CX Supervisor can support However your design should be limited to only the necessary devices and to ensure that all necessary communications can occur at required rates Q What is the maximum limit of size of array points Each array point may contain up to 1024 elements Q What is the maximum limit of number of pages There is no theoretical limit to the number of pages in a project but 1 000 should be considered the limit for normal PC configurations In practice 1f you ever reach even half this limit you should consider if the application needs to be split in to two or more specialised applications e g one just for the HMI one for batch control and one for offline data analysis or report generation Q What is the maximum limit of number of objects on a page There is no theoretical limit to the number of objects on a page but 1 000 should be considered the limit for normal PC configurations Since each object consumes resources Operating Systems like Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP will support larger applications than Win98 or ME Q What is the maximum limit of number of scripts on a page
245. ject Actions is the current selection for the Actions field an object becomes active in the Object left most field An object within the current page can be selected from the Object field The Runtime Actions list is dependant on the object selected from this box The Object field is disabled for Page or Project actions Page 124 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Individual listed Runtime Actions are sorted based on a designated field type either Runtime Actions or Trigger Event Expression By clicking on the Runtime Actions pushbutton the points are sorted alphanumerically by Runtime Actions The Trigger Event Expression pushbutton once selected reacts in the same way The Animation Editor dialog shows the actions associated with Polygon 1 sorted in runtime action order The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File menu This is especially useful when printing The widths of the animation fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries frigga E A new action can be added to the list of current actions by clicking the Add Action button in the toolbar An existing action can be removed from the current actions by clicking the Delete Action button in the toolbar whereupon a confirmation dialog is displayed Click the OK pushbutton to delete the action or click the Cancel pushbutton to abort the delete operation An existing a
246. l Security Settings Required Level hor Exit The dialog allows a specific privilege to be applied to exiting the runtime application Select a user privilege from the drop down list and click the OK pushbutton to confirm the setting or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Compiling and Running a Project When a project is running it cannot be edited CX Supervisor runs projects under the CX Supervisor runtime environment Torun the current project click on the Run button on the toolbar The CX Supervisor runtime environment starts and automatically runs the project in a separate dialog which is given the name of the project It allows examination of project alarm details and the run history Release 1 3 Page 97 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Save Runtime As Once the project has been compiled and run the compiled version of the project may be saved into another directory location or onto another disc for issue to the target equipment CX Supervisor asks for a location and name for the runtime project This is a standard Windows dialog and operation depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation for full details The default file type is SR2 Create Runtime Install Disk Page 98 A CX Supervisor application can be packaged safely for authorised distribution by creating a runtime install disk The process copies all required files plus files to install to the specific directory to be use
247. l Components This chapter details connecting CX Supervisor to Omron s Industrial Components like Temperature Controllers Digital Panel Meters and Timer Counters Any process value or parameter from these devices can be monitored or written See the device documentation for available parameters and their description This is achieved in CX Supervisor by creating a point and linking it to the required parameter Device ranges supported are following models that support communication where indicated a wildcard K3GN ES N ES ESZE ES K H8GN K3N ESZN Adding a point linked to a parameter 1 2 3 Start Release 1 3 Gi H 3 4 l 2 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your project Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button In the Point Editor dialog click the Add Point button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog In the Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed In the I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog In the Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Page 243 CHAPTER 16 Connecting to Omron
248. lation on the Select Components dialog select CX Supervisor package and click Change Scroll to the bottom of the list of sub components and deselect Language Files This will prevent language files including those using extended European characters being installed Q How do I address extended memory banks in PLCs In the point editor where you configure the PLC address enter a hyphen and the bank number for example E32000 3 Or depending on PLC type EM32000 3 This will address memory location 32000 in bank 3 Q Why is the dongle present but runtime communications disabled It is possible for a dongle to be connected but not detected by CX Supervisor runtime This can be caused by the BIOS setting for the LPT port On boot up enter the BIOS setup consult your hardware manual for details usually by pressing Del or F1 key Depending on the hardware and BIOS there may be some settings for the Parallel Printer or LPT port These settings will vary but settings like Bi directional ECP or EPP should be avoided Try settings like Page 280 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Standard Legacy Default or similar Note Problems have been seen with IBM ThinkPads running Windows 2000 with CX Supervisor 1 1 or earlier In these situations use the updated driver installation as shipped with CX Supervisor 1 2 and later Q Why can t see all my installed controls in the Insert Object
249. layed using the Display Value Text dialog To access the Display Value Text dialog to add an action select Display Text Point from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Value Text dialog to modify an action select Display Text Point from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On selection of the Display Text Point action the Display Value Text dialog is displayed Text Point OK SweekD ay ame Cancel Displayed Text Browse Today is An expression based on a text point must be entered This expression is typed into the Text Point field A text string to be displayed can be entered in the Displayed Text field this field can be updated using the Graphics Editor The position of the displayed text within the text field is specified by entering a character into the Displayed Text field dela Note To include a character as part of the text insert it as an escape character For example to display Box 1 type Box Only hashes typed to the left of the required for value display need escape characters since the first hash without an escape character is taken to be the point at which the value should be displayed Release 1 3 Page 149 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON To abort the Display Text Value edit click th
250. ld if the value should only be set while the button is pressed 1 e the mouse button is held down when the toggle button is clicked The value has its state toggled and then set back when the mouse button is released The different styles of toggle button are the same as those for pushbuttons Examples of some of the different styles of toggle button are illustrated below pa E Switch Blank Toggle Coloured In Out Rotary On Off The colour of the coloured pushbutton is red by default but can be changed by using the Palette Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new toggle button attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the button unchanged Release 1 3 OMRON Trend Graph Trend graphs allow the display of data over time Click the Trend Graph button then click or click and drag on the page to insert the graph CHAPTER 4 Objects To edit the Trend Graph double click on it The Trend Graph Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Trend Graph Wizard Configuration Attributes 5 Seconds y 10 Minutes x 5 Samples Background Colour i Slider Trend Graph Title Sample Rate Visible Time Span Total Time Span Time Label Every W Display Time Labels W Value Bar Traces 1 to 5 Traces 6 to 10 Trace Expressions and Colour Cancel Scaling Title Font Scale Fort Time Font e Browse C U Browse Aa Browse EE ose D Browse The Wizard all
251. lds can be amended by clicking on the settings Exit the Axis Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave them unchanged Pictures Pictures and graphics can be inserted on a page in the form of bitmaps bmp or Windows metafiles wmf Click the Picture button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a picture placeholder To insert a picture double click on the placeholder The Picture Wizard dialog is displayed as follows Picture Wizard File Hame Directories bmp wmf coh MOMron CcH SUpervisor Cancel gt e gt PROGRAM FILES gt OMRON e Ce Supervisor a List Files of Type Drives Picture Files bmp yr E c Network Display picture at original size Page 52 Release 1 3 OMRON PS Pee Note A bitmap or Windows metafile image can be selected and resized just like a graphical object Linear Gauge jy A Gauge provides a display of operational values CHAPTER 4 Objects 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired picture is stored using the Directories and Drives controls 2 Select the file type and then the picture from the list presented 3 Use the Display picture at original size setting to specify whether the picture 1s to be displayed at original size or scaled 4 Click the OK pushbutton to load the page click or click and drag on the page to
252. le and print sharing for Microsoft Networks or File and print sharing for Netware Networks as appropriate Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked View the Default Security tab and check the Enable remote connection check box From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Access list by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the Applications tab configure the properties for OPC Server and OPC ServerList Class On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Third party servers and clients running on Windows 98 or ME may require the Microsoft Remote Registry network service to be installed with the operating system and correctly configured on both the server and client machine To check start the Control Panel and view the Ne
253. lly errors in the design of the script To troubleshoot further e Confirm path of execution using MsgBox Message in all conditional branches Release 1 3 Page 295 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON e Display values using MsgBox Message command PLC Maintenance dialog The PLC Maintenance dialog is launched by right clicking and selecting PLC Maintenance After choosing the PLC you can e Open and close the PLC e See if there are errors e Change the PLC Mode e See the effect of optimisations as points are Disabled Database errors The database connectivity can sometimes be problematic to configure correctly To troubleshoot CX Supervisor database functionality e Try viewing and writing the data from another data source for example Microsoft Access application for mdb files etc e Connect to the database from the Developer to check Table and Field names can be correctly read Remember to disconnect before running if the provider doesn t support multiuser connections like the Excel provider e Note that every database function returns an error code to confirm if the operation was successful Always assign this to a temporary point and after the call to check the value e When database errors occur try calling DBGetLastError This will give a textual description of the problem As these errors are standard there is often information about the cause of these errors available on the
254. log refer to the Microsoft Windows User Guide Amending a Project To amend an existing project it must first be opened assuming it is not already open To open a project select Open from the Project menu CX Supervisor displays the Open dialog This is a standard Windows dialog and usage depends on your operating system Please consult your Microsoft documentation dy 2 Dies 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired project is stored 2 Select the desired project from the list presented 3 Click the Open pushbutton to load the project Once the project is loaded the various editing tasks required may be carried out such as editing page or graphics formats as described in the other chapters of this manual Saving a Project Once a project has been created it is wise to save it It is good practice to ensure that projects are saved regularly in case of an event such as a power failure To save a project select Save from the Project menu If this is the first time the project has been saved the Save As dialog 1s displayed Ye E 1 Move to the location where the project is to be stored Page 76 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects 2 Ensure that the Save as Type field is set to CX Supervisor Projects SCS 3 Enter a name for the project The name under which the project was created is offered as a default 4 Click the Save pushbutton to save the project Note Subsequent saves do not cause the Save P
255. log select Screen Size from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Screen Size Screen Width Cancel Screen Attributes Screen Height f 0 24 Rescale run time to screen size Type valid values into the Screen Width and Screen Height fields These values are used to define the screen size of the runtime application but do not affect Maximise and Minimise dialog states By enabling the Rescale run time to screen size option the screen rescales itself to take into account the resolution of the runtime system Click the OK pushbutton to accept the setting or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Alarm Settings To open the Alarm Settings dialog select Alarm Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Alarm Settings On Slam Automatically Display Alarm Status Viewer Alarm Histor Log Cancel Alarm Sound Masinum entres in Status Viewer 20 Masimum entres in History Log 00 Log system start stop messages Alarm Status Messages C Use Language File Text Raised Text alarm Cleared Text fered sis Acknowledged Text Jacknowledged Auto Acknowledged Text Automatically Acknowledged Release 1 3 Page 87 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON In the On Alarm Automatically Display area set the Alarm Status Viewer and Alarm History Viewer settings as required When these options are set the Current Alarms viewer or Alarm His
256. lowing one query to be used to produce different results Each pre defined parameter must have a Parameter Association defined Because these queries are stored in a compiled and tested form they are more efficient and therefore preferential to running a SQL Query A Database SQL Query or SQL Query for short is interpreted dynamically at runtime The SQL Text can be modified at runtime enabling different Queries to be run for varying situations however the SQL Text has to be compiled on the fly every time it is executed and consequently is less efficient than a Server Query Release 1 3 OMRON DBCS DCOM DDE Development Environment DLL Download Executable Expressions Field association Release 1 3 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual DBCS stands for Double Byte Character Set and is a Microsoft extension of ASCII which uses 2 bytes 16 bits to define character codes With this larger range it can include accented characters extended ASCII characters Nordic characters and symbols DCOM is a distributed version of COM that allows components on different PCs to interact over a network Dynamic Data Exchange A channel through which correctly prepared programs can actively exchange data and controls other applications within Microsoft Windows CX Supervisor through the use of its script language allows extensive use of DDE functionality See also Item Server server application and Topic SCADA
257. lready open but displayed as an icon double click on the Library icon An example of the Graphics Library Editor 1s illustrated as follows but note that actual library names and contents may differ from that shown in the following chapters Graphics Library Create Library Each Library has a unique name which 1s entered when the Library is created ei To create a library click on the Add Library button on the Graphics Library Editor toolbar The Add New Library dialog is displayed as illustrated below Release 1 3 Page 105 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON Add New Library Library Mame Pumps_1 7 Cancel Enter the name of the new Library file and click the OK pushbutton or cancel the addition of the Library by clicking on the Cancel pushbutton If an object is dragged into the Library without a Library file open then the Add New Library dialog is displayed Refer to chapter 7 Manipulating Objects for details on dragging objects into the Library Opening a Library The Graphics Library Editor consists of a number of Libraries which are selected from the drop down list box in the toolbar of the dialog Click on the Library name to display its contents in the dialog The dialog shows the objects in the selected Library The content of each library is provided for reference in chapter 7 Manipulating Objects Modify Library w The only element of the Library definition which is editable is the Library name To
258. lt graphic library Graphics Library Library Page 108 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library The gauge object can be stretched to suit the needs of the page and other objects can be applied on top of or in addition to the gauge A library object can also be ungrouped by selecting Ungroup from the Edit menu ab Es El The Cut Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar can be used as an alternative to dragging Default Graphic Library Objects CX Supervisor contains default ready to use libraries They cannot be added to this is denoted by the READ ONLY statement at the bottom of the Graphics Library Editor although they can be applied to a page and tailored in the usual way Sharing Graphic Libraries Graphic Libraries including the default Graphic Libraries can be shared by other users at other PCs running CX Supervisor Each library has its own MAT file e g PANELS MAT for the panels library The MAT files reside in the same directory as the CX Supervisor application Using file utilities on the PC it is possible to copy one or more MAT files onto a diskette or a network and transfer them to a CX Supervisor directory on another PC Consult the Microsoft Windows User Guide for details on copying files Printing the Graphics Library Print Setup The Graphics Library can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printe
259. m On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not it may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Configuring a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 Ty Ly Sasi l Start Release 1 3 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the Start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Page 261 APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection OMRON 3 From the Default Properties tab configure the Default Authentication Level to Connect and the Default Impersonation Level to Identify Setup the access permissions by either a On the Default Security tab adding the user to the Access Launch and Configuration lists by clicking the Edit Default button in each case The user added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not 1t may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well b From the Applications tab configure the properties for required applications e g SCS OpenDataServer and OpcEnum On the Security tab add the required users to each of the Custom Permissions The users added should have Administrator rights on the local PC If not 1t may be necessary to add user groups INTERACTIVE and NETWORK as well Page 26
260. m 5 into Your document Creating an Object From New To create an object from new proceed as follows 1 2 3 1 Scroll through the list of object types presented in the list box until the desired type is highlighted Page 314 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features 2 Click the OK pushbutton to insert the object into the current page and display it as it would look from within the application in which the object was created DisplayAsicon To display the object as an icon click on the Display As Icon setting The icon displayed is the first one which is stored in the icon resource table for the application which created the object in the case of the example shown a Paintbrush icon If another icon is required clicking the Change Icon pushbutton displays the following dialog Change Icon Label Paintbrush Picture 1 2 3 1 Select either the current or default icon by clicking either the Current or Default setting and click the OK pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog Should a different label be required to display beneath the inserted icon delete the contents of the Label field and type in a new label the default label offered is the filename of the file containing the inserted object 2 Type the full path of the target application or DLL ending with the application or DLL name into the From File field To locate an existing file name or a different path click the Browse pushbu
261. m Database To open the Alarm Editor dialog click the Alarm Editor button on the toolbar An example of the Alarm Editor dialog is as follows Alarm Editor Iof x kal Groups gt e a E Ea COTOS EUA ETE ETA TT pa FlourLow Deadband FlourT ank lt 60 Medium Flour getting too low ho OvenTempHigh Simple OvenTemp gt 200 Medium hol OvernTenplow Simple OvenTemp lt 100 Medium F Wi aberLow Deadband Water lt 40 Medium Alarms may be segregated into groups To select a group pick an entry from the Group field All alarm definitions can be displayed by selecting lt A Groups gt from this list Individual listed alarms are sorted based on a designated field type name type or description By selecting the Name field the alarms are sorted alphanumerically by name The Type and Description fields once selected react in the same way The Alarm Editor dialog shows the alarms in name z el The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the mouse to drag the column boundaries 09 561 The typeface of the editor can be amended by selecting Preferences from the File 09 561 Menu This is especially useful when printing The Change General Alarm Settings button on the toolbar displays the Alarm Settings dialog which allows global alarm settings to be modified Refer to chapter 8 Alarm Header Information amp Select the Large Icons button to view details with large icons Select th
262. m Points Only relevant points are listed in the Point Names field Select the desired point from the Point Names list and click the OK pushbutton Clicking the Cancel pushbutton aborts the selection To add a new point click the Add Point pushbutton for details on adding a point refer to chapter 3 Points Use the Simple Expression Entry dialog to assign an expression to an action It is accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Simple Expression Entry dialog being displayed Expression OK eee Cancel Lok MEM Beca Browse Enter the expression in the Expression field The Browse pushbutton can be used to pick a valid point Click the OK pushbutton to proceed or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Use the Select Required Object dialog to assign an object to an action It is accessed from an entry in the script code This results in the Select Required Object dialog being displayed Release 1 3 Page 131 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Select Required Object E4 Object Hames Cancel Select an object from the Object Names field Click the OK pushbutton to proceed or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Note The short cut keyboard combinations for Cut Copy and Paste operations are valid within the Script Editor Highlight part or all of a field and type lt Ctrl gt X to cut the text or lt Ctrl gt C to copy the text insert the cursor at the desired field and type lt Ctrl gt V to p
263. machines One or more Client applications collect the data from the distributed servers This can be useful to help performance by distributing the communication on the device connections and server processing It can also provide different security for different clients and offers limited protect against failures as remaining servers still function Client Applications Display only PC Hetwork Ethernet Device Connections Server Applications Hit Devices Page 238 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application Redundant Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection to the same Devices or Device network The same data is collected by all Servers One or more clients can collect the data from any single Server and in the event of a Server failure can be written to switch to data from an alternative Server Client 1 Client 2 Client Applications Client 3 Display only PC Hetwork Ethernet Device Hetwork r y A 2 server Applications Backup HI lt Devices A distributed solution may be any of the above or a combination of the ideas Once your topography is defined the steps to connect each Client or Server are the same Creating a CX Supervisor Server application A Server application must collect device data and allow clients to access it It may also have other elements like graphics c
264. matically picked up from the points database For expressions the required type must be selected The Deadband field enables a percentage limit or Deadband to be applied to the logging expression This allows the value of the expression to change within the percentage limit without being logged This is particularly useful when logging analogue values which are subject to noise Each sample is checked when the value changes for On Change sampling or every log period for On Interval against the last logged value While the value varies within the deadband the values are ignored Immediately the value exceeds the deadband limits the new value will be logged This may dramatically reduce file size and ease analysis Entering a value of 0 i e no deadband will cause every sample to be logged Page 174 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Sample Rate The sample rate options are used to determine how data will be recorded select either on change or on interval The default is interval When the On Change option is selected data will be logged only when the value actually changes This ensures all transient information is logged even if changes occur faster than maximum sample rate and also ensures periods of inactivity do not generate duplicated data The On Interval sample rate option enables the data values to be logged at regular intervals Enter the interval as a number and from the pick list select the fo
265. ment Cancel OMRON The possible settings for the Baud Rate Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits fields depend upon the port selected Where necessary increase the Timeout Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects A new name can be entered in the PLC Name field If an invalid PLC name is entered an error message is displayed on clicking the OK pushbutton Removing a PLC Connection From the Setup Devices dialog a PLC name may be removed from the PLC Name field by selecting the PLC name from the Device List on the Setup Devices dialog and clicking the Delete pushbutton This results in a confirmation dialog being displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the PLC from the list or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note A PLC cannot be renamed deleted or edited if it is currently open for communications Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime It is possible to reconfigure PLCs at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option PLC Maintenance List The list of currently configured PLCs is displayed via the PLCs in Project dialog box On selection of a PLC the PLC Information dialog is displayed which allows the user to change the PLC configuration dynamically during runtime The Open PLC option provides the capability to toggle the communications status of the PLC The PLC Mode options switch the current mode of operation of the PLC between Stop Debug Monitor and Run Stop mode halts the PLC p
266. more appropriate to link to an object rather than embedding it in the current page By linking to an object rather than embedding it CX Supervisor always has access to the most up to date copy of the object every time the page containing it 1s opened Placing a check mark in the Link field forges a link between the page and the file containing the object All other activities are carried out in an identical manner to those explained previously The following illustrates a Microsoft Excel Chart object which has been inserted in a page Release 1 3 Page 317 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON Jc eS TAEL FIGMENT S R z p SES ASA Mt SA fa ia Chart2 4 F Funning e program 12 45 461 409 A Activating an Object To activate an embedded or linked object merely double click using the left mouse button on the object s graphical representation on the page either a true representation of the object or an icon If the object is a document or image Windows activates the application that created the object and places it ready to be edited In the following example the bitmap image when activated launches the Format Chart Area application to allow editing Page 318 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features cc 2rules aer Be SelB SERIES Sheett C 2 Sheet1 83 58 6 Sheet1 C0 3 50 56 1 Format Data Series lx Ienncnnccnconsanananennno Border Area Aut
267. n Change Items All on change items will have their own filename generated regardless of any multiple selections made because 1t is not possible to determine any common time interval with these type of Items If a multiple selection of On Interval and On Change Items is made then the above conventions still apply Generation of Text Files Whereas CSV files only contain limited information e g Breaks Date Time Milliseconds and Value Text files contains all the information stored on selected Items Groups 1 e the expression label deadband etc The multiple selection rules apply as described in the previous paragraph with the exception that On Change items can be grouped together Data Logging Overview As well as the inbuilt datalogging features it is also possible to log data directly to an existing Database This provides direct storage of data in third party format allowing for easy analysis using familiar tools and there is no need for scripts to export data However slower speed means logging to a database may be unsuitable for tasks with large data throughput or high logging speed Also unlike the standard Datalog files there is no standalone viewer for instant viewing The ADO interface used to access Data Sources does not provide any mechanism for creating Databases or Tables therefore it is not possible to automatically create a data source Unpopulated data sources for use in Database Logging must first be cr
268. n from the toolbar to align objects to the grid When performing alignment operations the Master Object determines how the other objects are aligned The Master Object 1 e the last object clicked on has green sizing handles To align objects Te 1 Select the objects to be aligned 2 Ensure the correct master object is selected 3 Choose the appropriate tool from the Alignment toolbar The alignment operations available at any one time vary according to the number of objects selected Zoom It is often useful to be able to view an object in more detail The Zoom option allows selected objects to be magnified up to four times their normal size To enlarge an area of the screen choose the View menu and select Zoom Then select the required magnification factor Off 2xor 4 A specific object can be zoomed in on by selecting that object and then performing the procedures described above Release 1 3 Page 67 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Applying Tooltips In the runtime environment it is possible to provide instant help for the object currently selected by the cursor This is achieved by tooltips that can be applied to all objects TD Dio 1 Inthe development environment select the object to apply a tooltip 2 Click on Tooltip Text from the Edit menu The Tooltip Text is displayed Tooltip Text Tooltip Text Select the Burner pushbutton to go Cancel 3 Type the help text in the Tooltip text field or sel
269. n provide When timing a process or event always use the PLC The stored result can then be read by the SCADA at its leisure If creating a pulse of fixed duration never attempt to design the SCADA to set a bit wait and clear the bit Instead allow the SCADA to set the bit but use the PLC program to clear the bit after the required time e Operation should continue if the SCADA is unplugged In a well designed system normal operation can continue even if the SCADA is unplugged Some functions like data logging batch control and control obviously will not be available but the system should be able to continue with its task until completion That is the process should not rely on co operation between the SCADA and PLC because of the possibility of failure e g of the power supply PC components or operating system e Ensure the PLC has hardware failsafes In situations where the system can cause damage e g to itself the materials or people it is essential to ensure the PLC has suitable safeguards and failsafes to prevent such damage Given the possibility of SCADA failure it is not acceptable to implement such failsafes in software Care should also be paid to the design of software control to allow and cope with the possible refusal of operation from the PLC Performance This section covers some good practices to ensure excellent performance e Organise the PLC memory properly This is probably the single most important practice to pr
270. n the Add Modify Database Connection dialog Page 192 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Connection String Provider MicroasottJet OLEDB 4 0 Data Source C data source orthwind mdb Build Connection String Cancel If your data source is not supported or you have your own drivers for a particular database the Connection String can be modified using this dialog consult your database documentation for the required connection string User Id and Passwords If a connection to a database requires a user id or password this can be supplied by means of the connection string which can be modified via the Advanced Dialog as follows Connection String ProvidersMicrosott Jet OLEDE 4 0 Data Source C data sources orthwind mdb User d 4dmin Password secref Build Connection String If you make a mistake while editing the connection string the original string can be restored by selecting the Build Connection String button A new connection string will also be built automatically each time a change of Data Source is made Example Connection Strings Listed below are some example connections strings for the listed providers Jet Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 3 5 1 Data Source c dbname mdb SQL Server Provider SQLOLEDB Data Source server_name Initial Catalog dbname User Id user_id Password user_password Index Server Provider MSIDXS Data Source catalog_name DSN DSN data_source_
271. n the application is restarted the point is initialised to the last saved value These values are saved in a project file with NVP extension To prevent unexpected operation this file is automatically deleted if further point changes are made in the Developer In this case points revert to their Default value Select the Validate Point is Within Specified Range check box This option is only available for Input or I O points of type Integer or Real When checked an error message is displayed in the error log if the data passed to CX Supervisor is outside of the specified Minimum and Maximum range Click the OK pushbutton to accept the advanced settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Amending an Existing Point To modify an existing point highlight the point from the points list and click the Modify Point button from the toolbar This results in the View Point dialog being displayed as shown below a dialog based on the Add Point dialog Release 1 3 Page 33 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Modify Point Fa General Attributes OF Point Hame Cancel Group lt Default gt be Advanced Descriptions Erawse Point Type Point Attributes C Boolean Minin ale 99999999 Integer Maximum Value 399999995 C Real C Text Default Value o LO Type Memory Attributes Memory Array Size li Input Dutput C Input Output The selected point can be redefined as described in chapter 3 Creating a
272. n to leave the point unselected Clicking the Add Point button from the toolbar allows a new point to be created prior to association with the Gauge Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Gauge Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor To enter gauge values or display units type over the existing field entries The Gauge can be displayed in linear or rotary format either with or without ticks The text font used for the gauge title can be changed via the Title Font pushbutton The text font used for the gauge scale can be changed via the Scale Font pushbutton The font size used by the gauge can be automatically calculated for the user by selecting the Auto Size Fonts field Exit the Gauge Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new gauge attributes or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the gauge unchanged Pushbutton 1 3 Pushbuttons provide a simple means to start a set of actions Click the Push Button button then click or click and drag on the page to insert a pushbutton To edit the pushbutton double click on it The Push Button Wizard dialog is displayed as follows El Push Button Wizard Button Style Colour Button Cancel In Out Button Font Style Attributes The Wizard allows a pushbutton to be assigned a style or text or both to signify its purpose To select a style click
273. name FILEDSN FILEDSN filename dsn MSDASQL Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls DBQ c Database Invdb xls Release 1 3 Page 193 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Data providers installed with ADO V2 0 Jet 3 51 Microsoft Jet OLEDB 3 51 For Microsoft Access databases Directory Services ADSDSOObject For resource data stored such as Active Directory this will become more important when NT5 0 is available Index IndexServer MSIDXS For Microsoft Index Server E Drivers MSDASQL For existing ODBC Drivers this ensures that legacy data is not omitted Oracle MSDAORA Native Oracle driver simplifies access to existing Oracle data stores SQL Server SQLOLEDB For Microsoft SQL Server Data Shape MSDataShape For hierarchical recordsets this allows the creation of master detail type recordsets which allow drilling down into detailed data Persisted Records Records MSPersist For locally saved recordsets E Provider MSDAOSP For creating your own providers for simple text data The above is just the list of standard providers supplied by Microsoft Other vendors are actively creating their own Creating a Data Source Name file A Data Source Name file or DSN for short stores information about a database connection in a file The file has the extension DSN and by default is stored in the Program Files Common Files ODBC Data Sources directory This type of file can be viewed with a suitable text editor e g Notepad O
274. ne advantage of using a DSN file over specifying the full path of the database is that the DSN file remains unchanged while its contents can be re configured to reflect any changes in directory or database file name etc Creating a New DSN For Windows 98 ME and NT From your Windows Control Panel select the ODBC Data Sources icon This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box For Windows 2000 and XP From the Programs folder select Administrative tools and Data Sources ODBC icon note this is only available if the logged in user has administrative rights and the Taskbar properties Display Administrative Tools option is checked This will show the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box Click on the File DSN tab Any Data Source Names already defined will be listed Page 194 Release 1 3 OMRON ss e 4 CHAPTER 12 Databases Click on Add to create a new Data Source Name file This will invoke the Create New Data Source dialog box with a list of available drivers only drivers that are installed on your machine will be shown Choose the driver to access the data source and select Next gt Y ou will then be prompted to name your Data Source Type a suitable name and select Next gt Verify the information shown and select Finish to complete this part of the operation Depending on the driver selected you may be prompted for details of the database you wish
275. ne gt 555 1217 lt Phone gt lt Type gt Business Fax lt Type gt lt Entry gt lt EmployeeList gt You can use an application with a built in XML parser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 to view XML documents in the browser just as you would view HTML pages Datashaping The ADO SHAPE command can be used to produce hierarchical recordsets 1 e where a value within the current record is used to access another Recordset For example a record showing Customer Details might contain a field for Customer ID Every time the record position is changed a child Recordset showing Orders for that Customer ID could be recreated Hierarchical recordsets present an alternative to using JOIN syntax when accessing parent child data Hierarchical recordsets differ from a JOIN in that with a JOIN both the parent table fields and child table fields are represented in the same recordset With a hierarchical recordset the recordset contains only fields from the parent table In addition the recordset contains an extra field that represents the related child data which you can assign to a second recordset variable and traverse Hierarchical recordsets are made available via the MSDataShape provider which is implemented by the client cursor engine A new clause SHAPE is provided to relate SELECT statements in a hierarchical fashion The syntax 1s summarized below Page 208 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases SHAPE parent command AS n
276. ng alarm conditions The Current Alarm dialog always shows the alarm messages listed in order with the highest priority at the top m fy The widths of the alarm fields can be widened or narrowed as required using the EA mouse to drag the column boundaries Time 09 56 15 09 56 11 The Acknowledge Selected Alarm toolbar button acknowledges the alarm which is currently highlighted in the alarm status dialog This has no effect if the alarm has already been acknowledged el The Acknowledge All Outstanding Alarms toolbar button unconditionally acknowledges all outstanding alarms Any unacknowledged alarms become acknowledged This has no effect on alarms that are already acknowledged The Print Contents of Alarm Status View toolbar button causes the messages in the alarm status dialog to be printed Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly Alarm History The occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state is recorded in the alarm history log Alarm messages recorded in the log can be displayed using the Alarm History dialog The Alarm History dialog can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog via the context sensitive floating menu whilst others may allow access via a pushbutton Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Alarm History dialog is as follows
277. ng the Cancel pushbutton aborts the change Note The new target value is applied only to this recipe download No permanent change is made to the recipe definition itself Release 1 3 Page 167 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON The Save Recipe As pushbutton displays a simple dialog prompting for a name to use for the new recipe Save Recipe As ES Recipe Name Cancel Clicking the OK pushbutton creates a new recipe with the name specified Choosing the Cancel pushbutton aborts the save operation A recipe created using this dialog is added to the available list of entries displayed in the recipe dialog The newly saved recipe is also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor Note that it is possible to change the name of an existing recipe in runtime simply by typing a new name in the Recipe Name field of the Modify Recipe dialog and then clicking the OK pushbutton The re named recipe appears in the available list of entries displayed in the Recipes dialog and 1s also available in the development environment using the Recipe Editor wl To download an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Download Recipe button from the toolbar See chapter 10 Downloading a Recipe for more information to To upload an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Upload Recipe button from the toolbar See chapter 10 Uploading a Recipe for more information
278. ns Driver Release 1 3 ADO stands for Active Data Objects and is data access technology which uses OLE DB to access data sources in a uniform way e g MS Access databases MS Excel spreadsheets and Comma Separated Variable files A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points AND returns TRUE if all arguments are TRUE An example of AND is that if a is a statement and b is a statement AND returns TRUE if both a and b are TRUE If one or both statements return FALSE then AND returns FALSE A software program that accomplishes a specific task Examples of applications are CX Supervisor CX Server and Microsoft Excel CX Supervisor and its development environment allows the creation and testing of new applications through a Graphical User Interface GUI Words phrases or numbers that can be entered on the same line as a command or statement to expand or modify the command or statement within the CX Supervisor script language The command acts on the argument In essence the command is a verb and the argument is the object of the verb An example of an argument in CX Supervisor is DDETerminate channel where DDETerminate is a command within the script language and channel is the argument upon which the command will act An old standard defining a set of characters Officially using only 7 bits allows definitions for only 127 characters and does not include any accented characters The
279. nsertion into documents It can be used to either create a link to a file held on disk or to embed an object into a page Once embedded or linked the object can be moved and positioned in a similar way to any other object created within CX Supervisor To use the Object Packager select Package from the list of objects displayed in the Insert Object dialog shown later in this chapter An example of a typical Object Packager window is as follows Release 1 3 Page 313 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON a Object Packager Package in Untitled pag File Edit Help Insert Icon Content Yiew 6 Description Picture Copy of Book1 xls For the remainder of this chapter only the direct insertion of objects using the CX Supervisor built in functions are detailed For further details of using the Object Packager refer to the Windows User Guide or the Object Packager On line Help Whether using the Windows Object Packager or embedding or linking objects directly proceed as follows 1 2 Saws 1 Click on the page in which the object is to be inserted Le 2 Click the Insert OLE Object button The Insert Object dialog is displayed Insert Object El x obs pe AchonB yr Class AchorByr Class Adobe Acrobat Document ALink AudioE splosion Control idad T Disa As con ColorByr Class Create New Create from File Create Control Result Inserte a new Adobe Acrobat Document object
280. nt and run time environment are run from icons Each recipe consists of at least one ingredient Each ingredient must be related to an existing point A type of point where the value of the point can only be a whole positive or negative number Within the CX Supervisor script language Item is a generic term for a point OPC item or Temperature Controller item A Java style scripting language supported by Microsoft s Windows Scripting Host Java Virtual Machine A spreadsheet application A windowing environment that is noted for its GUI and for features such as multiple typefaces desk accessories such as a clock calculator calendar and notepad and the capability of moving text and graphics from one application to another via a clipboard CX Supervisor will run only under Microsoft Windows DDE functions communicating with other applications supported by CX Supervisor use Microsoft Windows as a basis A word processing application To incorporate one or more IF THEN ELSE ELSEIF ENDIF statements inside a structure of the same kind 1 Part of the PLC configuration based on the device type The number of Networks available is dependant on the device type Release 1 3 OMRON Non Volatile NOT Object OLE DB Operand Operator OR Pages Parameter Association Pixel Release 1 3 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual 2 A number of computers linked together with a central processing
281. ntain any number or type of Items data points provided they have the same update rate Note This dialog cannot be opened until a valid project file exists in which to create the groups Groups Use the Add Edit and Delete buttons to show the Group Attributes dialog and update the list of groups For identification purposes groups should be given logical names The defaults are Group1 Group etc i GROUP ATTRIBUTES Group Attributes Group Attributes Mame Group Update Rate i 0 Seconds IY Active On Startup Name This is the name of the selected group If you are editing an existing group name or creating a new one the current or default Page 233 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON Page 234 name is overwritten The default name for new groups are Groupl Group etc Update Rate This is the rate at which the Items data points in the group will be interrogated and new data entered if it is a readout or read from if it s a control Enter the rate as a numerical value and select the units from the drop down list The minimum value is 100msec the maximum is 99999Sec 1 e over 27 hours Active On Startup Checking this option will make the Group active when the OPC server is started This means the items contained within will be able to read and write data The default is checked c Items Tab The Items within the selected group are listed Items are data points of informat
282. ntal Percentage Fill 128 Invisible 128 146 47 Modify animation 129 55 130 Move Horizontal 135 Move Horizontal 128 Move Vertical 128 136 37 Object selection dialog 132 Percentage Fill Horizontal 128 Percentage Fill Vertical 128 140 Resize Height 128 138 39 Resize Width 128 137 38 Rotate 128 Runtime 129 Script Execute 128 See also Script Editor Show Page 128 141 Text Display Value 128 149 50 Text Edit Point Value 128 153 54 Text User Input 128 153 54 Vertical Move 128 136 37 Vertical Percentage Fill 128 140 View 124 Visible 128 146 47 Width Resize 128 137 38 Animations Aliases 99 132 Object animations 129 Page animations 126 27 Points 123 Project animations 125 26 Runtime 129 Script See Script Editor Appendix A Configuring a PC for remote connection 259 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 263 Appendix C Troubleshooting 291 Appendix D CX Server Error Codes 299 Appendix E Obsolete Features 303 Application 321 Application Design 249 Applying Tooltips Manipulating objects 68 Arc Creating Editing Graphic Objects 46 Bar Chart Control Objects 50 Page 330 OMRON Best Practices 249 Bitmap 321 Opening an existing bitmap 52 Pixel 325 Bitmap Control Objects 52 Block Creating Editing Graphic Objects 46 Boolean Point 59 C Changing the View Mode Project Editor 103
283. ntered in the Source ComboBox Field associations can be added to Child recordsets in the normal manner Child recordsets can be accessed via Script command in a similar manner to normal recordsets bResult DBState DataShape Customers Orders Details Open Note Child recordsets are not supported in the Database function dialog Simple Relation Hierarchy example SHAPE select from customers APPEND select from orders AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid The parent recordset contains all fields from the Customers table and a field called rsOrders rsOrders provides a reference to the child recordset and contains all the fields from the Orders table The other examples use a similar notation Release 1 3 Page 209 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Compound Relation Hierarchy example This sample illustrates a three level hierarchy of customers orders and order details SHAPE SELECT from customers APPEND SHAPE select from orders APPEND select from order details AS rsDetails RELATE orderid TO orderid AS rsOrders RELATE customerid TO customerid In addition to the Simple Relation Hierarchy example the Order ID is now used to create a recordset containing the order details for the shown order Hierarchy with Aggregate example SHAPE select from orders APPEND select od orderid od UnitPrice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from order details As od RELATE orderid TO orderid As rsDet
284. nterval Average callback interval Masimum callback duration Average callback duration Active Enabled Registered with C Server Synchronized Registered Jointly Send Data Pending Ce Server PLE Ce Server Address C200H C200H 8 1 115H Point ype Number of Elements Registration Required Registered By Page Script eto Page 293 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON The most useful readings on this screen are Auto Update refreshes the data twice a second Total Active Points Number of CX Server points both input and output currently active Average Active Pts Sec Measured number of CX Server Inputs per second since application started or since Clear pressed With Input On Change optimisation this can be very small Also InputsActual System Point Calculated Peak Pts Sec Calculated number of CX Server Input points currently active multiplied by update rate Elements Same as above except multiplied by number of array elements per point Ratio between Total Active Points and Total Active Points Elements shows how well optimised or badly like above with use of arrays Read Callbacks Number of data postings from CX Server MSecs since last callback Milliseconds waited since last data Min Max Average Callback interval Calculation using above values Write Same as above but for the writing part of output and I O points Data Changes Number of inputs causing chang
285. number in the Colour Name field The selected colour within the palette can be mixed by using the red blue and green scroll bars to the right of the palette Each colour in the colour palette is numbered from 0 to 65 number 0 located in the top left position of the palette with numbers reading consecutively across then down with colour number 65 in the bottom right position of the palette Additionally colour numbers 0 to 19 are named for instance colour number 0 is named black Colours 0 to 15 inclusive are system colours and cannot be mixed Although it is possible to mix new colours using the scroll bars it is not possible to save such changes from this palette To ensure new colours are saved use General Settings from the Project menu Note Using a 16 colour based screen resolution consult the Microsoft Windows documentation for further information colours 16 to 65 are dithered from the sixteen base colours Higher colour based resolutions are not dithered Release 1 3 Page 155 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Page 156 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes CHAPTER 10 Recipes This chapter describes CX Supervisor recipes and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of recipes using the Recipe Editing facility The use of recipes during the running of a project 1s also described What is a Recipe A recipe is a means of preparing a sequence of steps which can be repeated verbatim as
286. number of array elements in the CX Supervisor point that this item should have If not an array enter 1 1 OPC COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL PROPERTIES a Server Tab The options in this window allow you to select the correct name of the computer with the OPC Server and select the appropriate server OMRON CX OPC Communications Control Properties Sever Groups Items OPE Communications Control Settings Mame OPCCommsServer3 Computer Mame EE Show All Server Mame OMRON OpenDataServer 1 JE Program Files OMARONSCX Supervisorvopctestalantest ope New Oper Cancel Aon Help OPC Communication Control Settings Name This is the name of the selected communications control The default name for the first control 1S OMRONCXOPCCommunicationsControl For each additional control added the number increments by one Computer Name This shows the system name for the computer with the OPC server If the server is on the same computer as CX Supervisor set to Local If the OPC server is on a remote computer click the Show All button and select the correct name from the list If you cannot identify the PC in the list contact your system administrator Server Name This shows the names of the OPC Version 2 compliant servers installed on the specified computer Make your selection from the drop down list Clicking the Info button opens the Server Status Information dialog for the selecte
287. o be associated with the above point If the Recordset is open this list will automatically show all available fields Field Property The type of information from the field to be transferred the following options are available Value default the assigned value of the field Name the name of the field column title Type the fields Data Type Size the maximum width of the field Add used to add new fields to a record Note The Name Type and Size properties are fixed for all entries of the column whereas the field value depends on the current position of the Recordset Note The Add property is specifically designed to enable fields to be added together to create new records They are not involved in any read operations as with the other field property types For this reason the Automatically read on open checkbox is disabled when this type is applied When creating configurations to add new records you will need to create a Add association for every field required to create a valid record 1 e primary keys non null values etc need to be catered for See DBAddNew for more details Access field by index When checked a numeric index is used to identify a particular field instead of its name This is useful if you want to configure generic field associations Automatically read on open When checked the data is transferred from the Recordset field to the associated point when the Recordset is opened Page 2
288. o the Microsoft Windows User Guide Alarm Message Printer Settings To open the Alarm Message Printer Settings dialog select Alarm Message Printer Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog is displayed as follows Page 88 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Alarm Message Printer Settings Printer Name MHOLLYSH P_LASERJET_ SSM ance Printer Type Humber ob lites Fer Paget 30 Line Terminator CER te LF C CR LF ly 2 Dues 1 Select the target printer in the Printer Name field 2 Ifthe printer type is a Page Printer ensure the Page Printer setting is set ON and the appropriate number of lines per page are specified in the Number of Lines Per Page field 3 Specify a Line Terminator setting either CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed or CR LF 4 Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Event Error Messages To open the Event Error Settings dialog select Event Error Settings from the Runtime Settings menu The dialog 1s displayed as follows Event 7 Error Settings I High Priority Errors Cancel Automatically Display Event Error Log or Medium Priority Errors T Low Priority Errors blasimum entries in Event Error Log 200 Set the Maximum entries in Event Error field and the Automatically Display Event Error Log on options as desired Click the OK pushbutton to accept the changes or the Cancel pushbutton to
289. ode CX Server has not been initialised by the application during a read write request Oxnn08 The specified address is invalid for the selected or open device This error may be generated by the Communications Manager during address validation or the device device The CDMPLCCommand function executed is not supported on the selected or open The File or filename specified is invalid or could be opened created Oxnn0B The device s operating mode is invalid for the requested operation or the device was opened in an mode not compatible with the requested operation e g attempt to execute CDMGetData when the device was open in Read Only mode The specified name is invalid it name contains invalid characters One or more of the specified parameters are invalid Release 1 3 Page 299 APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes OMRON The open PLC handle specified 1s invalid The open Project handle specified is invalid The open User handle specified is invalid The Key specified is invalid or cannot be found The device or function is locked by another user or application The name specified does not exist or cannot be found The specified PLC name does not exist The specified Project cannot be found or created Oxnn16 The operation cannot be performed as the correct access permissions have not be obtained This usually indicates another host currently has the PLC access rights The function or CDMPLCCommand is not suppo
290. odifying the point The following script shows how to send arrays of values from Microsoft Excel to CX Supervisor via DDEPoke 1 Example sending array values from Microsoft Excel to CX Supervisor Sub SendArrayValues Dim chan As Integer chan DDEInitiate SCS Point If chan lt gt 0 Then Send a row of data to an array point named Array1 DDEPoke chan Arrayl Range Cells 1 1 Cells 1 3 Send a column of data to an array point named Array2 DDEPoke chan Array2 Range Cells 2 1 Cells 4 1 Send individual array element values to Array3 The or format can be used to delimit the array index DDEPoke chan Array3 0 Cells 1 1 DDEPoke chan Array3 1 Cells 1 2 DDEPoke chan Array3 2 Cells 1 3 End If End Sub Requesting Arrays from CX Supervisor via DDERequest Requesting arrays from CX Supervisor and storing them in Microsoft Excel is a little more complicated than sending in that both CX Supervisor and Microsoft Excel need to know if the array is to be stored in rows or columns CX Supervisor is informed of the row col requirement by specifying either row or column after the array points name The default is row if nothing is specified The following are all valid examples of specifying names for Arrayl in a DDERequest Release 1 3 Page 311 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON Arrayl Arrayl
291. oject button in the toolbar The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to the OPC Server and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points 1 e to drive animations in alarm expressed in recipes for data logging etc Using with Omron s CX Server OPC E 2 3 4 5 Note that the Omron OPC server discussed is supplied as part of the CX Server OPC product Omron s OPC Server configuration is described in the CX Server OPC manual While launched the CX logo is displayed in the system tray For step 7 1 a i the correct Server Name is Omron OpenDataServer 1 For step 7 1 c i the Item ID should be the name of the point in the CX Server project CDM file configured in the server The Access Path is not used and may be left blank During step 9 the Omron OPC Server logo is displayed momentarily as the server starts Release 1 3 Page 235 OMRON CHAPTER 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application Chapter 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application This chapter explains how to connect multiple CX Supervisor applications together to form a distributed solution Point data from one application can be shared directly with other CX Supervisor applications across the PC network Depending on the requirements there are many reasons and topographies for interconnecting CX Supervisor applications Two Tier Client Server or Master Slave One application is configured as a Server application or Maste
292. old italic left justify can be used and their effect applies to the whole content of the object To edit block text double click on 1t A Text Editing dialog is displayed The text can then be changed as can the word wrap and border options Standard Windows cut copy and paste facilities can be used Ellipse gt Ellipses may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled ellipse click the Ellipse button o To create a transparent ellipse click the Ellipse Frame button Alternatively select a filled ellipse and click the Transparency Either click on the page to create a circle or click and drag to create an ellipse Ellipses cannot be edited but can be re sized Page 46 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Line To insert a line click on the Line button Click and drag on the page to draw a line of the required length To edit the line obtain the red grab handles Click and drag to change the line To finish editing click elsewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt Polygon E Polygons may be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a polygon click the Polygon button Click on the page to draw vertices To finish creating the polygon either click the right mouse button press lt Esc gt or double click the left mouse button To edit the polygon obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex or click and drag a vertex to move it To finish editing either click el
293. ollow these steps l Ze 3 Page 218 Start Windows in the normal way Open Control Panel and select Regional Options The Numbers Currency Time and Date tabs settings do not affect the language support but can be set as required Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features 4 On the General tab select ALL the languages that may be required in the Language settings for the system section Note If some extended characters in standard Windows controls like listboxes editboxes etc appear as solid boxes 1t may be necessary to change the default System Locale Click the Set Default button and select the required language Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 5 Add all the required languages in the Input Locales tab and set the preferred default These affect how the keyboard is mapped for typing letters and can be changed as CX Supervisor is running by the box in the task bar 6 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Windows NT Being the first Windows operating system that supports Unicode the language support provided by Windows NT is the worst If you are considering a Multilingual application on this operating system you should fully test a prototype first to ensure it suits your needs It is only possible to support the installed
294. om the Start button under the CX Server menu It can be used to see how much of the available bandwidth is in use You can also see how many points are waiting to be processed and the latency of actual communications To improve responsiveness try to reduce the bandwidth used the latency and the number of active messages Note that performance begins to reduce well before 100 saturation is achieved For example it is rare to achieve more than 70 80 for a serial connection This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve a maximum of 50 capacity 1 e each car has a car length space behind it Page 266 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q How does the Operating System affect performance On the same specification machine Windows NT provides the best overall performance It is understandable that newer larger Operating Systems run slower on the same specification machine This 1s not usually a problem as newer operating systems are usually delivered on newer specification machines FINS Gateway drivers for particular networks operate consistently across all operating systems OMRON recommend Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional for the following reasons Better security Better stability Better multitasking Better DCOM configuration 103 85 100 00 3 eS o o 5 5 5 Oo of Windows 95 2
295. omatic Automatic None f None C Custom EN BEEBE sve Z NEO Emi f gmi f f Colour Automatic EU OBODON E MEME Weight CRODMOMO Shadow ETT OS BB A A Fill Effects ampe 3 4 I Invert if negative Running c program sd When editing is complete select Update and Exit from the application s File menu to return to CX Supervisor Note The Update and Exit command varies from application to application If the object is an animation or sound file when activated it is played through until it ends at which point control is returned to CX Supervisor Note If the application which created the object no longer be available CX Supervisor reports an error Converting a Package Object Certain types of object may be converted from one form to another To initiate conversion te es ee 1 Select the object on the page 2 Activate the Edit menu and select Package Object displayed as the last item on the Edit menu 3 Select Convert from the sub menu displayed Note The menu item name varies from application to application but always references the inserted object Release 1 3 Page 319 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON Microsoft Excel Chart Microsoft Excel Worksheet Page 320 Release 1 3 OMRON GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual GLOSSARY OF TERMS ADO AND Application Arguments ASCII Bitmap Boolean type COM Communicatio
296. omfortable and more efficient development experience To choose between languages at the beginning of the installation select the required language Note the installation program runs in your selected language and also the Development application resources are installed in this language In the unlikely event you ever need to change your language selection simply uninstall CX Supervisor in the normal manner and then reinstall selecting the desired language Choose Setup Language E Select the language for this installation from A the choices below French Standard German Italian Spanish Of course the designer enters all application data like page names on screen text button captions etc and these all form part of the runtime application Translation of the runtime application 1s covered in the next section Note Remember the choice of development language is entirely separate to the language the end user will use and has absolutely no impact on the runtime application Runtime Language Features The developer will be required to create the runtime application to run in at least 1 language This is often English but does not have to be It could be the same language as the developer or even a completely different language for the end user All translations for all system text like dialogs and menus are installed automatically User defined text entered at development time is normally entered in the target language see R
297. ons in languages other than the default English for example Note e How a non English designer can run the development tools in their native language even if they are creating an application in another language e How non English runtime applications can be developed e How applications can be developed where the end users with different nationalities can switch between 2 languages 1 e Bilingual or more 1 e Multilingual e How applications can be developed for export where the developers can work in their native language and switch language before export and visiting maintenance engineers onsite can switch back to the development language Projects created in CX Supervisor versions 1 25 and earlier use Microsoft s Double Byte Character Sets known as DBCS or sometimes MBCS for multilingual features The formatting of character tables in MBCS is not the same as Unicode However old projects are automatically converted to Unicode when they are loaded and will then be saved in Unicode See the section Loading old projects for important information before you start Multilingual issues can be very complex but like most areas CX Supervisor provides this functionality in an easy to use way with a few simple dialogs The CX Supervisor Multilingual features can easily be divided into two clear sections Development and Runtime Users of each section have different needs and so these sections function completely separately For example
298. ontrol or logging To create your application Create Device points for every data value required by the Server application and any required by any client See Chapter 3 Points for more details Configure DCOM on the server machine to allow access from the client machines See Appendix A for further details Add any other elements required by the Server application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc Be sure to note the computer name of the server machine Note A quick way to display the computer name is to right click the Network Neighbourhood icon on the Windows Desktop and select Properties Release 1 3 Page 239 CHAPTER 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application OMRON Creating a CX Supervisor Client application The client must retrieve the data and process it To create your application Add any elements required by the Client application e g Graphics Control Logging Alarms etc Configure DCOM on the client machine to allow access from the server machines See Appendix A for further details Create points for every data value required by the Client application following these steps Tide ox 1 Start CX Supervisor Development and open your application or start a new application gE 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button 3 In the Point Editor dialog click the Add Point button in the tool
299. or dialog Then select the recipe to which the security level is applied With the recipe highlighted from the list click the Security Level field on the toolbar Select the required security level from the list The selected security level is then applied to the recipe To change the security level click the Security Level field again and choose a different security level from the list Printing Recipes Print Setup The Recipe Editor can be printed in the same way pages can Before printing ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print preview display Printing g To print the contents of the Recipe Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog It is possible to print the details of a recipe including a list of all the ingredients points and expressions which comprise the recipe To do this display the Recipe Editor dialog as described earlier and then highlight the appropriate recipe from the list of recipes Click the Print Recipe button on the toolbar to send a copy of the recipe to the printer The recipe is formatted similar to the following example Recipe Coffee British Description Makes weak washy British style coffee Access Level All User
300. ore draging the square box Repeat for each column 6 When editing is completed select the row s to required and select Copy 7 Switch back to the Point Editor and select Paste Note If the pasted point names already exist CX Supervisor will automatically add or increment a number on the end to prevent overwriting If you wish to overwrite to replace old point settings simple delete not Cut the old points from the Point Editor before pasting Note All pasted points will pasted into the group on view Runtime Point Maintenance Page 36 It is possible to reconfigure points at runtime via the right mouse button floating menu option Points Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog is displayed Point Maintenance Point Name Filter Options All Point Values T ext M Boolean M Integer T Continuous Monitoring Real Get Value Set Value V Text Diagnostics Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points To monitor and change the value of a point in runtime select a point from the Point Name field The Filter Options field and settings refines the points listed in the Point Name field Select the Get Value pushbutton to retrieve the current value of the selected point Specify a new point value in the Point Value Text field and click the Set Value pushbutton The Diagnostics button shows details including communications statistics useful for diagnosing communication problems Note this button is only available when a use
301. orrectly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel and select Regional and Language options 2 Click on the Advanced tab 3 From the Language for non Unicode programs select the language that the application was written for Remember that CX Supervisor 1 25 and earlier was a non Unicode program Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Install files for complex script needs to be selected on the Languages tab Microsoft does not document the reason for this 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Windows 2000 To configure Windows 2000 to correctly display extended characters to allow conversion to Unicode 1 Open Control Panel and select Regional Options Page 220 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features 2 On the General tab select the original application language in the Language settings for the system section Note In some circumstances like Russian or Greek support it has been noted Thai language also needs to be selected Microsoft does not document the reason for this 3 Change the default System Locale to the original application language Click the Set Default button and select the required language 4 OK all dialogs and install new OS files from CD if requested Reboot if required Windows NT To configure Windows NT to correctly display extended
302. os 44 Creating and Editing Control ObjectS oocccoccccocnccocnconcnconnnnnnnnnncnonnnnonnnnnnnnos 48 Manipulating ODJISC Sucia ed a tud 63 Chapter 5 ActiveX Objects ccccccccssssssssssccccsssssssccssssssssses OF VOY assena a cio 69 Henmo lt a NeW OD Sci tos epica 69 Editing Properties at Design TiMe ocooncoccconcnoncnoconononononononononononononenancnanconanos 70 Reading and Writing Properties at Run TiM ooccocccnccnnccnnocnnoconocononnnonnnnnnnnnnnns 72 Calling Methods at Run TiMe ccccecccseeecceeeceeeeceeeeseeeceueeceueeseeeeseeeseeeessgeess 72 RESPORdIAG O EVEN Sist ia ii 12 Chapter 6 Proteinas 10 IU AA e O A naceltd men tiene duet atedeaetiane de 15 Greating a Projeti sai dl ae 75 Amending aro eiii decias 76 SAVING el PPO OCU orea a E RE Ea eE 76 PINUNO UFO SO Osn a tsuaranatn 171 Device Contiguralon it dis 17 DCUMINGS a o ES 83 UAM SNS e e o eee Ree ee 84 RUNTIME Securities lose lidad tds Suita De 91 Revision 1 3 Page ix CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page x Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Contents chapter 6 continued Page EX EOV P A cae de ore oe Gente oe Sinemet enya dees esas deem eee eee ees 97 Compiling and Running a Project occccocnccccnccccnccncnccncnconnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnonanonnnnonnnoss 95 Save RUNUIMO Ascencio dello dl cada 98 Create Runtime Install DISC oooccconccconnocccncconnoconnncanonnan
303. osoft Excel worksheet With DDE Server Points all data transfers are initiated by external DDE Client Application s either requesting or sending point values For example a value could be entered into a cell in Microsoft Excel which would update a CX Supervisor point DDE Client Points A DDE client point sends data to or requests data from an external server application This chapter explains how to create points that make use of the CX Supervisor DDE Client capabilities In order for data to be transferred between a point and a server application the point must uniquely identify the application and the data that is to be used in the transfer DDE applications use a three tiered identification system to distinguish themselves from other DDE applications An application name is at the top of the hierarchy the application name refers to a server application e g EXCEL A topic name further defines a server application e g for Microsoft Excel the topic would define the worksheet to be used e g SHEET1 XLS a server can support one or more topics Finally each topic can have one or more item names which uniquely identifies a data item within a topic 1 e R1C1 or a cell name reference identifies a single cell within a Microsoft Excel worksheet Example A DDE Client point named DDE1 that connects to Microsoft Excel worksheet Sheet1 xls and cell R1C1 is created Pap ae Fee 1 Select the Add Point b
304. osoft Excel worksheet by entering the following formula format into a cell lt Server gt lt Topic gt lt item gt lt index gt Example SCS Point ddearray 3 access ddearray 3 using Point topic or SCS ddetest srt ddearray 0 access ddearray 0 using Project topic Note Microsoft Excel accepts the square brackets used in CX Supervisor to reference an array index in a formula use instead Page 310 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features Note The index must always be specified if an individual array element is required Note CX Supervisor supports Hot DDE links if Microsoft Excel has the link option automatic set then the value in Microsoft Excel are updated whenever ddearray index changes The above example is the simplest way to access read single elements of an array from Microsoft Excel to read write whole arrays it is necessary to use macros Microsoft Excel Visual Basic scripts The example scripts that follow have all been created using Microsoft Excel and are working examples They contain the minimum amount of information required to demonstrate the particular facility being described 1 e they do not contain any error checking code Sending Arrays to CX Supervisor via DDEPoke In order to write to an CX Supervisor array point using the DDEPoke function it must first be given DDE Read Write access via the Advanced Point Settings dialog when adding or m
305. ould have If not an array enter 1 Having checked that all the parameters are correct bring return to the Point Editor window by closing any attributes window that may be open Page 245 CHAPTER 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components OMRON me The CX Supervisor Point will now be connected to Device parameter and can be used like all other CX Supervisor points 1 e to drive animations in alarm expressions in recipes for data logging etc The application can now be run by clicking on the Run Project button in the toolbar Page 246 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 16 Connecting to Omron Industrial Components Release 1 3 Page 247 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Best Practices CHAPTER 17 Best Practices This chapter details the best practices to get the most from CX Supervisor including how to plan and design your application Design This section covers some good design practices There is no doubt as with everything in life that a good design is essential and creating a good CX Supervisor application is no different Poorly designed applications may run slower provide slower user feedback be difficult to maintain increasing costs and in some cases not fulfil all User Requirements resulting in the application being rewritten Never fall into the trap code first think later e Design your page layouts and navigation flow Traditional design works well for most applications Providing an application with a clear structur
306. ource M Automatically open on connection Lock Read Ori Pessimistic Optimistic Name A unique Recordset name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required Recordset Type The Recordset can be 1 of 3 types Table Name The Recordset is the name of an actual table in the Database Server Query The Recordset is the results of a pre defined Server Query stored in the database SQL Text The Recordset is the results of an SQL query executed when the Recordset is Release 1 3 Page 197 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON opened Note Itis more efficient to run a Server Query than an SQL query Note For Database connections all three of the above options are available but for Text or CSV connections only one option is available namely SQL Text For convenience a facility is provided for automatically building the required SQL Text for this type of connection This facility is invoked from the Build SQL button shown below Modify Recordset ES Recordset Properties OF K Cancel _BuldsaL C Table Name Server Query SOL Text Build SEL Source SELECT FROM Tables txt I Automatically open on connection Lock Read Only C Pessimistic iC Optimistic This will bring up a dialog with a list of all valid files in the Directory specified for the Connection After choosing a file and exiting from the Build SQL dialog the r
307. ovide maximum performance and the best responsiveness Page 250 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Best Practices It is important to design the PLC program and SCADA application together This will naturally help create arrays of information and optimise communications allowing CX Server to collect data in the most efficient manner Consider the examples in the following 2 figures PLC Memory Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Page 1 1 sec Page 1 5 sec Page 2 1 sec Figure 1 Bad grouping example In Figure 1 we see the PLC Programmer has arbitrarily chosen to group data by its format Integers then BCD then Floats or even worse not at all When the SCADA is written this data is used by different pages and different update rates The different colours are to indicate that each block must be read individually totalling 9 communication requests which could be for as few as 9 memory addresses Release 1 3 Page 251 CHAPTER 17 Best Practices OMRON PLC Memory 1 sec Page 1 5 sec 5 1 sec Page n Figure 2 Good grouping example However in Figure 2 we see the PLC Programmer and SCADA developer have reorganised the memory now there are only 3 blocks which would be the same for up to 3000 memory addresses This is clearly far better than just 9 memory addresses with 9 communication requests To achieve this design your appl
308. ows entry of Configuration Attributes and assignment of line colours and expressions Release 1 3 ye fae Pee l 2 4 Enter a title for the graph in the Trend Graph Title field Enter the frequency of data sampling in the Sample Rate field in this example it is every five seconds Enter the period displayed by the graph at any one time in the Visible Time Span field Enter the size of buffer for stored data of samples in the Total Time Span field Enter the number of samples on the X axis in the Time Label Every field Click on the background colour and select the required colour from the palette Page 61 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON 7 Toggle the Display Time Labels Display Slider and Value Bar settings as desired Enabling the Value Bar allows the graph to be clicked during runtime to display the data value at that point 8 Enter an arithmetic trace expression for each point or select an expression via a Browse pushbutton An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging the point directly from the Point Editor See chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor 9 Change the fonts used for the Graph Title Scale and Time axis via the appropriate font button Alternatively font sizes can be automatically calculated by selecting the Auto Font Size option 10 Exit the Wizard by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the new Trend Graph attribute
309. ows the alarm message priority and the date and time the alarm was raised Click the Acknowledge pushbutton to close the dialog Alarm Alarm Message i red paint use the reset button Alarm Occurred at 28 05 98 10 18 25 Medium Cancel Pricrity Alarm messages are queued so that as each message is acknowledged the next in the queue becomes visible If anew alarm occurs which has higher or equal priority the details are updated to show this newer more important alarm first The dialog disappears when there are no further alarm messages to be reported Each acknowledgement is logged in the alarm history log with the login name of the current user An unacknowledged alarm does not affect a runtime application Page 120 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms Current Alarms A list of current alarms can be viewed by accessing the Current Alarms dialog A current alarm is one which has been raised but is not yet cleared and acknowledged The current alarm status viewer can be accessed in a variety of ways and is dependant on the setup of the runtime application Some applications may allow access to the dialog via the context sensitive floating menu whilst others may allow access via a pushbutton Refer to chapter 6 Projects or chapter 9 Animation as appropriate The Current Alarms dialog is as follows fel Current Alarms OF ES Lx a Time of Alarm Message Priority Status There are no existi
310. page 1s shown as follows CX Supervisor Untitled Ml x File Edit View Project Utilities Window Help EE AC ASES Times New Roman y fio Y B Z U WH mi i ul fell RAM KN M RCOCOCCKhDAGC oOWey Met BA 3 Project Scripts Pages pages Dy Logging For Help press F1 1221 40 Ai Release 1 3 Page 13 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Amending a Page To amend a page it must first be open If no pages are open click the Open Page button from the toolbar A standard File Open dialog with the caption Open Page is displayed The layout and usage depends on your operating system so see your Microsoft documentation for details F 1 Locate the drive and directory where the desired page is stored 2 Select the desired page from the list presented 3 Click the Open pushbutton to load the page Note Loading a page does not automatically make it part of a project It is therefore perfectly feasible to load and edit pages from other projects Use the Project Editor to attach a page to a project For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects The loaded page may now be edited as required using the CX Supervisor editing tools Defining the Properties of a Page A page has certain attributes or properties These properties may be viewed and edited in two ways The simplest way to access the properties of a page is to double click with the left mouse button in the backgro
311. pervisor 1 2 12 gt CX Supervisor 1 22 7 Write Time ms 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 No of Active Points Note lower write time indicates greater performance See gt How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance Release 1 3 Page 269 APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions OMRON Q How does upgrading CX Server affect communications performance The graphs below should show that this does not have a significant impact The graphs show e Time to perform instantaneous read and writes are slightly slower on average although this is in the order of a few milliseconds so is not ordinarily visible e Maximum number of Subscription points remains the same across all versions This is confirmed with a variety of protocols See gt How does my PC specification affect communications performance See gt What is the maximum number of communication updates 120 00 100 00 8 80 00 E Subscription Ethernet E Subscription Sysmac Way 1 amp 60 00 Subscription Sysmac Way 2 2 gt Read E gt Write xg 40 00 20 00 0 00 CX Server 1 6 3 CX Server 1 7 CX Server 2 2 Q How does my PC specification affect communications performance The graphs below show that processor speed has a significant impact on performance especially for large systems with high quantities of
312. play Points 40 Error Logging Points 40 Internal Points 39 Mouse Points 40 PLC Communication Points 41 Security Points 41 Time Points 38 Point Attributes General Attributes 28 Point Attributes Creating Points 28 Point Editor 23 25 23 25 23 25 About 23 Access 23 Changing the Viewing Mode 25 Create point 25 33 Delete point 34 Dragging from 25 26 Drop and Drag 25 Filtering Points via Group 24 Filtering Points via Point Type 24 Modify point 33 Sorting Points in the View 24 Release 1 3 OMRON Sorting Points View by I O Type 24 Summary of Point Information 25 View 23 25 23 25 23 25 Point Types Creating Points 27 Points About 23 326 Alias definitions 99 132 Animation 123 130 134 Boolean 24 27 28 38 144 147 148 150 321 Constant 322 Editor Point 23 25 23 25 23 25 Find 100 Groups 24 27 38 I O type 324 Information 25 Integer 24 27 28 38 148 151 152 153 324 Maintenance 36 Non volatile points 325 Non volatile rate 86 Point Editor 23 25 23 25 23 25 Print points See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing See also Page Preview page Page Print page Page Setup page for printing Real 24 27 28 38 148 151 152 153 326 Runtime maintenance 36 Script Editor 134 Search 100 Sort 24 String 326 System 134 Text 24 29 38 149 150 327 Variable 326 Polygon
313. point known as a Server which is accessible to all computers Networks affect CX Supervisor in that further Network associated options are available if the computer is Network connected A point that is designated as non volatile is a point whose value is saved on disk and automatically reloaded when CX Supervisor resumes execution A logic operator used to interrogate Boolean type points which produces the Boolean inverse of the supplied argument An example of NOT is that if a is a statement and is FALSE then NOT returns TRUE Ifaisa statement and is TRUE then NOT returns FALSE In CX Supervisor an object can be text graphics a control a bitmap or ActiveX object as created in the development environment A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more objects of any of the above types Specifically graphical objects can be categorised as a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A control is essentially a complex graphic object and is specifically either a pushbutton a toggle button a slider a trend graph a rotational gauge or a linear gauge OLE DB is the underlying database technology on which ADO relies OLE BD is designed to be the successor to ODBC The term used for constants or point variables A symbol used as a function with infix syntax if it has two arguments e g or prefix syntax if
314. precision of the real number display e g to 3 decimal places Finally select animation editor and animate with Display Value Analogue and assign the point name e g TEMP Q Which Operating system should I use Windows XP Professional Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional all offer the best stability reliability multitasking security and DCOM support On the same spec machine Windows NT is actually up to 10 faster probably as it has the least developed code although Windows 2000 and XP are faster on their appropriate minimum specification machines Windows 98 and Windows ME are currently tested although not recommended for industrial solutions Windows 95 is no longer supported Q How do optimise the use of Files When closing a file using the CloseFile script function if TRUE is passed as a parameter e g CloseFile TRUE then the blank spaces at the end of each line will be removed thus reducing the size of the file Care should be taken if the file is being used by multiple systems over a network drive Page 278 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions Q What is the limit of points in a group There is no imposed limit but it is recommended to limit about 1000 points per group There are two main reasons for this e There is a physical limit on how many lines of text the actual list can display This is dependent on the height of the text With large text you may even find that
315. pression 1s used for the value ob Lite Outside of the script language expressions consisting of operators and operands can be used to control objects through actions A field association enables a link to be made between a CX Supervisor Point and a particular field 1 e column within a recordset Page 323 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual Graphic Object GUI VO type Icon Ingredient Integer type Item JScript JVM Microsoft Excel Microsoft Windows Microsoft Word for Windows Nesting Network Page 324 OMRON In CX Supervisor a graphic object is created in the development environment and can be a line an arc a polygon including a square and rectangle a round rectangle an ellipse including a circle or a polyline A complex object can exist as a combination of two or more graphic objects Graphical User Interface Part of a program that interacts with the user and takes full advantage of the graphics displays of computers A GUI employs pull down menus and dialog boxes for ease of use Like all Microsoft Windows based applications CX Supervisor has a GUI Input Output type An attribute of a point that defines the origin and destination of the data for that point The data for a point can originate be input from and is destined is output to to the internal computer memory or PLC Pictorial representations of computer resources and functions The CX Supervisor development environme
316. problems Here are some tips to help diagnose problems e Where you think a problem exists try to create steps to reproduce it see below e Be scientific Decide what the problem could be and perform a test to prove or disprove the theory Perform one test at a time e Check the data values are correct in the PLC using the PLC Data Monitor and are correct in CX Supervisor using the Point Maintenance tool e Prove that scripts are executed by popping up message boxes e For speed or responsiveness issues use the Performance Monitor to check the system is not overloaded Point Maintenance The Point Maintenance dialog is very useful during troubleshooting for displaying and setting point values Launch by right clicking the runtime and selecting Point Maintenance providing that you have sufficient security When an expected animation or script execution has not occurred the Point Maintenance can quickly show if the data is not the expected value If the data is the correct value then the fault must lay with the animation or script Note You can not set the value of points defined as Input only In this case use the PLC Data Monitor PLC Data Monitor The PLC Data Monitor is similar to the Point Maintenance dialog except that it is a CX Server tool that operates at a lower level on the PLC It can be used to read and write logical and physical addresses and using a variety of PLC data formats It is launched by right clicking
317. provide a choice of entries from a drop down menu To edit the values of other ActiveX controls simply click on the control to select 1t The values of the previous object will be replaced with those of the new selection Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects an Actives Property Browser OMAON CK nobControll Properties Back Colour 1 2632256 Borders tyle 1 Raised Title FontColour 0 TitlePozitior U Top Comms erer ame Uninitialsed PLCN ame Mot Set ltem ame Hot Set Updater ate DisplayM ajorT icks 1 True DisplayMinorTicks 1 True Display ajorL nits 1 True Display inorL nits Majorlickinterval i MinorT ickl nterval T h Ming augey alue O ha sels sn ed ale 100 property Displayh ajorl nits In addition to editing properties with the Property Browser many ActiveX controls support their own custom Property Pages These may be accessed in design time by either double clicking the control or right clicking the control and selecting Properties from the Object s popup menu SB GG Al Tooltip Text Graphics Library Chrl L OMRON Cx 7 Segment Control Object Properties About Help Convert Release 1 3 Page 71 CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects OMRON Reading and Writing Properties at Run Time ActiveX properties can be read and written at runtime for example to change values or colours as required This can be achieved using the CX Supervisor script func
318. provided Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS ADOUL the Graphics Editor siisii painaa a aa aaia daaa SEAN Taa 1 PALIGAS 1 Oranice ODC Ba aana a a enaeate se teense sae 4 CONTO e O ee 4 Ugo PA 0 re iat ee eee eer eee eee eee Se ee er 8 TEXU Balt AA Zn o nn E A 9 Gruna ad dl lea 11 Creating a Page so ia 13 Amending a Fage a a 14 Defining the Properties of a Page cooocccccnccccnccocnocannonannccnnnonanonnannonnnonunnonaninnons 14 FUNG Sel AGC AE O POE PES 0 O e E 16 Saving a Page to a Pre Clisstatc cd del 20 CX Supervisor IF reirte id 20 Chapter 3 Fonts iZ What IS aro ode 23 ADOUL Me ROM EdiiOF nn ii A 23 Viewing Points via the Point EditOr ooccooncconcoconoconoconoconoconoconecanconanenonos 24 Acs O mata tye eat tte taal Be 2 Amending an EXISTING FONT surcar dl nr ooo 33 Del eting n EXIStINO POIN cita 34 Quick creation Of MANY points ccoooccccccccccnccncnccncncnnnnnnononnnnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnons 35 Revision 1 3 Page vil CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page viii Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Contents chapter 3 continued Page Runtime POINT Maltenanee iii llei 36 POMBIMPON saasina EN 37 SS IMEI a a et a eo edit 38 FILING PONS ona bodras occ 41 Chapter 4 ODE Susini iia A A A A 45 FANG ODJOCIS aid oda 45 Creating and Editing Graphic ObjectS oocccoccccccnccccncoonnconnconcncnnnnnnanonnnnnnnon
319. r Page 102 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects Adding Pages to a Project When a new page is created it is automatically registered in the Project Editor but its details are not saved When the page is saved as a PAG file a message is displayed requiring confirmation to add this page to the project Click the Yes pushbutton to add the page or the No pushbutton to save the page without adding to the project If the page was not added to the project when saving it can be added later by using the Add Page button on the toolbar Removing Pages From a Project To remove pages from a project select the page by clicking its description on the Project Editor and click the Remove Page From Project button on the toolbar A message is displayed asking Do you want to remove name and path of page from the project Click the Yes pushbutton to delete the page or click the No or Cancel pushbutton to keep it and return to the Project Editor Linking Pages in a Project A number of pages may be linked together within a project Linking allows a main page containing active elements e g pushbuttons to be loaded and depending upon the actions performed 1 e which buttons are clicked allow other pages to be loaded on demand For further details of showing pages on demand refer to chapter 9 Animation Selecting Pages for Display on Run When a project is run the first pages to be displayed can be selected To display a page when
320. r The Server is often the main station and is permanently switched on and often used locally for HMI for example but could have no graphical element which is termed a Blind Server It has direct access to the Devices or Device network and is responsible for collecting the data from the devices Other applications may connect to the Server to read and even control values in the Server These applications are called Client applications or Slaves Clients are often used remotely and therefore are often configured display only applications transferring the data from the Server using the corporate PC network The Clients do not talk directly to the devices and often only connect when required Client 1 Client 2 Client Applications Client 3 Display only gt Ethernet Server Server Applications HM Device Network i gt r m E eres ar iO j wpa Devices Release 1 3 Page 237 CHAPTER 15 Connecting to a remote CX Supervisor application OMRON Peer to Peer Several applications are written to share data with each other Actually an application is written as a Server to connect directly to a device but is also a Client using other Servers to connect to other devices through the corporate network PC Hetwork Ethernet aa Device Connection Devices Distributed Server Several applications are configured as Servers for direct connection so the data for the system is distributed across several
321. r error condition The point value being checked is the value of the ingredient about to be downloaded or the current point value 1f the point is not an ingredient of the recipe being downloaded In the event of a failure the script language should perform a premature lt Return gt This has the effect of failing the recipe validation check and abort the attempt to download the recipe The recipe validation code should not contain any command which requires user input e g a Message command This is because the validation script would not have been completed and appropriate action taken at the time that user input is requested Instead if a message box is required then a point should be used as an error status value and set to an appropriate value This point can then be checked in an on condition script and the appropriate message displayed from there If the validation code exits normally the recipe is downloaded in the normal way Updating an Existing Recipe Open the Recipe Editor dialog as described in chapter 10 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor Page 162 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe entry from the recipe list and select the Modify Recipe button from the toolbar This results in the Modify Recipe dialog being displayed a dialog based on the Add Recipe dialog as shown below Modify Recipe xl Lancel Validate Recipe Before Download val
322. r settings refer to chapter 2 Pages Print Preview To preview the page before printing select Print Preview from the File menu Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print Preview dialog Printing To print the contents of the Graphics Library select the Print button from the toolbar Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Release 1 3 Page 109 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON Page 110 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms CHAPTER 8 Alarms This chapter describes CX Supervisor alarms and the procedures associated with the creation amendment and removal of alarms using the Alarm Editing facility The use of alarms during the running of a project 1s also described What is an Alarm Alarms provide notification of a problem during the execution of an application in runtime Alarms are defined in the development environment and monitored in the runtime environment Alarms range from incidental to catastrophic in nature In runtime the occurrence of an alarm condition and any subsequent change of state 1s recorded in a log file known as the Alarm History log An operator 1s alerted to an alarm condition by means of an Alarm Acknowledge dialog which may also be accompanied by a warning sound A list of current alarms is also maintained Individual alarms are defined in the development environment using the Alarm Editor General alarm settings are controlled in the development env
323. r to login the current user is automatically logged out by CX Supervisor A user with the designer privilege can further amend the user configuration in the runtime environment using a similar dialog to the development environment s Configured Users dialog As well as typing a password verification of the password is required and both fields are disguised by a symbol This is so that a new user can apply their own password and that only they know the password Verification is required to ensure the password was typed correctly in the first instance Option Access Levels To open the Menu Option Access Levels dialog select Menu Option Access Levels from the Runtime Security menu The dialog is displayed as follows Menu Option Access Levels zi Menu Option Access Levels x Menu Option Access Levels Fa General Utities Communications General Utlties Communications General Utilities Communications v Acknowledge AllAlarms fAlUses y M PLE Mantenance AllUsers Z All Users Y Logout All Users Acknowledge Latest Alarm J go Al Users y E Al Users M PLC Data Monitor All Users v v Setup Users v Display Alarm Status M Setup All Users M Display All Users M M PLC Data Trace Al Users M Display Alarm History M Language Settings all Users did i aliin z M PLC 1 0 Table al Users i v PLC Memory Card M Print Page Ss M Display Event Error Log All Use
324. r with Designer privileges is logged in Select the Close pushbutton to complete the operation Optimisation of PLC Communications PLC communication speeds can be increased by creating array points which contain several elements of the same type rather than creating a large number of individual points For instance the time taken to update an array point containing 50 elements are quicker than the time taken to update 50 individual points Creation of an Array Point An array point can be created by specifying a value greater than 1 in the Elements field of the Setup PLC Connection dialog The Data Location field specifies the memory address from which the array of data begins Note Elements of an array point are located at consecutive addresses after the address specified in the Data Location field Accessing Elements of an Array Point Access to array point elements is achieved via the script functions GetPointValue and SetPointValue Both these functions allow the ability to specify an index into a point array For more information on these functions refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Direct access to array points can be achieved by applying a subscript to the pointname e g pointname index Point Import To import PLC points from other applications click the Import PLC Points button from the toolbar This results in the Import PLC Points From Another CX Server Proj
325. rameter value Name A unique Parameter Association name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required By convention this is made the same as the name of the parameter defined within the database but this is not essential Index The index is used to determine which parameter in the Query to associate the value with The index is automatically incremented for each parameter that is added to the Recordset Data Type The Data Type list will be populated with a selection of available data types The correct data type for the parameter being configured must be selected otherwise the Recordset will fail to open Use point to hold parameter value When unchecked the constant Value specified is passed as the parameter to the query When checked the current value of the point is passed as the parameter Point The name of the point to be used The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Value The constant value to be used Page 202 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 12 Databases Configuring Schemas Schemas enable information about a Database to be obtained from a Provider There are a large number of Schema Types available The most useful feature of schemas is the ability to obtain Table and Query names from the Database in fact schemas are used by the Development Environment to populate the Combo boxes when working with live connections
326. referenced with a meaningful description both in the Workspace view and also from the script language It also forms the prefix for the file name A maximum of 26 characters 1s allowed The Period fields allow a period to be entered in Hours Days or Months and defines the period of data to be grouped into a single file For example if the Period is set to 1 month any data logged for the current month is saved to the same data file even when the system is stopped and restarted When logging spans a Month boundary the data file is closed and a new file started and given sequential file name This allows easy archiving and backup of the logged data The start of a new data file is always synchronised to a natural boundary e g for months the 1st of the month for days 24 00 hours and for hours on the hour The No Of Files to Keep entry determines the maximum number of data files that are to be kept Once the number of files kept has reached the value entered as each new file is created the oldest file is deleted For example to keep process data for 2 years you could keep 24 files of 1 month period The file names are generated automatically based on the Data Set name plus a suffix which is incremented by one as each new file is generated If the Keep all Files option is checked the data files management is disabled and no files will be deleted The Start Logging on Application Startup checkbox controls the logging of the Data Set W
327. required settings are the same as for running standard Windows XP as explained below Release 1 3 Page 259 APPENDIX A Configuring a PC for remote connection OMRON Configuring a Client PC running Windows XP LL 1 Start Component Services e g by running DCOMCNFG EXE by selecting Start RUN from the start button The default location is C WINDOWS SYSTEM 2 Select Component Services followed by Computers 3 Right click My Computer and select Properties 4 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Configuring a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 1 2 Devs 1 Start DCOMCNFG EXE e g by selecting RUN from the start button The Start default location is CAWINDOWSISYSTEM 2 View the Default Properties tab Ensure that the Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Configuring a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes a communications Firewall to protect your computer from malicious communications By default this firewall is turned on and so will block all OPC and DCOM communications l 2 Sex To allow OPC or DCOM communications through the firewall either a Completely disable the firewall as follows Note this can leave your computer vulnerable to attack so consult your computer documentation or IT administrator if you are unsure Start 1 Open Control Panel followed by Computers 2 Right click My
328. rm e g 5 Second This method guarantees the value is checked and recorded at every interval However transients occurring between sample periods are not recorded which depending on the application may be a benefit Scale The scale fields enable the graph upper and lower limits to be set and a scale label entered for the selected item Enter the Minimum value as the lower limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Maximum value as the upper limit to be shown on the graph for this item Enter the Scale Label to be displayed This is a text field the contents of which are displayed by the Y scale of the graph The entry should be kept short but also be logical for clarification Editing Items Copy Cut Paste Options The Copy Cut and Paste options follow the windows convention and enable a selected Item to be copied or cut from one Data Set Group and then pasted into another As Item names within a Data Set must be unique when a copied Item is pasted back into the same Data Set the name is given a numerical suffix New or existing Items can be renamed and have their parameters edited by high lighting the Item and then selecting the Edit option from the popup menu When the Modify Item dialog appears edit the appropriate parameters in the normal way Adding Renaming Groups The adding or renaming of Data Set groups follows the windows convention New Groups are added by selecting the Data Set to which the group is to b
329. rogram execution allowing the PLC to be programmed Debug mode allows for the single stepping of program execution This mode is reserved for CV series PLCs only Monitor mode operation allows normal PLC program execution and modification of data Run mode operation allows normal PLC program execution No data in any of the PLC memory areas can be changed It is possible to individually enable disable point communications from the PLC Maintenance dialog Release 1 3 Page 81 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON PLC Maintenance Enable Sane gt Selection of the Communication Settings option displays the Communication Settings dialog showing the current settings for the PLC PLC Communications Settings Page 82 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects It is possible to configure default settings for the runtime via the PLC Runtime Default Settings fields in the Setup PLCs dialog Communications to the PLC can be enabled on startup via the Open PLC option Settings General Settings Colour Palette A specific set of colours may be defined for use within a project This may include a maximum of 66 unique colours To adjust the colours select General Settings from the Projects menu and select Colour Palette from the sub menu CX Supervisor displays the following dialog Colour Palette selected Colour Colour Mame red Cancel m j a DO v ly A A 1 Select the coloured square which require
330. roject As dialog to be displayed Printing a Project All of the printable views of the project can be printed together including page layouts and all scripts This can be useful as a development aid for maintenance and for project documentation ae ore 1 Start CX Supervisor and load the project to be printed 2 From the options dialog select the items to print and press OK 3 Select the printer to print to and press OK Device Configuration tm To amend the device configuration or create connections to a PLC or temperature controller click the Device Setup button from the toolbar This results in the Setup Devices dialog being displayed Device List Close Add Modify E Delete Runtime Default Settings for Device Access Security Level all Users WwW Open Device Creating a PLC Connection A new device can be added by clicking on the Add pushbutton on the Setup Devices dialog Release 1 3 Page 77 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Note CX Supervisor calls an external application to change PLC information The functions described in the following paragraphs may differ slightly depending upon which application and version has been invoked Change PLC Device Name Device Type cs16 Settings Network Type svsmac WAY Settings Comment Cancel A name can be assigned for the device in the PLC Name field Select the PLC from the Device Type field To add a
331. rol objects ActiveX objects Graphical objects are geometric shapes for example ellipses and polygons but also include Text objects Control objects allow information to be displayed and entered in clear way through the use of Wizards Examples of control objects include Pushbuttons and Trend Graphs ActiveX objects or controls are from sources external to CX Supervisor Refer to chapter 4 Objects for further information regarding control objects and bitmap objects Refer to chapter 5 for further information on ActiveX Objects The tools are contained on a Control Bar and within palettes The palettes allow all similar types of tool to be kept together and are contained within a free floating window The various tools and palettes are discussed in the following chapters Status and help information is presented in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main CX Supervisor window Palette The Palette is always displayed on top of any pages created within CX Supervisor If no pages are open the Palette is not displayed and if there are no currently active pages the Palette is rendered inactive An example of the Palette illustrating the position of various palettes and controls is shown below Revision 1 3 Page 1 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON Resposition Control Palette Extended Pattern Palette Extended Colour Palette EET HT Colour Palette o Pattern Palette a OE AE The Palette can be removed
332. ronment being added to the log The Event Error Log dialog is still accessible to switch back subsequently The Enable Column Sorting button allows the format of the Error Event Log dialog to be continually updated when subsequent errors or events are added The Clear Event Error Log button clears all entries from the log The Display All Errors Events button lists all events and errors irrespective of priority The list is sorted according to the Date Time Reported by Pri Event or Message field The Low Priority button lists all errors designated as a low priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible The Medium Priority button lists all errors designated as a medium priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible The High Priority button lists all errors designated as a high priority only Other errors and events are not deleted from the log they are merely not visible e EEE PE The Events button lists all events Errors of all priorities are not deleted from the log Page 90 Release 1 3 OMRON ek la Language Settings CHAPTER 6 Projects they are merely not visible Examples of events are system startup system shutdown and user security notices The Print button prints the current contents of the error and event log Ensure that the printer is correctly set up before printing The Display Result Code Converter la
333. ror message is displayed Visibility Objects can be rendered visible or invisible Specify this using the Visibility dialog To access the Visibility dialog to add an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Visibility dialog to modify an action select Visibility from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar For a list of the objects to which this action is applicable refer to chapter 9 Objects On execution of the Visibility action the Visibility dialog is displayed Page 146 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Visibility Digital Expression x Cancel Visibility State Browse Invisible while TRUE Visible while FALSE i Visible while TRUE Invisible while FALSE To specify a change in an objects visibility enter a Boolean expression in the Digital Expression field Non Boolean expressions may be entered as long as the result is TRUE or FALSE Whether the object is rendered visible or invisible when the expression is TRUE is specified with the Visibility State settings To abort the Visibility edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed
334. rs Vv y al Users y M PLC Errors faru M Print Screen All Users IV Display Recipe Viewer All Users M PLC Setup lan Users M Network Configuration Tool all Users M Performance Monitor Tool All Users y IV Exit Application lan Users M Display Data Log Viewer All Users M Point Maintenance all Users Cancel Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 6 Projects As well as a context sensitive floating menu for the development environment there is a floating menu for the runtime environment which is configurable in the development environment It is possible to select the operations to be on the runtime floating menu by clicking the relevant setting across the three tabs General Utilities and Communications It is also possible to assign a level of user privilege to the menu so each level of user sees a different floating menu This is achieved by selecting a user privilege from the relative drop down list The Communications tab permits the activation of CX Server components such as the PLC Data Trace and PLC Memory Card components Refer to the CX Server Reference Manual for further information on CX Server components On completion click the OK pushbutton to accept changes or the Cancel pushbutton to abort Exit Level An additional security measure can be applied by selecting Exit Level from the Runtime Security menu The Exit Level dialog is displayed as follows Exit Leve
335. rted in this version of CX Server Oxnn18 The PLC could not be opened or the operation failed because the PLC is open for communications Check the communication settings and that another application is not currently using the connection method e g Mouse configured and using COM 1 port communications Attempt to delete a currently selected User Oxnn1B Communications to the device could not be established or the connection has been broken Check the communication settings and connection method to the device An executing command was aborted by the execution of another command or action Oxnn1D CX Server is currently processing the maximum number of requests This error indicates the application is thrashing the maximum possible communications The Point could not be opened or the operation failed because the Point is open for throughput of the device s connection CX Server has reached the maximum limitation for the specified function Oxnn1F Communications Error occurred because of a Network Routing Table problem Check the routing tables in all devices are correctly configured In Alpha C series PLC s ensure the Allow Routing Table flag 1s set The specified Point name or key 1s invalid Device setup information or settings configuration is incorrect Device configuration information or data is incorrect The Unit number specified 1s invalid or does not exist Page 300 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX D CX Server Error Codes
336. rtical Percentage Fill Closed objects can be flood filled along a vertical axis This can be specified via the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog to add an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog to modify an action select Percentage Fill Vertical from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Percentage Fill Vertical action the Percentage Fill Vertical dialog is displayed Percentage Fill Vertical ES Expression OK Cancel Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill Browse iit Minimum Value 2 Filled o la Maximum Yale 100 Filled E Fill Direction f Bottom to Top C Top to Bottom To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Percentage Fill fields The Filled fields specify the percentage of the object to fill when the expression reaches its maximum and minimum values The flood fill also requires a direction This can be specified as top to bottom or bottom
337. ry Element To change the name of a Library object click on the object in the Library the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click on the Modify Library Element toolbar button The Modify Library Element dialog is displayed as illustrated below Modify Library Element Title Pump Cancel Descriptions 1000mm bore low pressure cold water centrifugal pump Identifier Group_8 Enter the new object title text description and identifier Click the OK pushbutton to add the new object description to the Library or the Cancel pushbutton to cancel the operation Delete Object To delete an object from the Library select the object the grab handles are not shown however the object name is highlighted in the Graphics Library Editor and click on the Delete Object toolbar button A message box is displayed with the associated object name to remove Click on the Yes pushbutton to delete the object or the No pushbutton to cancel the operation Using a Graphic Library Object in the Graphics Editor A library object can be added to the Graphics Editor in the same way that the Graphics Editor is used to build libraries by dragging from one dialog to another Once a library object is added to the Graphics Editor it can be further modified since each library object is simply a group of objects As an example a page can be enhanced by using one of the gauges provided in the Gauges 1 defau
338. s Temperature 2 2f temp Updating an Existing Alarm Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database 4 To modify an existing alarm highlight the alarm entry from the alarm list and select the Modify Alarm button from the toolbar This results in the Modify Alarm dialog being displayed a dialog based on the Add Alarm dialog as shown below Modify Alarm General Attributes Alarm Name Event empLow Group lt Default gt Friority Medium T F Acknowledge Box TF Play Sound 4 Auto Acknowledge Print Messages Cancel Browse Description Po Alarm Attributes Expression Browse OvenTemp lt 100 Alarm Type f Simple C Deadband C Rate of Change Alarm Messages Browse Raised w aming Oven temperature te too low Normal Page 118 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 8 Alarms The selected alarm can be redefined as described in chapter 8 Creating a New Alarm Once all the information has been provided for the updated alarm clicking the OK pushbutton commits the alarm to the alarms database whilst the Cancel pushbutton aborts this modify operation Copying an Existing Alarm Definition Open the Alarm Editor dialog as described in chapter 8 Viewing the Contents of the Alarm Database To copy an existing alarm highlight the alarm from the alarm list and then type lt Ctrl
339. s Ingredient Point Expression Editable milk ml milk 50 Yes coffee g coffee 3 Yes sugar g sugar 0 Yes water m1 water 250 Yes Release 1 3 Page 165 CHAPTER 10 Recipes OMRON Using Recipes in Runtime Recipes defined using the Recipe Editor in the development environment can be accessed in runtime using the Recipe Viewer Recipes may be downloaded using the Recipe Viewer Recipe Viewer The Recipe Viewer can be displayed in one of two ways in the runtime environment It may be displayed by any CX Supervisor script code attached for example to a pushbutton The function call is simply DisplayRecipes The Recipe Viewer may also be displayed using the floating menu The floating menu needs to be configured to display the Recipes option This is done in the development environment and explained in chapter 6 Projects The Recipes dialog is displayed as follows gt Recipes MA ES tolw S e Mame Access Coffee Americar Coffee British Coffee European Coffee Irish The Recipe Viewer is similar to the Recipe Editor however there are some differences in functionality and appearance To remove an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Delete Recipe button on the toolbar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click the Yes pushbutton to remove the definition or the No pushbutton to abort the delete operation Note that recipes created in the development environmen
340. s or click Cancel to leave the Trend Graph unchanged The units of measurement of time are selected from the associated field To select graph scaling click the Scaling pushbutton the Trend Graph Scaling dialog box is displayed as follows Cancel Style Attributes e Display Minor Ticks e Display Major Ticks Display Minor Units e Display Major Units Configuration Attributes can be altered by typing over the existing entries The Style Attributes can be amended by clicking on the settings Configuration Attributes Minimum Scale Value E Maximum Scale Value fi Oo Minor Display Units Major Display Units Scale Units Exit the Trend Graph Scaling dialog by clicking the OK pushbutton to accept the scaling attributes or click the Cancel push button to leave unchanged An example of a trend graph is illustrated as follows Page 62 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 4 Objects Databar Databar Value TimeDate Stamp Web Browser Object al The Web Browser object allows web files like HTML JPG or AVI files to be added to a CX Supervisor page These files may be stored locally on a File Server or be distributed from any Web Server The Web Browser object includes a Java Virtual Machine JVM allowing execution of Java Script and Java Applets Double click the object to show the property page and enter the file to be displayed either as a filename or a fully qualified URL for example wi
341. s 180 Remote Data Log VICWER acia A A 181 Data Log EXPO Faces iia adds 182 Dala Lodi a ea a a dia 184 Chapter 12 Databases scsvccssccsssavesccacssacciscasusdecvossscauseacstststarsacste LO AN A A OU a ney ner ae ate 189 Database Connection Editor ccooccccoccocccncccnncnonnononccnnnonannonannnnancnnnnonnnnnnanoss 189 CONMMGUIING a COMMECUON ra 190 Configuring TRE COROS e 197 Configuring Field ASSOCIAtiONS cococcccoocncconnoconnocannoconccnonononnnnannnnannonannnnanonos 199 Configuring Parameter ASSOCIAtiONS coooccconcccccnccccnccononononononnnonnncnnnnonannnnnnnnos 201 Configuring SCIONS aii cote dart tica 202 USING Transactions ac alarde 206 SAVING Recoraseis as ML Ro 207 PaaS RANNO sisi cedar 207 Revision 1 3 Page xv CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page xvi Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Contents Page Chapter 13 Multilingual featurres cccccccsssssssssssssseeees 213 Development Features naaa dal 213 Runtime Language Features occcooccconcconcconnconncnnnonnnonnnonnnonanononenanenanenanenaninons 214 Runtime Multtlingual Features oocococcconcconnconcconcconoconcconconanononenanenanenanenon 215 Configuring Windows for Language Support cccoccccccnnccccncnccccncncnncnconcnonaconnnnnnns 218 Data LOG VIS Wed 222 Adding Unsupported Runtime Languages coocccocncncccncncnnncnnccnnnonanonnconnnonanonanonons 222 PODUD Keyboar
342. s Appendices Page Appendix A Configuring a PC for remote connection 259 Configurating a Client PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 oo 259 Configurating a Client PC running Windows XP ccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 260 Configurating a Client PC running Windows NT or 2000 ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 260 Configurating a Server PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2 260 Configurating a Server PC running Windows XP cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeees 261 Configurating a Server PC running Windows NT or 2000 ceccceceeeeeeeeees 261 Appendix B Frequently asked questions sccccsssrssseee 203 Appendix C Troubleshooting ccccccccccsssscssccccccccceesees 291 Appendix D CX Server error COdES ccccsssscccccccceseees 29O Appendix E Obsolete Features ccccccccccccsssssscscccseseesees SUS GOSS ary OF TCHS nn anar 2 L INNA CK NEEESE T AEE ANE AAA O29 Revision 1 3 Page xix OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor This chapter describes the Graphics Editor and the various tools and controls available It also provides instructions for using these tools and controls and is supported with suitable screen displays About the Graphics Editor The Graphics Editor enables a variety of objects to be created on a page Supported objects are Graphical objects Cont
343. s and Event ccccccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenees 123 ANIMA ION CHO ots dances da tance ase oe Saeco nee 123 RUNIUME ACIOS os ite ge acetone cies e o dd a Ed 129 Chapter O AA O LOT Whatisa ROD dll 157 RECIO COMPONEMIS ia sacecect aia leue ee saca te LoS S 157 Viewing Recipes in the Recipe Editor occcoccconcconcoonccconoconoconoconoconoconenon 158 Creating a New Recipe cccccccssecceseecseeccececeuceceueecueeceeecsaeessueesaueeseeeeseeeseas 160 Revision 1 3 Page xiii CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page xiv Revision 1 3 OMRON CX Supervisor User Manual Table of Contents chapter 10 continued Page Updating an EXiStinG RECIDG usina ica lr kien 162 Copying an Existing Recipe Definition cccoocccoccccocnconcncconononnnnonononanonnnnnnos 164 Deleting an Existing Recipe fhudraenunicuedtetinaaiednativethi ented tied ueliinedindbncivantincen teas 164 Recipe Security Levels occooccoconcoconcccnnnocononcanconononnnnnnnnnnnannonannonancnnnnonanoss 164 MUNG RECIPES aaien a iiecsan lac bhidiaads shcusueidews cau elaa eaten 165 WSINGUNECIDES RUNTIME ia adi 166 Chapter 11 Data Logging ooooooccccccccncnnnccinnococcccnnnnccacinanaconaces 1 1 Whats Data Logging a A 171 DAL AsO e e a a eae 171 Data LOGGING at RUIN E ulmcsrtti Na a i bibuuinananlndiea iu 176 Data Log View Component cscccseccceececeeeeceeccaeeceucecsueesaueesaeeesaeessaeessaeen
344. s any selected text object s to the right edge of the bounding box Text Right Justified only applies to text block text and to text on buttons other controls and graphics cannot be right justified Grid The use of the grid may be helpful in drawing and aligning the objects on the screen Select the Grid button from the toolbar to enable the grid The grid settings are available by selecting Grid from the View menu All the available grid sizes are shown along with a Snap to Grid option which forces graphical objects selected by the user to align according to the current grid setting Revision 1 3 Page 11 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON Page 12 Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages CHAPTER 2 Pages This chapter explains the concept of pages The chapter covers creating amending printing and saving pages Creating a Page A project may consist of several pages but must contain at least one To create a new page CX Supervisor must currently have a project open If no project 1s currently open either click on the Open button from the toolbar to open a previously saved project or select New from the Project menu to create a new project Note When you first create a project CX Supervisor creates a new page for you automatically For more details concerning projects refer to chapter 6 Projects With a project open click the New Page button from the toolbar to create a new blank page An example of a new blank
345. s dialog Changing the selection will update the shown preview To prevent the title from being displayed click the Display Title setting to remove the check mark The following change occurs in the dialog To change the display mode select Overlap Replace or Popup in the Display Mode setting Popup pages appear above all other page types Overlap pages can lie on top of other pages and Replace pages closes any pages that overlap To alter the colour of the page click in the Demo Page Window area or click on the Colour pushbutton CX Supervisor displays the Colour Palette dialog Page 15 CHAPTER 2 Pages OMRON Colour Palette E selected Colour Colour Name leyan Cancel 9 Either select a colour from the palette area or click on a palette colour and edit it using the three colour sliders When the desired colour is displayed click the OK pushbutton to return to the Page Properties dialog 10 Alternatively to display an image or photograph as the background click the Background pushbutton and select the desired file and note the Display Background check box is automatically ticked Printing a Page Print Setup Before printing a page ensure that the printer has been set up correctly To check the printer settings select Print Setup from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the Print Setup dialog in response Page 16 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 2 Pages Print Setup El Printer
346. s editing 2 Adjust its colour values using the Red Blue and Green sliders 3 When the desired colour has been created enter a name in the Colour Name field 4 Click the OK pushbutton when all colours requiring editing have been edited Note The mixing of colours on screen differs from the mixing of for example colour paint Under normal circumstances the more of a colour which is added to a mix the darker 1t gets The opposite 1s the case for mixing colours on screen 1 e Black consists of no Red no Green and no Blue whilst White consists of full Red full Green and full Blue Note The first sixteen colours cannot be mixed Release 1 3 Page 83 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Note Using a 16 colour based screen resolution consult the Microsoft Windows documentation for further information the seventeenth colour onwards are dithered from the sixteen base colours Higher colour based resolutions are not dithered Default Button Font The Default Button Font option which can also be selected from the General Settings sub menu of the Project menu displays the standard font dialog Font Font Font style 5 arial Bald Arial Black Fp Arial Narrow Y Bookman Old Style Tr Bookshelf Symbol 1 F Bookshelf Symbol 2 Bookshelf Symbol 3 Sample AabBbYyZz Script Westem r This dialog is used to set the default font specification to be used for all text displayed on push buttons created usin
347. s the user where an error has occurred and its type If necessary use the scroll bars to see the whole error message Click the OK pushbutton to remove the Compilation Error s dialog and return to the Script Editor to fix the error Horizontal Move Objects can be animated by moving either left or right This is specified using the Move Horizontal dialog Release 1 3 Page 135 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON To access the Move Horizontal dialog to add an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Move Horizontal dialog to modify an action select Move Horizontal from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to the Script Reference chapter 10 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Move Horizontal action the Move Horizontal dialog is displayed El Hove Horizontal Expression x Cancel Active Expression Range Required Position Browse Mininurn ale jo Minimum Offset la 100 100 Masimum 4 ale Masimum Offset To define the animation an expression consisting of a number of operators and operands which may be based on the status of a point must be entered in the Expression field The boundaries in which the object moves are inserted into the Active Expression Range Required Position fields The Maximum Offset specifies t
348. s when an alarm reacts Since Simple is the default type the Simple alarm attributes are initially visible For a Simple alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Attributes Expression Browse Biolertemp gt 100 Alarm Type Simple C Deadband C Rate of Change An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value subsequently fails to meet the expression For a Deadband alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Attributes Expresslorr Browse Biolertemp gt 100 Deadband E E An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised once the point meets the expression The alarm is cleared when the point value falls outside the expression value plus the specified deadband percentage For the example above an alarm is raised when the boiler s temperature exceeds 100 and is cleared when the boiler temperature falls below 95 100 minus 5 C Rate of Change For a Rate of Change alarm the following attributes are displayed Alarm Attributes Expression Browse Biclertemp gt 100 T Base Direction ROC ls a Minutes Up Alarm Type Simple C Deadband An expression based on a point is entered in the Expression field The alarm is raised if the value exposed by the expression incre
349. se Generated Files Additional Information to Export z eae Lime U IL V Breaks in Data W Date J Time xport lype FP Milliseconds CSW Generation of Comma Separated CSV Files Both the ExportLog script function and the Export Dialog use the following conventions for automatically generating comma separated values files for export Page 182 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging All generated CSV filenames will contain at least the lt Data Set name gt lt timestamp gt and a CSV extension CSV is a format that is recognised directly by spreadsheet packages such as Excel and can therefore be opened and viewed with this application e g MyData Set1999011214 csv No characters are used in the timestamp This is for two reasons A Applications like Excel seem to complain about them being there B Less likely to be confused will dlv files during searches purges During the generation of files then obviously duplication of names can occur To avoid this the following convention is used GG _nnn will be appended to any duplicate filenames to make them unique where nnn 1 to 999 If you run out numbers the export will fail tidying up will remedy the problem Generated names depend on whether a single item or multiple items are selected for export Single Selections If a single item is selected for export 1 e Item3 in the root directory of MyData Set then the following file will be gen
350. sers In a runtime application it is possible to apply security measures in the development environment so that only sufficiently privileged users of the runtime application can access certain elements It is also possible to housekeep security information within the runtime environment with privileged users able to add amend or remove users There are four levels of user privilege available in CX Supervisor Operator level privilege Supervisor level privilege Manager level privilege Designer level privilege Release 1 3 Page 93 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON User configuration in the development environment is handled by the Configured Users dialog Select Configured Users from the Runtime Security menu The Configured Users dialog is displayed as follows Configured Users d Users Close Manager Manager Add Operator Operator Supervisor Supervizor Modify Delete User Attributes Poll hanme Designer Logn Hame Besier Parcel Designer Stone Secuii Deel Designer y tica By default there are four previously defined users listed in the Configured Users field Designer with designer level privileges Manager with manager level privileges Operator with operator level privileges and Supervisor with supervisor level privileges To add a new user 1 2 3 1 Click the Add pushbutton The User Attributes fields and buttons become enabled and the contents of all
351. service communications e Try to reduce the number of active messages see below e Try to reduce to usage see below On the Performance tab the quantity of Active Messages is shown Each Active Message is a single communication request although the internal optimisations mean that many continuously addressed points can be read in one message This depends on the frame size which in turn depends on the network type This is why use of arrays and good memory layout are essential to performance To reduce the Active Messages see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points On the Performance tab the current and historic usage is shown 100 usage is rarely seen and the system may be running at capacity well before this This is analogous to a motorway where cars slow down long before they are touching bumpers and might only achieve 50 of capacity each car has a car length space behind it In practical terms for serial connections consider 70 80 the limit For Ethernet packet collisions start occurring above 30 and are automatically corrected but 40 50 is the practical limit For Controller Link which has a vast bandwidth any value above 10 signals a performance issue To reduce the usage see Chapter 16 Best Practices Performance and Chapter 16 Best Practices Points Page 292 Release 1 3 OMRON Diagnostics dialog APPENDIX C Troubleshooting The Runtime has a communications diagnosti
352. set is added the Combo boxes for Table Name and Server Query will be automatically populated with valid entries for the selected Database When the Add Recordset dialog is closed an attempt will be made to open the newly configured Recordset Configuring Field Associations Field associations provide a means of connecting CX Supervisor Points with fields 1 e columns of data in a Recordset thus enabling data transfers to be made between Points and Records By creating a Field Association for each field in a record data can easily be read from a record in the database to its associated points and written from the points to the current record in the database Once a Recordset has been added to a Connection in the Workspace the right menu option Add Field will be enabled Selecting this option will invoke the following dialog Name Modify Field Association E Field Association Properties Name OrderlD Cancel Point nOrderlD Browse Field Order D h Field Property value ha Access field by index M Automatically read on open A unique Field name will be automatically provided This can be modified to provide a more meaningful name if required Release 1 3 Page 199 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Point The name of the point that will be used in data transfers The Browse button may be used to select a current point or add a new one Field The name of the Recordset field t
353. sewhere on the page or press lt Esc gt To split a straight line into two click at the point on the line where the split is required then drag the mouse CX Supervisor creates a new handle which may be moved to the desired point To remove a red handle and the vertex on which it rests click on it with the delete key held down on the keyboard Polyline To create a polyline click the Polyline button Click on the page to draw vertices To finish creating the polyline click the right mouse button To edit a polyline obtain the red grab handles Click on an edge to add a vertex Press the lt Delete gt key whilst moving a vertex to delete it To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Rectangle Rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rectangle click the Rectangle button O To create a rectangle frame click the Rectangle Frame button Alternatively select a filled rectangle and click the Transparency button from the toolbar Click on the page to draw a square or click and drag to create a rectangle of the required size Once created rectangles can be edited exactly like polygons To finish editing click elsewhere on the page Round Rectangle mw Rounded rectangles can be transparent or filled with a colour or pattern To create a filled rounded rectangle click the Round Rectangle button from the Tool Bar Release 1 3 Page 47 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON To create a rounded
354. soft com scripting Wizards are dialogs used by the CX Supervisor development environment to take the user through complex operations in a simplified step by step process Page 327 GLOSSARY OF TERMS CX Supervisor User Manual OMRON Page 328 Release 1 3 OMRON INDEX A About CX Supervisor 327 About the Point Editor 23 About the Project Editor Project Editor 102 Access Alarm Editor 101 111 113 121 122 Animation Editor 124 Graphics Editor 1 Graphics Library 105 Point Editor 23 Project Editor 101 Project Workspace 101 Recipe Editor 101 158 Accessing PLC Connection in Runtime Device Configuration 81 Activating Graphics Library Graphics Library 105 ActiveX Objects Editing 70 Events 72 Inserting 69 Methods 72 Overview 69 Properties 72 Adding Pages to a Project Project Editor 103 Adding unsupported runtime languages 222 Advanced Point Settings Creating Points 32 Alarm Editor 111 13 About 111 13 Access 101 111 113 121 122 Delete alarm 119 Modify alarm 33 34 33 34 Viewing contents 113 Alarm Objects Control Objects 48 Alarm Points Point Import 40 Alarms Alarm Editor See Alarm Editor Current status 121 Customise settings 87 Deadband 116 Editor Alarms See Alarm Editor Groups 113 115 History 121 Information 114 Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual Print alarms See also Page Preview page Page Pr
355. solving plant integration problems As a critical mass of servers and OPC enabled applications become available OPC is likely to become an important part of your plant integration tool set The OPC specification promises a future without proprietary interfaces that will greatly benefit both manufacturing customers and automation suppliers Release 1 3 Page 229 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON How is OPC going to improve my bottom line From a business perspective the use of OPC for connectivity promises to reduce the cost of automation control and integration solutions By using OPC compliant products significant savings can be achieved through shorter development efforts and a wide choice of vendor hardware and software solutions For every automation system installed today a significant amount of time and money 1s spent ensuring that the system can share information with other systems and devices OPC will save the customer time and money by eliminating a lot of the system integration problems caused by lack of open standards that exist between automation devices systems and manufacturing software After an automation system is installed OPC will not improve business bottom line directly however OPC will provide a common method to access real time information The real key to improving the bottom line is to distribute and use the information throughout the business value chain Using CX Supervisor with OPC Ser
356. splays a list of available fonts from which the desired typeface may be selected If more than one block of text is selected with each having different font attributes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list still sets the font attribute for all the selected group of text blocks Fonts and font families are printer dependent therefore changing the printer within the Printer Setup dialog accessed from the File menu changes the fonts which are available within the Font Name field Font Size The Font Size field contains a list of point sizes available on the host version of Windows for the selected font The list is presented in numerical order The following illustration shows the control in de selected state O The following illustration shows the control in selected state Either click the cursor into the editable area of the control and enter a new point size or click the down arrow and select a new point size from the presented list The control displays the current point size for the selected block of text If more than one block of text is selected having different point sizes the edit part of the control is empty However selecting a font from the supplied list or typing in a new point size still sets the point size for all the selected blocks of text Page 10 Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor Text Bold On Off B The Text Bold button allows
357. ssages 89 Exit privilege 97 Floating menu 86 Language settings 91 Menu option access levels 97 Non volatile point rate settings 86 Point substitution settings 92 Points maintenance 36 Recipes 166 Saving a project 98 Screen size 15 87 Security 93 Starting an application 97 Startup conditions 84 User configuration 94 Viewing recipes 166 Runtime Point Maintenance 36 Runtime Security Access Levels 96 Configured Users 93 Runtime settings See Customising CX Supervisor Runtime Settings Settings 84 S Save Page As Saving a Page to a Project 20 Save Runtime As 98 Saving a Page to a Project 20 Closing a Page 20 Save Page As 20 Saving a Project 76 SCADA 323 326 Scatter Graph Control Objects 56 Screen size 87 Script Editor 129 35 About 129 Alias definitions 99 132 Release 1 3 INDEX CX Supervisor User Manual AND statement 321 Arguments 321 Clear 135 Compilation errors 135 Completion 135 Copy 134 Cut 134 Executable files use of 323 Execution attributes 132 Expression dialog 131 Nesting 324 NOT statement 325 Object selection dialog 132 Operator and operand 325 OR statement 325 Paste 134 Points 134 Statements 326 Tabulate 134 Undo 134 View 130 Security 93 97 Add a new user 94 Designer user privilege 93 Development environment user configuration 94 Keyboard 95 Login 95 Lo
358. ssociating Points with Actions and Events CX Supervisor provides a facility to greatly enhance the versatility of a runtime application by the use of actions and animations to execute commands and logical expressions based on specified criteria being met This can take many forms for instance pressing a button opening or closing a page or changes in the positioning of objects on a page CX Supervisor achieves this enhanced functionality in two ways by assigning an expression to a pre defined action or executing commands on a linear basis as a basic programming language In addition such functionality can be carried out on three levels object page or project with different objectives at each level Animations are actioned using the values or states of one or more points For example an integer point is assigned to an object the colour of the object is black when the value of the point is 0 The system causes the value of the point to be changed to the value 5 which changes the colour of the object to red To demonstrate an object s colour can be changed in the runtime environment from black to white This can be achieved using actions and animations in the two ways described with the additional use of points Firstly using a pre defined action the object can be associated with the Change Colour pre defined action runtime action When a Boolean point s value is 0 the colour is black when the point s valu
359. t 5 seconds may practically be the fastest update as some pages may take several seconds to download Also the value after the url is the name of the page to refresh Q Can CX Supervisor be used with Industrial Touchscreen PCs IPCs Absolutely CX Supervisor has special features especially for Touchscreen PCs e Edit animations have option to enter data from a popup keyboard to allow typing direct on the screen e CX Supervisor Login dialog has a popup keyboard e Project setting for Large dialogs to increase font size on high resolution touchscreens giving a larger contact area It is also commonplace to copy a shortcut to the SR2 application to the Startup folder If the keyboard is to be detached see also How To Enable Automatic Login in Windows Omron do not have a preferred IPC supplier although the equipment from Kontron formerly ROT has been used with good success For more details contact the supplier at http www kontron de Q How do you enable automatic login in Windows The initial Windows security screen can be bypassed which may be useful on systems with no keyboards or systems that should start automatically on boot up Information on how to achieve this is published by Microsoft on its Web site see Q253370 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows 2000 and Q315231 How to Enable Automatic Logon in Windows XP Please note the cautions included on registry editing and security Q What is the functional
360. t may not be deleted in the runtime environment The delete operation only affects recipes copied and saved in the runtime environment To modify an existing recipe highlight the recipe from the recipe list and select the Modify Recipe button from the toolbar The Modify Recipe dialog is displayed as follows Page 166 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 10 Recipes Configuration Attributes Recipe Name ole Cancel Descriptior Save Recipe As Black coffee Recipe Ingredients Ingredient Hame Luantity E xoression Editable O Black Coffee Modify Target This runtime version of the dialog is rather more limited in the power it offers than the equivalent dialog in the development environment this is so that recipes which have been painstakingly created in the development environment cannot be accidentally overwritten or destroyed in the runtime environment The two pushbuttons unique to the Runtime of the dialog are Modify Target and Save Recipe As With the appropriate ingredient selected from the list clicking the Modify Target pushbutton allows the target value to be modified by means of the Modify Ingredient dialog shown below Modify Ingredient Quantity Ingredient Attributes Ingredient Mame Milk Cancel Mer Quantity E Keyboard The target value for this ingredient may be changed by entering the new value in the New Target field Selecting the OK pushbutton accepts the change choosi
361. t your Microsoft documentation iP dss 1 Move to the location where the page file is to be stored 2 Ensure that the Save as Type control is set to CX Supervisor Pages PAG 3 Enter a name in the File Name field 4 Click the Save pushbutton to save the file Subsequent saves do not cause the Save As dialog to be displayed After clicking the Save pushbutton if the page is currently not assigned to a project a confirmation dialog is displayed Alternatively select Save Page from the Fi e menu or use the short cut key combination of lt Ctrl gt S Save Page As Should a copy of a page be required for incorporation into another project perhaps select Save Page As from the File menu CX Supervisor displays the File Save As dialog as described previously After entering a new name for the page CX Supervisor prompts to save the different page into the current project as above Closing a Page To close a page after editing select Close Page from the File menu Alternatively either click on the control box for the page located in the top left corner of the page and select Close from the Control menu or simply double click on the Control menu and the page closes Should you attempt to close a page which has not been saved CX Supervisor displays a confirmation dialog If you want to save the changes click the Yes pushbutton Otherwise click the No pushbutton or click the Cancel pushbutton to abort closing the page
362. tact ANY rsDetail region AS Region SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE rsCustSummary BY Region Grand Total example SHAPE SHAPE select customers od unitprice od quantity as ExtendedPrice from customers inner join orders on customers customerid orders customerid inner join order details as od on orders orderid od orderid AS rsDetail COMPUTE ANY rsDetail contactname AS Contact SUM rsDetail ExtendedPrice AS CustTotal rsDetail BY customerid AS rsCustSummary COMPUTE SUM rsCustSummary CustTotal As GrandTotal rsCustSummary Release 1 3 Page 211 CHAPTER 12 Databases OMRON Note The missing BY clause in the outer summary This defines the Grand Total because the parent rowset contains a single record with the grand total and a pointer to the child recordset Grouped Parent Related to Grouped Child example SHAPE SHAPE select from customers APPEND SHAPE select orders year orderdate as OrderYear month orderdate as OrderMonth from orders AS rsOrders COMPUTE rsOrders BY customerid OrderYear OrderMonth RELATE customerid TO customerid AS rsOrdByMonth AS rsCustomers COMPUTE rsCustomers BY region Page 212 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features Chapter 13 Multilingual Features This chapter introduces CX Supervisor s Multilingual features to a new user and explains how to develop in and create applicati
363. tate I Text field If In Place Edit is not checked a popup dialog performs the edit If it is checked the option is edited on the page with the options in a dropdown listbox To abort the Edit Point Value Digital edit click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed During runtime selecting the user input object by clicking the left mouse button results in the digital value being edit either with the runtime User Input Digital dialog being displayed or the in place listbox based on the contents of the development version Page 150 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Select ON or OFF Current State Off Select New State The user is provided with an instruction based on the Runtime Display Attributes field in this example Select New State and On and Off settings based on the State 0 Text and State 1 Text fields The user clicks the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Edit Point Value Analogue The value of a Real or Integer point may be issued to the user for amendment during runtime defined using the User Input Analogue dialog To access the User Input Analogue dialog to add an action select Edit Point Value Analogue from the animation list and click the Ad
364. terfaces All communication with a DCOM object occurs through its interfaces an interface is said to provide a contract a full and unchanging description for the functionality provided by that object Each interface has a unique ID and describes a group of related methods The description of the interface defines the syntax and the semantics of the services provided by that interface the internal implementation of those services doesn t matter to the calling applications In the case of OPC these interfaces for each of the DCOM objects are defined within the relevant specifications This guide only deals with the OPC Data Access specification Custom used by C and Automation used by script languages and VB interfaces What are the benefits of OPC Asking what the business benefits of OPC are is like asking what the benefits of plug and play technology are to the computer industry More choices better access to process data ease of plug and play operation and efficient utilization of development resources are the main benefits of OPC technology OPC brings the value that comes with the use of standards including reduced training costs reduced custom development costs and lower long term maintenance costs By design OPC compliant products work seamlessly with one another With this plug and play approach off the shelf components can be brought together efficiently to solve immediate requirements In addition long term ma
365. th http prefix Manipulating Objects Once inserted objects can be manipulated to give the required results An object must be selected before it can be manipulated Select To select an object either click on it with the left mouse button or select it from the object identification control for further details on this control refer to chapter 1 Graphics Editor Eight grab handles are displayed around the object To select several objects within a rectangular area use a rubber band by clicking the left mouse button and dragging over an area as illustrated below It is also possible to select all the objects a rubber band intersects by holding down the lt Ctrl gt key whilst rubber banding a selection as illustrated below Release 1 3 Page 63 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Multiple objects can be selected by holding the lt Shift gt key down and clicking on each object in turn Objects can also be de selected in similar fashion Grab handles are displayed for each selected object The most recent object to be selected from the group 1s denoted by its green grab handles all other grab handles are cyan The co ordinates of the most recent selection are displayed in the status bar All objects can be selected by clicking Select All from the Edit menu Move To move an object or a number of objects select them and click and hold the left mouse button within the selection the object s can now be dragged to th
366. the Pages to be Displayed list and click on the Remove pushbutton Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Display Page edit click the Cancel pushbutton Close Page CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project to be removed from the display This 1s set up using the Close Page dialog To access the Close Page dialog select Close Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Close Page dialog to modify an action select Close Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable Release 1 3 Page 141 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON On selection of the Close Page action the Close Page dialog is displayed Close Page Available Pages Pages to be Closed OK BALLDIE BALLHELP Lancel BALLWELL lt Remove To specify a page for removal select a page from the Available Pages list and click on the Add pushbutton The page now appears in the Pages to be Closed list Multiple pages can be selected for removal If a selected page for removal is no longer required for that purpose select the page from the Pages to be Closed list and click on the Remove pushbutton Once completed click the OK pushbutton To abort the Close Page edit click the Cancel pushbutton Blink Objects can be animated so that they blink This is
367. the button and the object toggles from solid to outline or vice versa Revision 1 3 Page 7 CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor OMRON The following example illustrates the state of an object before and after clicking the Transparency button with the object selected Before After Status Bar CX Supervisor provides help and status information in a Status Bar located at the bottom of the main window The Status Bar has two main active areas the Help Message area and the Cursor Co ordinates area The Help Message area is used by CX Supervisor to display helpful information concerning menu selections and controls It is located at the left hand end of the Status Bar and can display messages similar to the following Choose fill pattern from palette The Cursor Co ordinates area provides position information for the current location of the mouse pointer as it tracks around the active page within the CX Supervisor window If an object on a page is selected the status area displays the co ordinates of the location of that object An example of the system status area is illustrated as follows Ma ma 4 Page 8 Revision 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 1 Graphics Editor The first two display panels show the current x and y co ordinates of the mouse pointer within the currently active page As the mouse pointer leaves the confines of a page and moves into the client area of the main CX Supervisor window the last recorded co ordinates
368. the runtime and selecting Communication Utilities PLC Data Monitor Release 1 3 Page 291 APPENDIX C Troubleshooting OMRON Most useful is the Address monitor select the Address tab and double click Monitor Any CX Supervisor PLC Symbol point can be selected and monitored and set including Input only points Performance monitor The Performance Monitor tool displays communication information and can be very helpful in diagnosing performance problems It is launched by right clicking the runtime and selecting Communication Utilities Performance Monitor or from the Start menu in the CX Server menu The PLC Average Latency ms field shows the physical delay of the network and PLC response time Depending on the PLC setup and network this should be 9 30ms If this is drastically higher it could be the cause of performance problems Try some of the following steps to reduce it e Test on a dedicated network or if not possible with other nodes disabled This is to ensure it 1s not due to network loading or other external factors e Try with the PLC in STOP mode If this has an impact double check the PLC settings This can vary depending on PLC type but some require a longer scan rate so more free CPU time is available to service the communications whereas some require a shorter scan rate so the communications are service more frequently at the end of each scan Some other settings may also impact the CPUs ability to
369. these DA 2 0 specifications Omron created the first version of CX Server OPC which provides Client and Server software for the CX Automation Suite software range The current version of Omron s CX Server OPC is compliant with version 2 05 of the Data Access specification Other OPC Specifications Since the first OPC Data Access specification was produced in 1995 the OPC Foundation have addressed a number of additional areas of control and automation normally associated with SCADA The original specification for Data Access is now just part of a whole series of specifications that include such areas as Alarms Events and Batch control although the DA interface 1s still far more commonly supported than the others Page 226 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client The figure below shows some of the current areas covered by OPC Interface Specifications OPC OPC Security OPC Common OPC amp XML Interface Definition OPC Data OPC Alarms amp Events OPC Historical Data Access Interface Access Interface OPC Batch Interface Figure 1 OPC Interface Specifications Key Technologies used by OPC This section provides for convenience a brief introduction to some key technologies that are used by or that form part of OPC Some of these are described in more detail in the appendices plentiful reference books are available elsewhere describing all of them in any required level of detail A Brief Introd
370. time tidying up later e Use cursor keys for fine adjustments The cursor keys move selected objects by 1 pixel or snaps to grid if lt Ctrl gt held and vice versa when Snap to grid is active This is a lot easier than using the mouse Page 254 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 17 Best Practices e Group objects To make Workspace navigation of objects easy reduce the number of top level objects by collecting objects together into Groups Grouped objects can be nested on other groups in a natural hierarchy e g a machine has several panels that have keypads that have buttons e Create object libraries Keep a common look and feel between pages and speed up development by creating libraries of commonly used objects e g displays or buttons These can also be reused in later projects e Use Copy and Paste Making good use of Copy and Paste to duplicate similar objects can reduce development time e Use Alignment functions Create professional looking applications by prevent unsightly errors quickly using Align Top Left and Make Same Width Height e Draw perfect circles Quickly draw perfect circles by holding lt Ctrl gt while drawing an Ellipse e Use meaningful object names Instead of accepting the default object and group names rename them to something more helpful e g Conveyorl InstrumentPanel StartButton etc Scripts This section covers some good practices for writing scripts Release 1 3 Page 255 CHAP
371. ting To print the contents of the Point Editor select the Print button from the toolbar Release 1 3 Page 41 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON Refer to chapter 2 Pages regarding the use of the Print dialog Point Substitution Overview As well as using point names in expressions in many cases where text is entered this can be made dynamic by using point substitution Part or all of the text may be a point name enclosed in the Point Substitution characters double round brackets by default Examples of the way in which text is changed The shift foreman was ShiftForeman becomes The shift foreman was Fred Smith and The shift output was shiftOutput litres becomes The shift output was 5000 litres Using Format specifiers Format specifiers can be used similar to the Format script command 6s for text string points d for integer points f for real floating points Where MyTextpoint Hello The text of My text point is s Mypoint becomes The text of My text point is Hello Where MyRealpoint 5467 7658 To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 4 2f MyRealpoint becomes To two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 5467 76 Combinations of format specifiers are possible s to two decimal places the value of MyRealpoint is 4 2f MyTextpoint MyRealpoint becomes Page 42 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points Hello to two decimal places the value of My
372. tions GetProperty and PutProperty or alternatively in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT Displayl Value 100 ENDIF For more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Calling Methods at Run Time ActiveX methods can also be called at runtime This is achieved by using the Supervisor script function Execute or alternatively in VBScript using the normal dot syntax for example VBSCRIPT CommonDialogl ShowOpen ENDIF Again for more details see the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual Responding to Events Some ActiveX components are written to generate events on certain conditions like mouse clicking or user input or error conditions You can write a script to execute whenever any event occurs These scripts are defined as subroutines in the page initialisation script as they may be called any time the page is open To easily add these subroutines from the ActiveX property browser click the Events tab This shows all the event types for this control and any parameters the event may pass for example the code number of the key pressed Select the event name to add or edit the script for and click the square edit button Page 72 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 5 ActiveX Objects Actives Property Browser ScrollB ar Properties Events BeforeDragO ver Cancel Data lt Y Drag gt BeforeDropOrPaste Cancel Action Data Change Error Number Descr
373. to top by selecting the appropriate Fill Direction setting To abort the Vertical Percentage Fill definition click the Cancel pushbutton By clicking the Browse pushbutton a point may be directly specified as described in chapter 9 Runtime Actions Once completed click the OK pushbutton If invalid data has been inserted into any field a descriptive error message is displayed Page 140 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 9 Animation Display Page CX Supervisor allows the specification of pages within a project for display This 1s set up using the Display Page dialog To access the Display Page dialog to add an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Add Action button on the toolbar To access the Display Page dialog to modify an action select Display Page from the animation list and click the Modify Action button on the toolbar Refer to chapter 9 Objects for a list of the objects to which this action is applicable On selection of the Display Page action the Display Page dialog is displayed Display Page Pages to be Displayed OK BALLHELP Cancel Available Pages BALLOONS BALL ELL z Remove To specify a page for display select a page from the Available Pages list and click on the Add pushbutton The page entry now appears in the Pages to be Displayed list More than one page can be selected for display If a selected page is no longer required select the entry from
374. tory viewer respectively 1s automatically displayed in runtime when an alarm occurs Set the Maximum entries in Status Viewer and Maximum entries in History Log fields to the desired values The numbers specify how many messages are displayed in the respective viewer dialogs in runtime Select the Log system start stop messages setting to ON 1f required Note If more messages exist than are requested to be displayed the most recent messages are displayed in preference to older messages The values shown above are sensible defaults In the Alarm Status Messages area if the User Defined Text option is set default messages for Raised Text Cleared Text Acknowledge Text and Auto Acknowledge Text can be applied If the Use Language File Text option is set the alarm status messages default to the supplied language file The Alarm Sound pushbutton allows the selection of an audible warning which may be played when an alarm occurs in runtime The Open Waveform File dialog is shown below Open Waveform File E File Name Directores OF WAY coh aca llbetademoz Benes SC5WelBeta er Demos EJ Bakery EJ Balloon hd Play C Comms DDE A 0 List Files of Type Drives waveform file way a Network Note If the PC installation of CX Supervisor is on a networked machine a Network pushbutton is added to the dialog For further information of the function of the Network dialog refer t
375. traces to view from the Data Set will be shown Up to 10 analogue traces and 50 digital traces may be shown at once Alternatively script parameters can be used to automatically select the traces to show On display the viewer displays the latest data file for this Data Set the X axis set to the Data Set s period Y Axis set to full scale for the first trace The selected analogue traces are shown overlaid Boolean points are displayed in a separate view The X Axis shows true Date and Time as the local time on the logging system Remote analysis within different time zones will show the same dates and times Logging of local time means adjustment of PC time and daylight saving are handled Key shows trace colour name and value at the cursor Selected trace has a gt before the name Clicking on other trace details selects other traces Scale shows Minimum value Maximum value and scale label of selected trace with intermediate scales A cursor allows data to be read off the graph Pressing Ctrl and cursor keys allows moving between logged data A Zoom In and Zoom Out facility Time and Range plus X amp Y axis scrolling are available Previous al and Next buttons load data files for the previous and next time period The Refresh button reloads the file from disk A Live option is used to show the latest data and keep it up to date Data can be exported to CSV files or to t
376. troller A point within the CX Supervisor script language that stores a value or string assigned to that point A point is used to hold a value of a predefined type Boolean Integer Text etc The contents of a point may be controlled by an object or I O mechanism such as PLC communication The contents of a point may control the action or appearance of an object or be used for output via an I O mechanism See also Boolean type Integer type point variable Real type and Text type A CX Supervisor application will consist of one or a number of pages linked together The pages may contain passive or active graphics text or animations and may be grouped together logically to form a project A project may consist of many pages or simply a single page Projects may be built and tested within the CX Supervisor development environment and run stand alone under the CX Supervisor run time environment Only one project at a time may be open for editing within the CX Supervisor development environment A type of point where the value of the point can be any number including those containing a decimal point A recipe is a set of pre defined steps used to perform a particular task A CX Supervisor project may contain zero or more number of recipes Recipes are defined in the development environment and executed or downloaded in the run time environment SCADA applications are run using the run time environment of CX Supervisor following
377. tton to display the Browse dialog An example of the Browse dialog 1s shown as follows Release 1 3 Page 315 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON Browse Look in E system Zj config Repl 3 aaudio dll 8 alrsc dll A dhcp Shell xt Accwiz cll 8 amddlg dl A drivers C spool Acledit dll a amdncdet Al viewers 3 Actiprey dll im append ex D wins Advapi32 dl Apprec32 a 1 546 _hbe dll Advoack dll Arp exe fe Hime gt Filename Me Files of type icon Files Cancel Both programs extension EXE or Dynamic Link Libraries extension DLL are listed in the Files of Type field The Browse dialog functions identically to the File Open dialog described in chapter 6 Projects except the file list offered shows icons as opposed to pages 1 2 3 1 On return to the Change Icon dialog select the required icon from those presented 2 Change the icon s label if required 3 Click the Open pushbutton to return to the Insert Object dialog 4 On return to the Insert Object dialog click the OK pushbutton to return to the current page and embed the selected object into it at the current insertion point Creating an Object From a File Creating an object from a file allows linking or embedding of objects created at sometime in the past As before select Insert New Object from the Edit menu and the Insert Object dialog is displayed Click the Create From File setting and the
378. ttributes Minimum alue 99999999 Maximum alue sasasass Default Value o The minimum threshold for the point is inserted into the Minimum Value field The maximum threshold for the point is inserted into the Maximum Value field Point Type C Boolean a Page 28 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 3 Points The default value is inserted in the Default Value field Note Real points are limited to 1 7E 308 to a precision of 15 digits For a Text point the following attribute is displayed Point Type Point Attributes Boolean Integer Real f Text Texk Text is entered in the Text field Note Memory Text points can have 32768 characters but PLC I O Text Points are limited to 1024 characters I O Type The I O type states the scope of the point 1 e whether it is purely an internal variable or whether it communicates with a PLC lO Type te Memon Resident 7 Input C Output C Input Output A Memory Resident point is provided internally by CX Supervisor An Input point receives data from an external device An Output point sends data to an external device An Input Output point both sends data to and receives data from an external device Memory Attributes The Array Size field allows Memory Point arrays to be created If an Array Size of is specified a single point is created Specifying any other value creates an array of points of this type This option
379. twork settings In the list of network components look for Microsoft Remote Registry If it does not exist follow these steps to add it Pee per Page 304 l In the Network settings ensure User level access control is selected on the Access Control tab Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features 2 From the Configuration tab click Add to add a Network component Choose Service from the type list and click Add 3 Click Have Disk and browse your Windows CD Select the path Admin Nettods remotReg for Win95 CD or Tools ResKit NetAdmin RemotReg for Win98 and select regsrv inf Follow screen prompts to complete installation and reboot if necessary On the server machine select Passwords from the Control Panel Ensure the Enable remote administration of this server option is checked Di Pe A e Add all required user ids to the Administrators list by clicking Add Note Windows ME no longer includes the Microsoft Remote Registry network service on the product CD but this can still be installed and used from any Windows 95 or Windows 98 CD ROM using the above steps Windows 95 This product is no longer supports Windows 95 It is recommended to upgrade to Windows NT or an NT successor like Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional System Points The following System Points are obsolete and are no longer updated Scripts and expressions will currently still compile but their value at Runtime will al
380. u commands When using the pull down menu commands the user is assisted in the completion of the parameters to the command via a series of dialogs The dialogs displayed vary according to the type of command being entered Release 1 3 Page 133 CHAPTER 9 Animation OMRON Points A point may be inserted into the script code in a number of ways Clicking the Browse pushbutton picking the point off the list and clicking the OK pushbutton Typing the name of the point System points form part of the points list Undo Last Action The last edit performed can be undone if required in a number of ways Selecting Undo from the Edit menu Pressing lt Ctrl gt Z in the script code text field Cut to Clipboard An area of script code can be moved to the Microsoft Windows Clipboard in a number of ways Selecting the script code to cut followed by Cut from the Edit menu Selecting the script code to cut in the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt X Copy to Clipboard An area of script code can be copied to the Clipboard if required in a number of ways Selecting the script code to copy followed by Copy from the Edit menu Selecting the script code to copy from the script code text field and pressing lt Ctrl gt C Paste from Clipboard An area of script code can be copied from the Clipboard if required in a number of ways Placing the I beam cursor at the desired point in the script code field
381. uction to DCOM Microsoft describes DCOM as The Distributed Component Object Model DCOM is a protocol that enables software components to communicate directly over a network in a reliable secure and efficient manner Previously called Network OLE DCOM is designed for use across multiple network transports including Internet protocols such as HTTP DCOM is based on the Open Software Foundation s DCE RPC spec and will work with both Java applets and ActiveX components through its use of the Component Object Model COM Release 1 3 Page 227 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client OMRON In other words DCOM is an object programming model for the implementation of distributed applications using a client server pattern A client can use several servers at the same time and a server can provide functionality to multiple clients simultaneously Translating that into plainer English COM basically allows software components to be written in such a way that they can be used by all COM aware applications e g C later versions of Visual Basic without those applications needing to know anything about the internals of the object DCOM is simply the distributed version of COM 1 e the objects can be spread across a network It 1s a very powerful system although some machine level and security configuration may be required to allow it to work correctly and reliably Central to the capability of a DCOM object are its in
382. unches the CX Server error code converter and if a CX Server error is currently selected displays further details about possible causes The Error Information Dialog button once pressed displays a summary of error information including a detailed count of errors and PLC communication information Click the Close pushbutton to remove this dialog Error Information E4 Error Counts Low Priority Errors jo Medium Priority Errors o ES High Priority Errors PLE Communications Status Communication Errors Communications Busy No o The language for user defined text can be set via the Language Settings dialog Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Language Settings to display the Language Settings dialog Release 1 3 Page 91 CHAPTER 6 Projects OMRON Language Settings Language for User Defined Text z Default Danish Deutsch English Espa ol Finnish French Italiana Nederlands Belgie Norwegian Select a language from the Language for User Defined Text field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Point Substitution Settings The enclosing characters associated with a report can be changed via the Point Substitution Settings dialog Once set these characters must be fixed for all reports generated by the project Select Runtime Settings from the Projects menu followed by Point
383. und area of the page This causes CX Supervisor to display the following Page Properties dialog ES Page Properties Page Title E ritither Page Description Border Style None C Thin Thick Sizeable Cancel Colour Background DR e DisplayTitle Display Background x Size Position Attributes Top jo Height J4g0 Lett o Width 1640 Display Mode Overlap C Replace Popup Centre Full Size Keep Page in Memory The Page Properties dialog allows the viewing and editing of various attributes Page 14 Release 1 3 OMRON LE Lido Release 1 3 CHAPTER 2 Pages Enter a title for the page in the Page Title field up to a maximum of 32 characters Add a description 1f required in the Page Description field Enter the co ordinates for the top left corner of the page in the Top and Left field This value must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between O and 2000 Alternatively click on the Full Size pushbutton to fill the runtime environment workspace Enter the height and width measurements for the page in the Height and Width fields These values must be in pixels and must be a positive integer between 0 and 2000 Click on the Centre pushbutton to centre the page to the graphics workspace Select the border style for the page from the Border Style settings The default for this 1s Sizeable as shown on the Page Propertie
384. untime Multilingual Features if this is not suitable The Default language can be set so that at runtime the translated system text automatically loaded and displayed To support the diversity of end users the Runtime features come translated in 15 languages including English and can easily be extended by the developer see Adding unsupported Runtime languages Page 214 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 13 Multilingual Features Note Remember that the choice of runtime language is in no way connected to the language of the installed Developer application Setting the Default language The Runtime application first starts up in the preferred default language Set this language during development from the Language Settings dialog select menu Project Runtime Settings Language Settings Language Settings Language for User Defined Text Default Cancel Default Nederlands Belgie Norwegian After setting when the application 1s next run 1t will start in the selected language Note In this context for this dialog only lt Default gt means no language file will be loaded so the default text compiled in the executable 1 e English will be used This 1s the initial setting and can be useful if no Language features are being used Runtime Multilingual Features Applications supporting more than one language can be very useful for example for general use in countries with more than one national language or w
385. ustrated below Add Object to Library Title Pure Cancel Description 1000mm bore low pressure cold water centrifugal pump Identifier Grug The name of the object used by the Object Identification control is shown in the Title field Type over this with a new name if required this is the name used by the Library Enter a text description in the Description field and an identifier for the object this is used when it is inserted on a page in the Identifier field Click the OK pushbutton to add the object to the Library and place the object in the dialog Click the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation Further details on the Object Identification control are contained in chapter 1 Graphics Editor Alternatively ensure that the Graphics Library Editor is open click and hold the mouse button on the page object and drag it from the page onto the Graphics Library Editor illustrated as follows Graphics Library Library When the mouse button is released the object is placed in the Library and the Add Object To Library dialog is displayed Copying an object to a page from a Library is the reverse of the click and drag procedure Objects can also be cut or copied and pasted into the Library refer to chapter 4 Objects When the object is pasted with the Graphics Library Editor open the Add Object To Library dialog is shown Release 1 3 Page 107 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Library OMRON Modify Libra
386. ut type To exit the dialog click the Close pushbutton The Point Information dialog is shown as follows Point Information Ea Point Summary Total Points Total User Defined Ponts Total Point Groups Point Type Number of Boolean Points Number of Integer Points Number of Real Points Number of Text Points 10 Type Number of System Points Number of Memory Resident Pots Number of Input Points Number of Output Potts Number of Input Output Points Drag and Drop of Points onto Control Objects The Point Editor can be used to drag and drop points onto control objects For instance Integer points can be dragged from the Point Editor onto a Linear Gauge Rotary Gauge Trend Graph and Slider Boolean points can also be applied to a Toggle Release 1 3 Page 25 CHAPTER 3 Points OMRON To apply a point to a control object with the Point Editor Iy 2 Jes l Arrange the CX Supervisor windows so that the point to drag and the target control object are both visible Paint Editia O ES En TS l pm Jo Ze Select the point to associate and drag it onto the page Point Edito Bi x E AN Garou p o gt Je al Mor El fani ila i da n IcHAzan E Sodan hd aint ZAI 3 Drop the point at the position of the target control object An invalid drop is denoted by the mouse pointer changing to a circular symbol For further inform
387. utton from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed 2 Enter DDE1 in the Point Name field 3 Set the V O Attributes setting to DDE and click on the Setup pushbutton The DDE attributes dialog is displayed DDE Attributes Server Mame Exel sis Cancel Topic Hame Ehee ls O ltem Mame A Array SIze Page 306 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features Enter Excel in the Server Name field This is the name of the external DDE server application Enter Sheetl xls in the Topic Name field This is the required topic in this case it is a Microsoft Excel worksheet named Sheetl xls It is possible to specify a specific topic for instance in Microsoft Excel to specify a sheet within a book a colon is used to delimit the information e g Book1 sheet3 xls Enter R1C1 in the Item Name field This refers to the item name Enter 1 in the Array Size field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the settings in both the DDE Attributes dialog and the Add Point dialog Note Itis not necessary to give DDE Client Points DDE access via the Advanced dialog this field is only used in the creation of DDE Server Points If the DDE Access Read Write setting is set ON this point s value would then be exposed to change by external DDE server application s which may not always be desirable This process is repeated
388. vers The exact procedure for connecting CX Supervisor to Third Party OPC Servers will depend on the server being used Consult your server documentation for full details However the following is a basic overview 1 2 O Start the OPC Server and configure any settings and workspace items as described in Start the vendor s manual Start 1 Start CX Supervisor and open your application Ej 2 Open the Point Editor by selecting the Point Editor option from the Utilities menu or by clicking the toolbar button 3 Inthe Point Editor dialog click the Add Point button in the toolbar to open the Add Point dialog 4 Inthe Add Point dialog move to the I O Type options and select the Input Output or Input Output option as appropriate Note that the I O Update Rate and I O Attributes options and displayed 5 Inthe I O Attributes options select OPC Other and click the Setup button This will open the Communications Control Attributes dialog 6 Inthe Communications Control Attributes dialog enter the appropriate parameters as follows Communications Control Attributes Page 230 Release 1 3 OMRON Release 1 3 CHAPTER 14 Using CX Supervisor as an OPC Client Communications Contre Communications Control Attributes Server OMAONC amp OPCCommunicationsContral ce Groupe laopt H ae ltem MSinewae O H Array Size i Server This shows the name of the communications object to connect to the server 1 OMRONC
389. was created on the half hour all subsequent files will contain the full six hours of data 2 Data Set period Days If a Data Set named Batch starts logging at 23 00 on the 29 December 1999 with a period of 1 Day the following files will be created Page 178 Release 1 3 OMRON CHAPTER 11 Data Logging Batch1 1999122923 dlv If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files Batehl 199912292371 Batch 19991230001 dlv Batch1 1999123100 dlv aten 2000010100 dlv The first file will only contain 1 hour of data all subsequent files contain the full 24 hours of data 3 Data Set period Months If a Data Set named Shifts starts logging at 22 00 on 29 February 2000 with a period of 2 Months the following file will created Shifts1 2000032922 dlv If the system is left running the Data Logging directory will contain the following files Shifts 2000050100 dlv Shifts 2000070100 dlv The first file will only contain 1 month and 2 hours of data all subsequent files contain the full 2 Months of data Data Records There are two types of records that are stored in a Data Log file for each Item logged these are Events or breaks and the Actual Data Event Break Records Event records currently consist of the following fields Event Date Time Event Open Close Clear Start Stop Events have no associated data Data Records Data records currently cons
390. ways be 0 GDIResources 0 100 Percentage of GDI resources free SystemResources 0 100 Percentage of system resources free UserResources 0 100 Percentage of user resources free DDE Overview CX Supervisor supports Dynamic Data Exchange DDE which is a method of communication between Windows programs DDE uses messages to exchange data between applications and a protocol to synchronise the passing of data DDE applications fall into four categories client server client server and monitor A client application requests data or services from a server application A server application responds to a client applications requests for data or services Monitor applications can intercept DDE messages but cannot act on them they are therefore useful for debugging purposes CX Supervisor is a client server application which is both a client application and a server application thus requesting and providing information Release 1 3 Page 305 APPENDIX E Obsolete Features OMRON All CX Supervisor DDE data transfers are carried out on points and are asynchronous transfers There are two types of DDE points that can be created namely DDE Client Points and DDE Server Points With DDE Client Points all data transfers or conversations are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending data to or requesting data from external DDE Server Application s For example a CX Supervisor point could be linked to update a cell on a Micr
391. when a Sleep is added to a Project initialisation or Page initialisation script as some parts of the system or objects may not be loaded at time of execution Sleep can cause problems during shutdown of the runtime if a sleeping script is still running Q How dol use System points in Visual Basic VBScript Access CX Supervisor points from Visual Basic style scripting called VBScript couldn t be simpler just use the point name normally e g MsgBox MyPoint However note that is a reserved character so System Points can be accessed with s prefix instead e g MsgBox s Second for Second system point For up to date information and all help on scripting and the Windows Scripting Host see http www microsoft com scripting Q What are the syntax differences between VBScript and CX Supervisor script VBScript has some minor syntax differences to CX Supervisor script The most important are e Boolean equality test is only in VBScript e Boolean inequality test is lt gt in VBScript e Endif becomes End If in VBScript e Array indexing using uses square brackets in VBScript Note that CX Supervisor interprets and characters as string delimiters even in VBScript so the following code does not work Page 282 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX B Frequently Asked Questions MsgBox Press Enter does not work Instead use the following to replace these characters MsgBox Press chr 123 Enter chr
392. write access Note Any CX Supervisor point can be given DDE Access even DDE Client points DDE Array Points CX Supervisor supports arrays in DDE for both Client and Server transactions DDE Client data transfers are initiated by CX Supervisor either sending or requesting data from external DDE Applications such as Microsoft Excel DDE Server data transfers are initiated by external DDE Applications either sending or requesting data to or from CX Supervisor Refer to the CX Supervisor Script Language Reference Manual for further details DDE Client Array Points This chapter explains how to create DDE Client Array points This is similar to the way normal DDE Client points are created except extra information is required to specify the range of the array and also whether it is to be stored as a row or column in the Server application L 2o a 1 Select the Add Point button from the Point Editor toolbar The Add Point dialog is displayed 2 Enter a meaningful name in the Point Name field 3 Set the V O Attributes setting to DDE and click on the Setup pushbutton The DDE attributes dialog is displayed 4 Enter an application in the Server Name field 5 Enter a topic in the Topic Name field Page 308 Release 1 3 OMRON APPENDIX E Obsolete Features 6 Enter the item in the Jtem Name field It is also necessary to specify how the array is to be transferred For instance in Microsoft Excel this is e
393. xt fields for States O and 1 or select ON and OFF the Style Attributes dialog is automatically updated Some toggle buttons can have an On Off colour associated with them The text font can be changed via the Font pushbutton To select a Boolean point click on the Browse pushbutton and click on a point from the displayed list The Select Required Item dialog is displayed as illustrated below Release 1 3 Page 59 CHAPTER 4 Objects OMRON Page 60 Select Required ltem Cancel Point Hames Add Alias 4 ctivedlarms 4 larmCount Add Point available emon 0 avOfMonth DavDfear teme Displayed DemoMode Aliases Disk Space rae GD Resources Points SHigh larme HighE rors M Boolean ner Integer Description Y ma Ter TT Exclude System Points Only viable points can be viewed from a Select Required Item dialog The list of items in the Point Names field can be refined by selecting an option from the Group field Click the OK pushbutton to accept the new point or click the Cancel pushbutton to leave the point unchanged Clicking the Add Point pushbutton or Add Alias pushbutton allows a new point or alias to be created prior to association with the Wizard An existing point can also be associated with the Wizard by dragging a point directly from the Point Editor Refer to chapter 3 Points regarding adding a new point and dragging from the Point Editor Select the Toggle While Pressed fie
394. y using a right mouse button context sensitive menu option Add Connection which invokes the Add Modify Database connection dialog They can be modified later by selecting the Edit option from the menu Add Modify Database connection dialog The Add Connection dialog show below is show when the Add Connection menu option is selected from the Database connection editor and the identical Modify Connection dialog when the Edit menu is selected Add Connection Connection Properties Marne Connection Cancel Data Source CiData source H orthweind mdb a Advanced lM Connect on Application Startup Page 190 Release 1 3 OMRON Name CHAPTER 12 Databases For convenience a unique Connection name is created automatically This can be changed to give a more meaningful description of the connection if required Data Source Enter the database file to be used as a Data Source or locate using the Browse button The following data source file types are supported 4 4 4 4 MS Access Files mdb MS Excel Files xls Text Files txt csv FoxPro Files dbf Data Source Names dsn A Data Source Name file stores information about a database connection in a file See Creating a Data Source Name file for more information Note Note Note Connecting to CSV or Text files is slightly different from an actual Database connection Only the Directory that contains t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Fisher-Price B9759 Instruction Sheet  Instruction Manual LEVO Combi / Combi Junior (Serial number 923    Samsung CS2930PF/HAC دليل المستخدم    Samsung HMX-F80 Camcorder User Manual  Instruction Manual - Pdfstream.manualsonline.com  Spec Sheet - Premier Plant Hire  Sistemas de conectores automáticos Aplicação & seleção    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file